Draft Environmental Impact Assessment - Gujarat Pollution ...

Draft Environmental Impact Assessment For

PROPOSED EXPANSION PROJECT FOR

MANUFACTURING OF ETHYL CHLORIDE

(FROM ETHYL ALCOHOL), ETHYL CHLORIDE

(FROM MIXED SOLVENT OF EXISTING PROCESS), METHYL

CHLORIDE (FROM METHYL ALCOHOL) & HYDROXY PROPYL

METHYL CELLULOSE (HPMC) At

Plot No.: S. No. 303/2, 302/P, 273/2, 275/1

Near Water Works, Abrama, Valsad - 396001

Ta: Valsad, Dist- Valsad, Gujarat.

Land/Plot area: 31,874 m2 (3.1874 Ha)

Production Capacity: 96.54 TPM to 1028.54 TPM

[Proposal No: IA/GJ/IND2/94612/2019]

[TOR Letter No.: J-11011/316/2011-IA II (I) dated 18th March 2019]

[Study Period: 1st December 2018 to 28th February 2019]

[Schedule 5 (f) Category–“A” as per EIA Notification 2006]

APPLICANT CONSULTANT

ASHA CELLULOSE (I) PVT. LTD ECO CHEM SALES & SERVICES

S. No. 303/2, 302/P,273/2, 275/1

Near Water Works, Abrama,

Valsad, Tal./Dist: Valsad - 396001Gujarat.

E-mail: [email protected] [email protected] Mob. No.: 919825132304 +91 2632 254299

Ashoka Pavilion ’A’, New Civil Road,

Surat, 395001.

(QCI/NABET ACCREDITED NO:

NABET/EIA/1720/ SA 085)

E-mail: [email protected]

Tel: +912612231630

June 2019

Doc. No: 2018_ECSS_EIAI2_1800002

mailto:[email protected]



DECLARATION OF CONSULTANT Declaration by Experts contributing to the EIA report for Expansion of manufacturing

of Ethyl Chloride (From Ethyl Alcohol), Ethyl Chloride (From Mixed Solvent Of

Existing Process), Methyl Chloride (From Methyl Alcohol) & Hydroxy Propyl Methyl

Cellulose (HPMC) at S. No. 303/2, 303/P, 273/2, 275/1 Village: Abrama, Ta: Valsad,

District: Valsad, 396001 Gujarat by Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Limited., Schedule 5 (f)-

Synthetic Organic Chemicals Industry, Category–“A” As per EIA Notification 2006 and

its Amendment thereof.

I, hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed the above EIA. EIA Coordinator : Mr. Sunil Patel Signature :

Date : 02/07/2019

Period of involvement : June 2018 - July 2019

Contact information : [email protected]

Functional Area Experts S.

No. Functional

areas Name of Expert

Involvement (period and task**)

Signature and Date

1. AP Mrs. Rekha Shah

June 2018 - July 2019 Site visits followed by selection of monitoring locations, Supervision of air quality monitoring, Identification of probable impacts of different air emission from the plants/ facilities proposed, suggesting most suitable control device and contribution to EIA documentation.

2. WP Mrs. Rekha Shah

June 2018 - July 2019 Site visit & supervision & checking of sampling locations for surface water & Ground water samples & their analysis results, Water use auditing, water balance, water budgeting, water conservation and developing scheme for reuse of water, identification of impacts, finalization of mitigation measures and contribution to EIA documentation.

3. SHW Mrs. Rekha Shah

June 2018 - July 2019 Identification of waste generated from the site, confirming adequacy of mitigation measures for management of hazardous waste and contribution to EIA documentation

4. SE Mr. Ghanshyam Patel

June 2018 - July 2019 Conducting baseline socio-economic surveys through interviews/ questionnaire from the surrounding area/villages of the proposed project, impact identification and mitigation measures for incorporating to EIA documentation

5. EB Mrs. Dipti Patel

June 2018 - July 2019 Site visit and conduct of ecological survey and preparation of status report for rare endangered and threatned species of animals and plants and also species protected under national laws, assessment of the impacts of proposed project activities on the biological environment and


S. No.

Functional areas

Name of Expert

Involvement (period and task**)

Signature and Date

contribution to EIA documentation

6. HG Mrs. Rekha Shah

June 2018 - July 2019 Understanding and representing groundwater conditions, supervision of groundwater sampling locations, finalization of survey findings, identification of impacts, suggestion of mitigation measures and contribution to the EIA documentation

7. GEO Mr. Ravikant Sharma

Not involved as functional area is rationalized as per QCI Scheme for Accreditation Verson 3

--

8. SC Dr. B. K. Patel Not involved as functional area is rationalized as per QCI Scheme for Accreditation Verson 3

--

9. AQ Mr. Dhaval Jhaveri

June 2018 - July 2019 Evaluation of meteorological data with collected secondary data, modeling and prediction, identification of impacts, finalization of mitigation measures and contribution to EIA documentation

10. NV Mrs. Dipti Patel

June 2018 - July 2019 Checking of noise sampling results, analysis of data, identification of impacts and mitigation measures, and contribution to EIA documentation.

11. LU Mr.Joshua Anand

Dec 2018 - Feb 2019 Generation and analysis of data related to landuse pattern. Development of landuse maps of study area using ArcGIS / related tools, site visit for ground truth survey, finalization of landuse maps, contribution to EIA documentation.

12. RH Mr. Vinay Patil June 2018 - July 2019 Identification of hazards and hazardous substances Preparation of impacts diagrams & mitigation measures, preparation of disaster management plan, contribution to EIA documentation.

Declaration by the Head of the Accredited Consultant Organization/ authorized person

I, Rekha S. Shah, hereby, confirm that the above mentioned experts prepared the EIA Expansion of manufacturing of Ethyl Chloride (From Ethyl Alcohol), Ethyl Chloride (From Mixed Solvent Of Existing Process), Methyl Chloride (From Methyl Alcohol) & Hydroxy Propyl Methyl Cellulose (HPMC) at S. No. 303/2, 303/P, 273/2, 275/1 Village: Abrama, Ta: Valsad, District: Valsad, 396001 Gujarat by Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Limited. I also confirm that EC has gone through the report, and the consultant organization shall be fully accountable for any mis-leading information mentioned in this statement.

It is certified that No unethical practices including plagiarism have been carried out and external data/text has not been used without proper acknowledgement, while preparing this EIA report. Signature :

Name : Rekha S. Shah Designation : CEO Name of the EIA Consultant Organization

: ECO CHEM SALES & SERVICES Office Floor, Ashoka Pavillion – A, Opp. Kapadia Health club, Surat 395001 (GJ)

NABET Certificate No. & Issue Date : NABET/EIA/1720/ SA 085(Rev.01), Valid upto February 20, 2020

Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd.

Proposed Expansion Project for Manufacturing of Ethyl Chloride (From Ethyl Alcohol), Ethyl Chloride (From Mixed Solvent of Existing Process), Methyl Chloride (From Methyl Alcohol) & Hydroxy Propyl Methyl Cellulose (HPMC)

Eco Chem Sales and Services, Surat, Gujarat 2018_ECSS_EIAI2_1800002

I

UNDERTAKING BY PROJECT PROPONENT




II

UNDERTAKING BY CONSULTANT




III

ABBREVIATIONS

AAQM - Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

APC - Air Pollution Control

APHA - American Public Health Association

BOD - Biochemical Oxygen Demand

CC&A - Consent to Operate

CETP - Common Effluent Treatment Plant

COD - Chemical Oxygen Demand

CPCB - Central Pollution Control Board

DGVCL - Dakshin Gujarat Veej Company Limited

DO - Dissolved Oxygen

EC - Environmental Clearance

ECC - Emergency Control Centre

ECSS - Eco Chem Sales and Services

EHS - Environment Health and Safety

EIA - Environment Impact Assessment

EMC - Environmental Management Cell

EMP - Environmental Management Plan

ETP - Effluent Treatment Plant

FMO - Factory Medical Officer

FO - Furnace Oil

GPCB - Gujarat Pollution Control Board

HAG - Hot Air Generator

HSD - High Speed Diesel

IS - Indian Standards

LDO - Light Diesel Oil

MoEF&CC - Ministry of Environment Forest and Climate Change

NAAQS - National Ambient Air Quality Standards

NABET - National Accreditation Board for Education and Training

OHC - Occupational Health Centre

OSHA - Occupational Health and Safety

PPEs - Personal Protective Equipment

RA - Risk Assessment

RO - Regional Office

SCM - Standard Cubic Meter

SEAC - State Level Expert Appraisal Committee

SMF - Stack Monitoring Facility

STP - Sewage Treatment Plant




IV

TDS - Total Dissolved Solids

TOR - Terms of Reference

TPM - Ton per Month

TR - Refrigeration tons

ZLD - Zero Liquid Discharge




V

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 1. Project Name and Location

Name: Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd.

Location: S. No. 302/P, 303/2, 273/2, 275/1, Near Water Works, Abrama, Valsad-396001, Ta:

Dist: Valsad, Gujarat.

2. Products & Capacities. If expansion proposal then existing products with capacities and reference to early EC.

Existing capacity 96.544 TPM, Proposed Capacity 932.0 TPM, Total 1028.544 TPM

Total 8 products will be manufactured after proposed expansion.

The unit has obtained environmental clearance vide F. No. J-11011/316/2011-IA II (I) dated on

25/06/2015 from MOEFCC for the existing unit. The unit regularly submits six monthly EC

Compliance Report to the MoEFCC - RO, Bhopal and also complies with all CC&A Conditions.

3. Requirement of Land, Raw Material, Water, Power, Fuel with Source of supply (quantitative)

Components Existing Expansion Total Source of Supply

Land, m2 31874 0.00 31874

6300 m2 existing open area will

be utilized

Fresh Water, kl/day 37.48 0 37.48 Sourced by own borewell.

Power, kVA 650 350 1000 Sourced from Dakshin Gujarat Vij Co. Ltd.

Steam Boiler (3 Tons/h)

Natural Gas, SCM/h

230 0 230 Gujarat Gas

FO kg/h 200 0 200 Local Traders

Steam Boiler (3.5 Tons/h)

Coal, kg/h 0 510 510 Local Traders

Thermopak: (6 lakhs k cal/h)

Natural Gas, SCM/h

0 135 135 Gujarat Gas

FO, kg/h 0 115 115 Local Traders

Hot Air Generator (6 lakhs k cal/h)

Natural Gas, SCM/h

50 0 50 From Gujarat Gas

LDO, kg/h 40 0 40 From Local Traders


Natural Gas, SCM/h




Natural Gas, SCM/h



D G set (110 kVA)

HSD, kg/h 45 0 45 From Local Traders

D G set (35 kVA)

HSD, kg/h 15 0 15 From Local Traders




VI

4.Process Description in brief, specifically indication the gaseous emission, liquid effluent and Solid/Hazardous waste and Measures for mitigating the impact on the environment and mode of discharge or disposal Process description is given in Chapter 2 as Section No. 2.4. Gaseous Emission Flue gas emission

Presently, the unit has installed one number of natural gas/FO fired 3 TPH steam boiler, three

numbers of FO/LDO fired steam boiler having capacity of 800 kg/h each and two numbers of

LDO/Natural gas fired hot air generator having capacity of 6 lakhs k cal/h each. Two numbers of

D G sets having 110 kVA and 35 kVA capacity. 30 meters height of chimney with SMF provided

to 3 TPH boiler, 15 meters common chimney provided for all three boiler and two HAG. 11 meters

chimney provided for D G Sets.

After proposed expansion, existing one number of natural gas/FO fired 3 TPH boiler will be

continued. Existing three numbers of 800 kg/h capacity of boiler will be discontinued. Existing two

numbers of hot air generator will be continued. Additional one number of coal fired 3.5 TPH boiler

and one number of FO/natural gas fired 6 lakhs k cal/h capacity of thermopak and one number of

natural gas/LDO fired hot air generator of 6 lakhs k cal/h capacity will be installed. Existing two

numbers of D G sets having 110 kVA and 35 kVA will be continued.

30 meters height of chimney with SMF provided to 3 TPH boiler, 15 meters common chimney

is/will be provided for three HAG. 30 meters chimney with ESP will be provided to 3.5 TPH coal

fired boiler. 11 meters height of chimney will be provided to 6 lakhs k cal/h capacity of thermopak.

11 meters chimney provided for D G Set.

Process gas emission

There will be no process gas emission from the reaction. Vent attached to spin flash dryer is

considered as process gas emission.

Presently two numbers of spin flash dryer having capacity of 50 kg/h and 100 kg/h are used.

Adequate capacity of separate cyclone separator and bag filter along with 11 meters chimney for

each dryer is provided.

After proposed expansion, existing two numbers of spin flash dryer having capacity of 50 kg/h

and 100 kg/h will be used. One additional spin flash dryer having a capacity of 100 kg/h will be

installed. Adequate capacity of separate cyclone separator and bag filter along with 11 meters

chimney for each spin flash dryer will be provided.

Liquid Effluent

Total Industrial waste water generation will be 218.015 KLD. 10.55 KLD high TDS water will be

directly sent to MEE. Balance 207.465 KLD water will be treated in primary, secondary and

tertiary treatment plant. Treated water will be taken to Reverse Osmosis. 173 KLD RO permeate

will be recycled in the process. Balance 30 KLD of RO rejected is taken to MEE. 34.5 KLD of

MEE condensate is recycled in the process. Thus there is no discharge of industrial effluent on

land.

Domestic waste water (2.0 KLD) will be disposed off through septic tank to ETP.

Solid and Hazardous Waste After proposed expansion

Used Oil – 0.11 TPA

Discarded containers/bags – 62 TPA

ETP waste – 130 TPA

MEE waste – 948 TPA

Dust from air filtration system – 0.22 TPA

Salt from process – 1703 TPA




VII

Mixed Solvent from the process – 1849.38 TPA

Distillation Residue / & Laboratory organic waste – 4.22 TPA

Spent carbon from ETP & Chimney – 6 TPA

Date-Expired, Discarded and off-specification Material & floor sweeping – 2 TPA

Spent Filter cloth & filter material – 1 TPA

Spent Resins from D M plant – 1.2 TPA

Used hot & cold insulation material – 0.6 TPA

Weak caustic soln. (18-20%) – 4430.4 TPA

Fly ash – 179 TPA

6. Capital Cost of the Project, Estimated time of completion

The total project cost after expansion will be Rs 3054.27 Lakhs, including existing investment of

Rs 1538 Lakhs.

It is estimated that Implementation of project will be completed within 6 months, considering EC

obtained day as a 1st day of implementation

7. Site selected for the project- Natural of land – Agricultural (Single/double crop), barren, Govt/Private land, status of is acquisition, nearby (in 2-3 km) water body, population, with in 10 km other industries, forest. Eco-sensitive zones, accessibility.

The land for the expansion is already in the possession of project proponent as expansion to be executed in the existing premises.

Inter-State Boundary - Dadra & Nagar Haveli (At 25.80 km in S) Daman & Diu (At 16.60 km in

SW).

Water body within 10 km radius of project site - River Auranga (At 0.24 km in N), Arabian Sea (At

9.18 km in W)

Nearby Major Industries - Nitrex Chemicals India Limited, Ecopast Limited.

8. Baseline environmental data – Air quality, Surface and Ground water quality, Soil characteristic,

Flora and Fauna, Socio-Economic condition of the nearby population.

As per the baseline study results of study area gaseous parameters (PM10: 62.5 – 87.3 µg/m3,

PM2.5: 32.1 – 48.4 µg/m3, SO2 : 8.6 – 17.8 µg/m3, NOx:13.6 – 23.6 µg/m

3) are below the standard

norms prescribed by NAAQS.

Surface water (pH: 7.25 – 7.78, TSS : 7 -10 mg/L, TDS: 187 – 330 mg/L, DO: 4.7 -5.1 mg/L,

BOD: <4 – 6 mg/L). It is interpreted that River water quality does not meet with drinking water

norms as per IS 10500:2012. Results of COD, BOD and Iron indicate towards the contamination

of organic matter and metal. This organic contamination may be due to throwing the flowers in

rivers, animal bath in rivers or directly/indirectly discharge of sewage/Effluent. These waters

should not be directly used in drinking purpose but it can be used in drinking after conventional

treatment followed by disinfection. These waters can directly be used in irrigation and other

domestic purposes. Interpretation relate to sample collected from particular points and results for

tested sample only.

Ground water results of tested parameters (pH : 7.14 – 7.56, TDS: 664 – 843 mg/L, Total

Hardness: 363 – 467 mg/L, Total Alkalinity :276 – 416 mg/L, Chloride: 186 – 286 mg/L, Total

Coliform: Absent) It is interpreted that portability of water can be considered good except vashiyar

village as all the results have been found during the permissible range of drinking water. Iron

content in the ground water of vashiyar village has been found slightly higher than the permissible

limit. Ground water of vashiyar village should not be directly used in drinking purpose. It can be

used for drinking after passing through RO. Other ground water sources can be utilized for all

domestic, drinking purpose and irrigation purpose. This interpretation relate to the comparison

study with IS: 10500 and results found for the sample collected from particular location.

As per soil analysis data (pH: 7.43 -7.63, Total nitrogen: 0.052 – 0.073 %, Total Phosphorous:

16.8 – 18.7 mg/100g, Exchangeable Calcium: 23.5 – 26.3 mg/100g, Exchangeable Magnesium:

9.5 – 10.8 mg/100g) it is concluded that surface soils are neutral in reaction.




VIII

All the common species of flora and fauna were observed for flat terrain during the survey. Mango

and Chickoo species were dominant, no endangered species observed during primary survey.

Herbal species were observed rarely.

Literacy rate of the study region is from 72.09% to 88.80%. On the basis of survey for literacy rate data it is interpreted that there is need to promote education among more and more people.

9. Identification of hazardous in handling processing and storage of hazardous material and safety system provided to mitigate the risk.

After identifying hazards in handling processing and storage of hazardous material both Qualitative and

Quantitative risk has been analyzed. Mitigation measures like periodical training on fire drill and using

SCBA, conducting emergency response drill on yearly basis, training drivers for transportation of

hazardous goods, providing fire extinguishers etc.

10. Likely impact of the project on Air, Water, Land, Flora-fauna nearby population.

Looking to the overall project justification, process, pollution potential and pollution prevention

measures/technologies installed by proponent, environmental management activities of proponent; it has

been concluded that the proposed project would not have any considerable impacts on environment as

well as socio-economic and ecological conditions of the project area

11. Emergency preparedness plan in case of natural or in plant emergencies.

On- Site and Off- Site emergency plan has been prepared by including Safety committee along with their

roles and responsibilities, mutual aids arrangements, roles and responsibilities of stake holders including

stake holders, etc.

12. Issues raised during public hearing (if applicable) and response given Considering the products and project location of the proposed expansion, it is noticed that the proposed expansion falls under the item no. 5 (f) – Category „A‟ according to EIA Notification, SO 1533 amended on 14th September 2006. Public hearing is applicable as proposed expansion will be carried out outside the Notified Industrial Area. 13. Occupational Health Measures

Personnel protective equipment such as safety shoes, safety goggles, hand gloves, gum boots,

safety helmet, and breathing apparatus set kit will be given to all workers and staff. Additional

PPEs will be readily available at the workplace.

Medical surveillance for the workers working in risk zone is/will be carried out regularly.

Safety awareness programs will be conducted.

14. Post Project Monitoring Plan

Post project environmental monitoring is/will be done as per MoEFCC/CPCB/GPCB guidelines by

following recommended/standard method approved by MoEFCC/CPCB.

22 Lakhs/annum budget has been allotted environment monitoring.




IX

TOR COMPLIANCE

ToR Letter No. : J-11011/316/2011-IA II (I) dated 18th March 2019 under Schedule 5 (f) Category–“A” as per EIA Notification 2006 and its Amendment

thereof for expansion in Production capacity from 96.54 TPM to 1028.54 TPM for the manufacturing of Ethyl Chloride (From Ethyl Alcohol), Ethyl

Chloride (From Mixed Solvent Of Existing Process), Methyl Chloride (From Methyl Alcohol) & Hydroxy Propyl Methyl Cellulose (HPMC) at S. No.

303/2, 302/P, 273/2, 275/1 Near Water Works, Abrama, Valsad – 396001.

A Standard TOR Reply Citation

1) Executive Summary Complied. Page No: V

2) Introduction

i. Details of the EIA Consultant including NABET

accreditation Details are incorporated in EIA/EMP report

Chapter 12

Page No.: 239

Annexure XIII

Page No: 297

ii. Information about the project proponent

Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd. was incorporated in the year 1988. The Plant is located

at Abrama, Near water Works, Valsad, Dist. Valsad, Gujarat State. Mr. Hirubhai V

Shah is Chairman & Managing Director. The unit has experienced technocrats

having more than 30 years of experience in manufacturing & marketing of Ethyl

cellulose, Ethyl Chloride, HPMC, Methyl Chloride and its derivatives.

Section 1.2.2

Page No: 36

iii. Importance and benefits of the project Details are incorporated in EIA/EMP report. Section 8.1

Page No: 201

3) Project Description

i. Cost of project and time of completion.

Total Cost of the project after proposed expansion (Existing: 1516.27 Lakh + 1538

Lakh) is 3054.27 lakhs. Project completion schedule is given in EIA/EMP report.

Section 2.3.3, 2.7

Page No: 52, 76

ii. Products with capacities for the proposed

project.

Details of products with capacities for the proposed project are incorporated in

EIA/EMP report.

Section 2.2

Page No: 45

iii. If expansion project, details of existing products

with capacities and whether adequate land is

available for expansion, reference of earlier EC if

The proposed expansion will be take place in existing premises only by utilizing

spare area. Earlier EC file no. J- 11011/316/2011-IA II (I). and Land document are

incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Annexure II, IV

Page No: 243,

265




X

any.

iv. List of raw materials required and their source

along with mode of transportation. Details of raw material are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Section 2.3.1

Page No: 47

v. Other chemicals and materials required with

quantities and storage capacities

Details of other chemicals and materials required with quantities and storage

capacities are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Section 2.3.1.1

Page No: 49

vi. Details of Emission, effluents, hazardous waste

generation and their management. Details are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Section 2.5

Page No: 69

vii.

Requirement of water, power, with source of

supply, status of approval, water balance

diagram, man-power requirement (regular and

contract)

The total water requirement after expansion will be 244.9 KLD (Fresh: 37.48 KLD +

Recycled from RO/MEE is 207.5 KLD) and it will be sourced by own bore well.

Industry has already obtained permission from CGWA for withdrawal of ground

water.

Water Balance Diagrams for existing and after proposed project are incorporated in

EIA/EMP report.

Existing power requirement is 650 kVA. Total Power requirement after proposed

expansion will be 1000 kVA. It is/will be sourced from Dakshin Gujarat Veej Co. Ltd.

During the construction phase approximate 25-30 Nos. of workers will be required.

Presently there are 110 Nos. of employees. There will be additional 50 Nos. of

employees as per their skills and qualification, Thus, total number of employees after

proposed expansion will be 160.

Section 2.3.5

Page No: 54

Annexure V

Page No: 278

Section 2.3.5

Page No: 54

Section 2.3.6

Page No: 55

Section 2.3.9

Page No: 56

viii. Process description along with major equipment

and machineries, process flow sheet (quantative)

from raw material to products to be provided

Detail process description along with flow diagram is incorporated in EIA/EMP

report.

Section 2.4

Page No: 57

ix. Hazard identification and details of proposed

safety systems.

Details of Hazard identification and details of proposed safety measures are


Section 7.4.1

Page No: 180

x. Expansion/modernization proposals:

c. Copy of all the Environmental Clearance(s)

including Amendments thereto obtained for the

project from MOEF/SEIAA shall be attached as

The existing unit of Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd. has obtained Environmental

Clearance vide letter no. F. No. J-11011/316/2011-IA II (I) dated on 25th June, 2015

is attached with EIA/EMP report.

Annexure II

Page No: 243,

251




XI

an Annexure. A certified copy of the latest

Monitoring Report of the Regional Office of the

Ministry of Environment and Forests as per

circular dated 30th May, 2012 on the status of

compliance of conditions stipulated in all the

existing environmental clearances including

Amendments shall be provided. In addition,

status of compliance of Consent to Operate for

the ongoing Iexisting operation of the project

from SPCB shall be attached with the EIA-EMP

report.

Certified Compliance Report file No: 5-9/2016(ENV) /674 dated on 14/12/2018 is

attached with EIA/EMP report.

Existing Consent to Operate vide letter no. AWH-87084, dated on 12/07/2017 is

attached with EIA/EMP report.

Annexure III

Page No: 254

d. In case the existing project has not obtained

environmental clearance, reasons for not taking

EC under the provisions of the EIA Notification

1994 and/or EIA Notification 2006 shall be

provided. Copies of Consent to Establish/No

Objection Certificate and Consent to Operate (in

case of units operating prior to EIA Notification

2006, CTE and CTO of FY 2005-2006) obtained

from the SPCB shall be submitted. Further,

compliance report to the conditions of consents

from the SPCB shall be submitted.

Not Applicable

----

4) Site Details

i.

Location of the project site covering village,

Taluka/Tehsil, District and State, Justification for

selecting the site, whether other sites were

considered.


S. No. 302/P, 303/2, 273/2, 275/1, Near Water Works,

Abrama, Valsad-396001, Ta: Dist: Valsad, Gujarat.

----

ii.

A toposheet of the study area of radius of 10km

and site location on 1:50,000/1:25,000 scale on

an A3/A2 sheet. (including all eco-sensitive

areas and environmentally sensitive places).

Study Area map of radius of 10km is incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Chapter: 3

Figure : 3.1

Page No: 79




XII

iii. Details w.r.t. option analysis for selection of site

The project is an expansion project thus it is already having a well-developed

necessary infrastructure facilities within existing premises. Details of site selection

are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Section: 5.2

Page No: 165

iv. Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four corners of the site.

Existing Site:

Corner Latitude Longitude

A 20°35'38.59"N 72°57'42.50"E

B 20°35'44.25"N 72°57'42.08"E

C 20°35'42.13"N 72°57'36.74"E

D 20°35'37.38"N 72°57'38.87"E

E 20°35'37.61"N 72°57'41.78"E

Proposed Plant:


A 20°35'38.59"N 72°57'42.50"E

B 20°35'44.25"N 72°57'42.08"E

C 20°35'42.13"N 72°57'36.74"E

D 20°35'37.38"N 72°57'38.87"E

E 20°35'37.61"N 72°57'41.78"E

-----

v. Google map-Earth downloaded of the project

site. Google map-Earth images are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Chapter: 2

Figure: 2.1, 2.2

Page No: 43

vi.

Layout maps indicating existing unit as well as

proposed unit indicating storage area, plant area,

greenbelt area, utilities etc. If located within an

Industrial area/Estate/Complex, layout of

Industrial Area indicating location of unit within

the Industrial area/Estate.

Layout plan of the project site is attached in EIA/EMP report.

Chapter: 2

Figure: 2.3

Page No: 53

vii.

Photographs of the proposed and existing (if

applicable) plant site. If existing, show

photographs of plantation/greenbelt, in particular.

Photographs of site visit and sampling activities are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Chapter: 3, 10

Figure: 3.2, 10.3

Page No: 82, 226

viii. Land use break-up of total land of the project site

(identified and acquired), government/private – Details are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Section: 2.3.4

Table: 2.8




XIII

agricultural, forest, wasteland, water bodies,

settlements, etc shall be included. (Not required

for industrial area).

Page No: 52

ix.

A list of major industries with name and type

within study area (10km radius) shall be

incorporated. Land use details of the study area.

Nitrex Chemicals India Limited and Ecopast Limited are the industries within 10 km

radius.

Land use details of the study area are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Section: 3.6

Page No: 93

x. Geological features and Geo-hydrological status

of the study area shall be included.

Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of the study area are incorporated

in EIA/EMP report.

Section: 3.7

Page No: 96

xi.

Details of Drainage of the project up to 5km

radius of study area. If the site is within 1 km

radius of any major river, peak and lean season

river discharge as well as flood occurrence

frequency based on peak rainfall data of the past

30 years. Details of Flood Level of the project

site and maximum Flood Level of the river shall

also be provided. (mega green field projects).

Details of drainage map are incorporated in EIA/EMP report. Section: 3.6.2

Page No: 95

xii.

Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition is not

complete, stage of the acquisition process and

expected time of complete possession of the

land.

Land is already in the possession of project proponent. Land document is attached

in EIA/EMP report.

Annexure IV

Page No: 265

xiii. R&R details in respect of land in line with state

Government policy. Not Applicable ----

5) Forest and wildlife related issues (if

applicable):

Not Applicable ----

i. Permission and approval for the use of forest

land (forestry clearance), if any, and

recommendations of the State Forest

Department. (if applicable)

ii. Land use map based on High resolution satellite

imagery (GPS) of the proposed site delineating

the forestland (in case of projects involving forest

land more than 40 ha)




XIV

iii. Status of Application submitted for obtaining the

stage I forestry clearance along with latest status

shall be submitted.

iv. The projects to be located within 10 km of the

National Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere

Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals,

the project proponent shall submit the map duly

authenticated by Chief Wildlife Warden showing

these features vis-à-vis the project location and

the recommendations or comments of the Chief

Wildlife Warden-thereon.

v. Wildlife Conservation Plan duly authenticated by

the Chief Wildlife Warden of the State

Government for conservation of Schedule I

fauna, if any exists in the study area.

vi. Copy of application submitted for clearance

under the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, to the

Standing Committee of the National Board for

Wildlife.

6) Environmental Status

i.

Determination of atmospheric inversion level at

the project site and site-specific

micrometeorological data using temperature,

relative humidity, hourly wind speed and

direction

and rainfall.

Month Temperature (

oC) Relative Humidity (%)

Wind Speed

(km/hr)

Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.

Dec'18 13.2 33.2 22.0 95.0 0.1 10.0

Jan'19 12.3 34.7 16.0 90.0 0.1 15.0

Feb'19 13.2 35.6 18.0 92.0 0.1 13.0

Chapter 3

Section: 3.3

Page No: 82

ii.

AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations for

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, CO and other

parameters relevant to the project shall be

collected. The monitoring stations shall be based

We have selected 8 locations AAQ data. Details are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 3

Section: 3.4

Page No: 86




XV

CPCB guidelines and take into account the pre-

dominant wind direction, population zone and

sensitive receptors including reserved forests.

iii.

Raw data of all AAQ measurement for 12 weeks

of all stations as per frequency given in the

NAQQM Notification of Nov. 2009 along with –

min., max., average and 98% values for each of

the AAQ parameters from data of all AAQ

stations should be provided as an annexure to

the EIA Report.

Details of Raw data of all AAQ measurement for 12 weeks of all stations are given in

EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 3

Table: 3.4-3.8

Page No: 87

iv.

Surface water quality of nearby River (100m

upstream and downstream of discharge point)

and other surface drains at eight locations as per

CPCB/MoEF&CC guidelines.

We have done sampling only surface water monitoring for 4 locations and Surface

water quality and other details are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 3

Section: 3.11.7

Page No: 105

v.

Whether the site falls near to polluted stretch of

river identified by the CPCB/MoEF&CC, if yes

give details.

No ----

vi. Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8

locations shall be included.

We have done ground water monitoring for 7 locations. Details of ground water

monitoring are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 3

Section: 3.11.4

Page No: 101

vii. Noise levels monitoring at 8 locations within the

study area. Details of Noise monitoring are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 3

Section: 3.5

Page No: 90

viii. Soil Characteristic as per CPCB guidelines. Details of Soil characteristics are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 3

Section: 3.10

Page No: 98

ix.

Traffic study of the area, type of vehicles,

frequency of vehicles for transportation of

materials, additional traffic due to proposed

project, parking arrangement etc.

Details of Traffic study of the area, type of vehicles, frequency of vehicles for

transportation of materials, additional traffic due to proposed project, parking

arrangement etc. are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 3

Section: 3.9

Page No: 97

x. Detailed description of flora and fauna (terrestrial Details of EB study are incorporated in EIA/EMP report. Chapter 3




XVI

and aquatic) existing in the study area shall be

given with special reference to rare, endemic and

endangered species. If Schedule- I fauna are

found within the study area, a Wildlife

Conservation Plan shall be prepared and

furnished.

Section: 3.12

Page No: 114

xi. Socio-economic status of the study area.

During the primary survey it was observed that almost pakka road facility is available

in all villages within 10 km radius. Literacy rate of the study region is from 72.09% to

88.80%. On the basis of survey for literacy rate data it is interpreted that there is

need to promote education among more and more people. Almost all the villages

have more than 50 % people as non-workers. It indicates that the problem of

unemployment can be solved by providing proper training and education. There is

also need to establish more industries so that maximum number of employment can

be generated. Basic amenities like Education facilities Health care facilities, water

supply, electric power supply, mode of transportation etc. are available in all villages.

Chapter 3

Section: 3.13

Page No: 120

7) Impact and Environment Management Plan

i. Assessment of ground level concentration of

pollutants from the stack emission based on site-

specific meteorological features. In case the

project is located on a hilly terrain, the AQIP

Modelling shall be done using inputs of the

specific terrain characteristics for determining the

potential impacts of the project on the AAQ.

Cumulative impact of all sources of emissions

(including transportation) on the AAQ of the area

shall be assessed. Details of the model used and

the input data used for modelling shall also be

provided. The air quality contours shall be

plotted on a location map showing the location of

project site, habitation nearby, sensitive

receptors, if any.

Details of Air modeling are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 4

Section: 4.4.1.3

Page No: 146




XVII

ii. Water Quality modeling - in case of discharge in

water body Not Applicable ----

iii. Impact of the transport of the raw materials and

end products on the surrounding environment

hall be assessed and provided. In this regard,

options for transport of raw materials and

finished products and wastes (large quantities)

by rail or rail-cum road transport or conveyor-

cum-rail transport shall be examined.

Total 6 trucks/day will be required for transportation of raw material and finished

products.

Impacts on transportation have been described in EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 4

Section: 4.4.1.1

Page No: 144

iv. A note on treatment of wastewater from different

plant operations, extent recycled and reused for

different purposes shall be included. Complete

scheme of effluent treatment. Characteristics of

untreated and treated effluent to meet the

prescribed standards of discharge under E(P)

Rules.

Details of Effluent Treatment Plant and characteristics of treated effluent are


Chapter 10

Section: 10.2.2

Page No: 205

v. Details of stack emission and action plan for

control of emissions to meet standards.

Details of Stack emission and its control measures are incorporated in EIA/EMP

report.

Chapter 10

Section: 10.3.2

Page No: 241

vi.

Measures for fugitive emission control Measures for fugitive emission control are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 10

Section: 10.3.2

Page No: 213

vii. Details of hazardous waste generation and their

storage, utilization and management. Copies of

MOU regarding utilization of solid and hazardous

waste in cement plant shall also be included.

EMP shall include the concept of waste-

minimization, recycle/reuse/recover techniques,

Energy conservation, and natural resource

conservation.

Solid and hazardous wastes generated at the end of manufacturing process or

waste treatment process are/will be stored on impervious floor having roof and

boundary wall. Management of generated wastes will be done as per HW

(Management, Handling and Trans boundary Movement) Rules, 2016. Details of

disposal of solid/hazardous waste are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Membership Certificate of TSDF site is attached with EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 10

Section: 10.5

Page No: 218

Annexure: VI

Page No: 280

viii. Proper utilization of fly ash shall be ensured as

per Fly Ash Notification, 2009. A detailed Fly ash is/will be disposed for brick manufacturing in an ecofriendly manner.

Chapter 10

Section: 10.5




XVIII

plan of action shall be provided. Page No: 218

ix. Action plan for the green belt development plan

in 33 % area i.e. land with not less than 1,500

trees per ha. Giving details of species, width of

plantation, planning schedule etc. shall be

included. The green belt shall be around the

project boundary and a scheme for greening of

the roads used for the project shall also be

incorporated.

Greenbelt of 6325 m2 is already developed and additional 3800 m

2 Green belt will be

developed. Considering 90% survival rate approx. 630 Nos. of trees and 750 Nos. of

shrubs will be planted within the next five years.

Detailed five year greenbelt development program including annual budget, types &

number of trees to be planted, area under green belt development and others is

incorporated in the EIA/EMP report

Chapter 10

Section: 10.9

Page No: 224

x. Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at

plant site shall be submitted to harvest rain water

from the roof tops and storm water drains to

recharge the ground water and also to use for

the various activities at the project site to

conserve fresh water and reduce the water

requirement from other sources.

Detailed Action plan for rain water harvesting at project site is incorporated in

EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 10

Section: 10.11.1

Page No: 227

xi. Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for

environmental pollution control measures shall

be included.

Asha Cellulose has allocated about Rs. 168 lakhs for an expansion towards

environmental protection measures. The annual recurring cost of environmental

control for the proposed project has been estimated to be Rs. 214 Lakhs/Annum of

the total EMS cost.

Chapter 10

Section: 10.12

Page No: 229

xii. Action plan for post-project environmental

monitoring shall be submitted.

Detailed Action plan for post-project environmental monitoring is incorporated in

EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 6

Section: 6.1

Page No: 168

xiii. Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and Man-

made) Preparedness and Emergency

Management Plan including Risk Assessment

and damage control. Disaster management plan

should be linked with District Disaster

Management Plan.

Disaster management plan along with on-site and off-site emergency plan are


Section: 7.6,

7.6.1, 7.6.2

Page No: 191,

193

8) Occupational health




XIX

i. Plan and fund allocation to ensure the

occupational health & safety of all contract and

casual workers.

Detailed plan and fund allocation for occupational health & safety are incorporated in

EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 10

Section: 10.7

Page No: 221

ii. Details of exposure specific health status

evaluation of worker. If the workers' health is

being evaluated by pre designed format, chest x

rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision testing (Far

& Near vision, colour vision and any other ocular

defect) ECG, during pre-placement and

periodical examinations give the details of the

same. Details regarding last month analyzed

data of above mentioned parameters as per age,

sex, duration of exposure and department wise.

Regular Health check-up of workers has been carried out and will be continued after

proposed expansion. Health check-up reports of workers are attached with EIA/EMP

report

Annexure: VIII

Page No: 285

iii. Details of existing Occupational & Safety

Hazards. What are the exposure levels of

hazards and whether they are within Permissible

Exposure level (PEL). If these are not within

PEL, what measures the company has adopted

to keep them within PEL so that health of the

workers can be preserved,

Details of Occupational Health &Safety are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 7

Section: 7.7

Page No: 199

iv. Annual report of health status of workers with

special reference to Occupational Health and

Safety.

Regular Health check-up of workers has been carried out and will be continued after

proposed expansion. Health check-up reports of workers are attached with EIA/EMP

report

Annexure: VIII

Page No: 285

9) Corporate Environment Policy

i. Does the company have a well laid down

Environment Policy approved by its Board of

Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA

report. The Company has well developed Environmental Policy. Annexure: VII

Page No: 283 ii. Does the Environment Policy prescribe for

standard operating process / procedures to bring

into focus any infringement / deviation / violation




XX

of the environmental or forest norms /

conditions? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA.

iii. What is the hierarchical system or Administrative

order of the company to deal with the

environmental issues and for ensuring

compliance with the environmental clearance

conditions? Details of this system may be given.

The hierarchical system of the company is described with figure in EIA/EMP report.

Section: 10.13.2

Figure: 10.11

Page No: 259

iv. Does the company have system of reporting of

non-compliances / violations of environmental

norms to the Board of Directors of the company

and / or shareholders or stakeholders at large?

This reporting mechanism shall be detailed in the

EIA report

The company has developed a Hierarchal system for reporting of non-compliances /

violations of environmental norms to the higher management. Details are


Section: 10.13.2

Figure: 10.4

Page No: 231

10) Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as

sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to be provided to

the labour force during construction as well as to

the casual workers including truck drivers during

operation phase.

The necessary infrastructure facilities like drinking water and sanitation will be

provided to the construction workers and truck drivers within the project site. --

11) Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC)

i. Adequate funds (at least 2.5 % of the project

cost) shall be earmarked towards the Enterprise

Social Commitment based on Public Hearing

issues and item-wise details along with time

bound action plan shall be included. Socio-

economic development activities need to be

elaborated upon.

The company also proposes to carry out social welfare activities for the welfare of

local community. The company has proposed a detailed CER Plan. Under this plan,

the proponent has allocated a budget of Rs. 15.3 Laks i.e. 1 % of the proposed

project cost to be spent within a period of 5 years. Details of CER are incorporated in

EIA/EMP report.

Section: 10.8

Page No: 223

12) Any litigation pending against the project and/or

any direction/order passed by any Court of Law

against the project, if so, details thereof shall

also be included. Has the unit received any

notice under the Section 5 of Environment

Not Applicable ---




XXI

(Protection) Act, 1986 or relevant Sections of Air

and Water Acts? If so, details thereof and

compliance/ATR to the notice(s) and present

status of the case.

13) A tabular chart with index for point wise

compliance of above TOR. Complied Page No: IX

B Specific TOR

1. Details on solvents to be used, measures for

solvent recovery and for emissions control. Detailed Solvent management Plan is incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Section: 10.4

Page No: 216

2.

Details of process emissions from the proposed

unit and its arrangement to control.

Existing two numbers of spin flash dryer having capacity of 50 kg/h and 100 kg/h will

be used. One additional spin flash dryer having a capacity of 100 kg/h will be

installed. Adequate capacity of separate cyclone separator and bag filter along with

11 meters chimney for each spin flash dryer will be provided.

Section: 10.3.2

Page No: 213

3. Ambient air quality data should include VOC,

other process-specific pollutants* like NH3*,

chlorine*, HCl*, HBr*, H2S*, HF*,etc.,(* as

applicable)

Complied Section: 3.4.4

Page No:88

4. Work zone monitoring arrangements for

hazardous chemicals. Complied

Section 6.1

Page No. 168

5.

Detailed effluent treatment scheme including

segregation of effluent streams for units adopting

'Zero' liquid discharge.

Total Industrial waste water generation will be 218.015 KLD. 10.55 KLD high TDS

water will be directly sent to MEE. Balance 207.465 KLD water will be treated in

primary, secondary and tertiary treatment plant. Treated water will be taken to

Reverse Osmosis. 173 KLD RO permeate will be recycled in the process. Balance

30 KLD of RO rejected is taken to MEE. 34.5 m3/day of MEE condensate is recycled

in the process. Thus there is no discharge of industrial effluent on land.

Section: 10.2.2

Page No: 205

6. Action plan for odour control to be submitted. Details of Odour control plan are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Section: 10.10

Page No: 226

7. A copy of the Memorandum of Understanding

signed with cement manufacturers indicating

clearly that they co-process organic

solid/hazardous waste generated.

Complied Annexure: XII

Page No: 294




XXII

8. Authorization/Membership for the disposal of

liquid effluent in CETP and solid/hazardous

waste in TSDF, if any.

Membership of TSDF site is attached with EIA/EMP report. Annexure: VI

Page No: 280

9. Action plan for utilization of MEE/dryers salts. Details are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Section: 10.2.2

Page No: 205

10. Material Safety Data Sheet for all the Chemicals

are being used/will be used. Complied

Annexure: XVI

Page No: 311

11. Authorization/Membership for the disposal of

solid/hazardous waste in TSDF. Membership of TSDF site is attached with EIA/EMP report.

Annexure: VI

Page No: 280

12. Details of incinerator if to be installed. Waste will be sent to common incineration facility.

Section: 10.5.2

Page No: 218

13. Risk assessment for storage and handling of

hazardous chemicals/solvents. Action plan for

handling & safety system to be incorporated.

Details are incorporated in EIA/EMP report. Section: 2.3.1.1

Page No: 49

14. Arrangements for ensuring health and safety of

workers engaged in handling of toxic materials. Details are incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Section: 10.7.2

Page No: 221




XXIII

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 ..................................................................................................................................... 35

INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 35

1.0 PRELUDE ............................................................................................................................... 35

1.1 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT ................................................................................................. 35

1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT AND PROJECT PROPONENT ....................................... 35

1.2.1 Identification of the project ................................................................................................ 35

1.2.2 Details of the Proponent ................................................................................................... 36

1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT ..................................................................................... 37

1.3.1 Nature, Size and Location of the project ........................................................................... 37

1.3.2 Importance to the Country and Region ............................................................................. 38

1.4 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK AND NEED OF EIA STUDY .............................................. 39

1.5 SCOPE OF THE EIA STUDY ............................................................................................. 39

1.6 STRUCTURE OF EIA REPORT ......................................................................................... 40

1.7 SUMMARY ......................................................................................................................... 41

CHAPTER 2 ..................................................................................................................................... 42

PROJECT DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................ 42

2.0 GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... 42

2.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................. 42

2.1.1 Location, Type and Size of Project ................................................................................... 42

2.1.2 Salient Features ............................................................................................................... 44

2.1.3 Need of the Project ........................................................................................................... 44

2.2 DETAIL OF PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................... 45

2.2.1 Transportation of Products ............................................................................................... 46

2.3 RESOURCE REQUIREMENT ................................................................................................. 46

2.3.1 Raw Material Requirement ............................................................................................... 47

2.3.2 Raw material Transportation ............................................................................................. 51

2.3.3 Project Cost ...................................................................................................................... 52

2.3.4 Land ................................................................................................................................. 52

2.3.5 Water ............................................................................................................................... 54

2.3.6 Power Requirement .......................................................................................................... 55

2.3.7 Steam Requirement.......................................................................................................... 55

2.3.8 Fuel Requirement ............................................................................................................. 55

2.3.9 Manpower ........................................................................................................................ 56

2.3.10 Utilities............................................................................................................................ 56

2.4 MANUFACTURING PROCESS AND FLOW DIAGRAM ......................................................... 57

2.4.1 Ethyl Cellulose (Aqua Process) (Existing): ....................................................................... 57

2.4.2 Ethyl Cellulose (Solvent Process) (Existing): .................................................................... 58




XXIV

2.4.3 Manufacturing Process of Aqueous Ethylcellulose Dispersion- Non Plasticized ............... 61

2.4.4 Manufacturing Process of Aqueous Ethylcellulose Dispersion- Plasticized ...................... 62

2.4.5 Ethyl Chloride Through Alcohol: ................................................................................... 64

2.4.6 Ethyl Chloride Through existing mix solvent: ................................................................ 65

2.5 POLLUTION POTENTIAL AND ITS CONTROL MEASURES ................................................. 69

2.5.1 Air Environment ................................................................................................................ 69

2.5.2 Water Environment ........................................................................................................... 72

2.5.3 Solid/Hazardous Waste .................................................................................................... 73

2.5.4 Noise Environment ........................................................................................................... 75

2.6 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY .............................................................................. 75

2.7 IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE ............................................................................................ 76

2.8 ASPECTS IMPACTS ANALYSIS ............................................................................................ 76

2.9 SUMMARY .............................................................................................................................. 78

CHAPTER 3 ..................................................................................................................................... 79

DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................................................ 79

3.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................ 79

3.1 BASELINE STUDY AREA AND PERIOD ............................................................................ 79

3.2 METHODOLOGY ............................................................................................................... 80

3.2.1 Frequency of Sampling ................................................................................................ 80

3.2.2 Method of Environmental Sampling and Analysis ........................................................ 81

3.3 MICROMETEOROLOGY .................................................................................................... 82

3.3.1 Temperature ................................................................................................................ 83

3.3.2 Humidity ...................................................................................................................... 83

3.3.3 Wind Speed and Wind Direction .................................................................................. 83

3.3.4 Wind Rose ................................................................................................................... 83

3.3.5 Interpretation of Micrometeorological Data ................................................................... 86

3.4 AIR ENVIRONMENT .......................................................................................................... 86

3.4.1 Selection of Sampling Locations .................................................................................. 86

3.4.2 Frequency and Parameters for Sampling ..................................................................... 88

3.4.3 Methodology for Sampling and Analysis ...................................................................... 88

3.4.4 Quality of Ambient Air .................................................................................................. 88

3.4.5 Summary of Ambient Air Quality ....................................................................................... 89

3.4.6 Interpretation of Ambient Air Quality Data ......................................................................... 90

3.5 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ..................................................................................................... 90

3.5.1 Sources of Noise Pollution ............................................................................................... 90

3.5.2 Noise Level in the Study Area .......................................................................................... 90

3.5.3 Summary of Noise Data ................................................................................................... 93

3.5.4 Interpretation of Noise Data .............................................................................................. 93

3.6 LAND ENVIRONMENT ....................................................................................................... 93




XXV

3.6.1 Land Use Pattern of the Study Area ................................................................................. 93

3.6.2 Drainage Map ................................................................................................................... 95

3.6.3 Summary .......................................................................................................................... 96

3.7 GEOLOGY .......................................................................................................................... 96

3.8 HYDROGEOLOGY ............................................................................................................. 97

3.9 TRAFFIC STUDY ............................................................................................................... 97

3.9.1 Interpretation of Traffic Study ........................................................................................... 98

3.10 SOIL QUALITY ................................................................................................................ 98

3.10.1 Summary of Soil Data ................................................................................................ 100

3.10.2 Interpretation of Soil Data .......................................................................................... 100

3.11 WATER ENVIRONMENT .............................................................................................. 101

3.11.1 Reconnaissance ........................................................................................................ 101

3.11.2 Water Quality ............................................................................................................. 101

3.11.3 Sampling and Analysis ............................................................................................... 101

3.11.4 Ground Water Resources .......................................................................................... 101

3.11.5 Summary of Ground Water Quality ............................................................................ 105

3.11.6 Interpretation of Ground Water Quality Data .............................................................. 105

3.11.7 Surface Water ............................................................................................................ 105

3.11.8 Summary of Surface Water Quality .............................................................................. 109

3.11.9 Interpretation of Surface Water Quality Data ................................................................ 110

3.11.10 Marine Water .............................................................................................................. 110

3.11.11 Summary of Marine Water Quality .............................................................................. 113

3.11.12 Interpretation of Marine Water Quality Data ................................................................ 113

3.12 ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY ........................................................................................ 114

3.12.1 Methodology adopted for the study of Flora and Fauna ................................................ 114

3.12.2 Floral Diversity of the Study Area ................................................................................. 114

3.12.3 Interpretation of Ecology and Biodiversity ..................................................................... 119

3.13 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................. 120

3.13.1 Socio-Economic Survey Methodology .......................................................................... 120

3.13.2 Demography ................................................................................................................. 120

3.13.3 Population Density ....................................................................................................... 121

3.13.4 Sex Ratio ...................................................................................................................... 122

3.13.5 Literacy Rate ................................................................................................................ 124

3.13.6 Economic Aspects ........................................................................................................ 126

3.13.7 Amenities ..................................................................................................................... 128

3.13.8 Interpretation of Socio Economic Data.......................................................................... 131

3.14 Summary ............................................................................................................................. 131

CHAPTER 4 ................................................................................................................................... 134




XXVI

ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES ............................ 134

4.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 134

4.1 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE ...................................... 134

4.2 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE .......................................................................................................... 136

4.2.1 Air Environment ......................................................................................................... 136

4.2.2 Water Environment .................................................................................................... 137

4.2.3 Soil Environment ........................................................................................................ 138

4.2.4 Noise Environment .................................................................................................... 139

4.2.5 Land Use/ Land Cover ............................................................................................... 140

4.2.6 Hydrogeology ................................................................................................................. 140

4.2.7 Geology ..................................................................................................................... 140

4.2.8 Hazardous/ Solid Waste ............................................................................................ 140

4.2.9 Risk and Hazard ........................................................................................................ 141

4.2.10 Ecology and Biodiversity ............................................................................................ 141

4.2.11 Socio-Economic ......................................................................................................... 142

4.3 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION DURING OPERATION PHASE ............................................. 143

4.4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES DURING OPERATION PHASE .................................................................................................................. 144

4.4.1 Air Environment ......................................................................................................... 144

4.4.2 Water Environment .................................................................................................... 157

4.4.3 Soil Environment ........................................................................................................ 157

4.4.4 Noise Environment .................................................................................................... 158

4.4.5 Land Use/ Land Cover ............................................................................................... 159

4.4.6 Hydrogeology ............................................................................................................ 159

4.4.7 Geology ..................................................................................................................... 159

4.4.8 Hazardous/Solid Waste ............................................................................................. 159

4.4.9 Risk and Hazard ........................................................................................................ 160

4.4.10 Ecological and Biodiversity ........................................................................................ 160

4.4.11 Socio-Economic ......................................................................................................... 161

4.5 SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................ 163

CHAPTER 5 .................................................................................................................................. 164

ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY AND SITE) ...................................................... 164

5.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 164

5.1 ALTERNATIVE FOR TECHNOLOGY AND OTHER PARAMETER ....................................... 164

5.2 SITE SECTION CRITERIA .................................................................................................... 165

5.3 BEST AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY ....................................................................................... 165

5.4 SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................ 167

CHAPTER 6 ................................................................................................................................... 168

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM ............................................................................. 168




XXVII

6.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 168

6.1 POST PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM .................................... 168

6.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING METHODOLOGIES ................................................... 169

6.3 DOCUMENTATION AND RECORDS ............................................................................... 170

6.4 INFRASTRUCTURAL REQUIREMENT ................................................................................ 170

6.4.1 Reporting System ........................................................................................................... 170

6.5 BUDGETARY PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PROGRAM ................ 170

6.6 SUMMARY ....................................................................................................................... 171

CHAPTER 7 .................................................................................................................................. 172

ADDITIONAL STUDIES ................................................................................................................. 172

7.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 172

7.1 PUBLIC HEARING ........................................................................................................... 172

7.2 RISK ASSESSMENT ........................................................................................................ 172

7.2.1 Objective of the study ..................................................................................................... 172

7.2.2 Methodology ................................................................................................................... 173

7.3 Risk & Hazard Study ......................................................................................................... 173

7.3.1Layout map ..................................................................................................................... 177

7.4 Qualitative Risk Assessment ............................................................................................. 179

7.4.1 Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment ............................................................... 180

7.5 Quantitative Risk Assessment .......................................................................................... 183

7.5.1 Consequence analysis ................................................................................................... 183

7.5.2 Damage criteria .............................................................................................................. 183

7.5.3 About the software – PHAST, Version 6.7 ...................................................................... 184

7.5.4 Safety Mitigation Measures ............................................................................................ 188

7.6 Disaster Management PLAN (DMP) ................................................................................. 191

7.6.1 On-Site Emergency ................................................................................................... 193

7.6.2 Off-Site Emergency ................................................................................................... 193

7.6.3 Setting up of Emergency Infrastructure ...................................................................... 197

7.7 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PROGRAM ......................................................... 199

7.8 SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................ 200

CHAPTER 8 ................................................................................................................................... 201

PROJECT BENEFITS .................................................................................................................... 201

8.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 201

8.1 PHYSICAL BENEFITS .......................................................................................................... 201

8.2 SOCIAL BENEFIT ................................................................................................................. 201

8.3 OTHER TANGIBLE BENEFITS ............................................................................................. 202

8.4 SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................ 202

CHAPTER 9 ................................................................................................................................... 203

ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS ........................................................................... 203




XXVIII

9.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 203

9.1 APPLICABILITY OF CBA AND SUMMARY .......................................................................... 203

CHAPTER 10 ................................................................................................................................. 204

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ................................................................................... 204

10.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................... 204

10.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 204

10.2 WATER ENVIRONMENT .............................................................................................. 204

10.2.1 Construction Phase ................................................................................................... 204

10.2.2 Operational Phase ..................................................................................................... 205

10.3 AIR ENVIRONMENT ..................................................................................................... 212



10.4 SOLVENT MANAGEMENT PLAN ................................................................................. 216

10.5 SOLID/HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT ............................................................ 218



10.6 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................ 220



10.7 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY .................................................................... 221



10.8 CORPORATE ENVIRONMENT RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................... 223

10.9 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT .................................................................................... 224

10.10 ODOR CONTROL PLAN ................................................................................................... 226

10.10.1 Odor control for solid handling .................................................................................... 226

10.10.2 Odor control for liquid handling ................................................................................... 226

10.11 CLEANER PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES ........................................................................ 227

10.11.1 RESOURCE CONSERVATION .................................................................................. 227

10.12 BUDGET FOR EMS .......................................................................................................... 229

10.13 ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY ............................................................................................. 229

10.13.1 Corporate Environmental Policy (CEP) ....................................................................... 229

10.13.2 Environmental Management Cell (EMC) ..................................................................... 230

10.13.3 Role and Responsibility of EMC ................................................................................. 230

10.14 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................................ 231

CHAPTER 11 ................................................................................................................................ 233

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION .................................................................................................... 233

11.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 233

11.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................ 233




XXIX

11.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ..................................................................... 233

11.3 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES ............ 236

11.4 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES ................................................................................... 236

11.5 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN ..................................................................... 236

11.6 ADDITIONAL STUDIES ................................................................................................ 237

11.7 PROJECT BENEFIT ..................................................................................................... 237

11.8 ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS........................................................... 237

11.9 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ......................................................................... 237

11.10 CONCLUSION .................................................................................................................. 238

CHAPTER 12 ................................................................................................................................. 239

DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ENGAGED .............................................................................. 239

12.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................... 239

12.1 BRIEF RESUME AND NATURE OF CONSULTANCY ........................................................ 239

12.2 EIA TEAM MEMBER ........................................................................................................... 239

12.3 LABORATORY INVOLVED FOR BASELINE MONITORING AND OTHER ANALYSIS ...... 240




XXX

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1.1: Structure of EIA report ...................................................................................................... 40 Table 2.1 Physical Environmental setting in the vicinity of the site .................................................... 44 Table 2.2 List of Products along with capacity ................................................................................... 45 Table 2.3 Details on Product Transportation ..................................................................................... 46 Table 2.4 Product-wise Raw Material Requirement ........................................................................... 47 Table 2.5 Details of safe storage and handling of hazardous chemical ............................................ 49 Table 2.6 Raw Materials Transportation ............................................................................................ 51 Table 2.7 Estimate of Project Cost .................................................................................................... 52 Table 2.8 Land breakup of the project site ........................................................................................ 52 Table 2.9 Water consumption ........................................................................................................... 54 Table 2.10 Steam Requirement ........................................................................................................ 55 Table 2.11 Quantity of Fuel ............................................................................................................... 56 Table 2.12 Utilities ............................................................................................................................ 56 Table 2.13 Details of Flu gas Stack with Air Pollution Control System ............................................... 70 Table 2.14 Details of Process gas Stack with Air Pollution Control System ....................................... 72 Table 2.15 Wastewater Generation ................................................................................................... 73 Table 2.16 Solid/Hazardous Waste Details ....................................................................................... 73 Table 2.17: Project Implementation Schedule ................................................................................... 76 Table 2.18 Anticipated Impacts during Operation Phase ................................................................... 76 Table 3.1: Frequency of Environmental Monitoring ........................................................................... 80 Table 3.2: Method of Environmental Sampling and Analysis ............................................................. 81 Table 3.3: Meteorological Condition of Study Area ............................................................................ 83 Table 3.4: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations for Study Region .............................................. 87 Table 3.5: Details of Analysis Method ............................................................................................... 88 Table 3.6: Min, Max, 98th Percentile and Average Value of PM10 and PM2.5 .................................. 88 Table 3.7: Min, Max, 98th Percentile and Average Value of SO2 and NOx ....................................... 89 Table 3.8: Min, Max, 98th Percentile and Average Value of CO ........................................................ 89 Table 3.9: Noise Monitoring Locations in the Study Region .............................................................. 91 Table 3.10: Noise Monitoring Report during day time ........................................................................ 92 Table 3.11: Noise Monitoring Report during night time ...................................................................... 92 Table 3.12: Land use Statistics (10 km) ............................................................................................ 95 Table 3.13: Traffic Study Report ....................................................................................................... 98 Table 3.14: Existing Traffic Scenario with respect to LOS ................................................................. 98 Table 3.15: Soil Monitoring Locations in the study region .................................................................. 99 Table 3.16: Soil Sample Analysis Result ........................................................................................... 99 Table 3.17: Details of Ground Water sampling locations ................................................................. 102 Table 3.18: Ground water Analysis Results..................................................................................... 103 Table 3.19 Details of Surface Water Sampling Locations ................................................................ 106 Table 3.20 Surface water Analysis Results ..................................................................................... 107 Table 3.21 Bacteriological Analysis of surface Water ...................................................................... 109 Table 3.22 Standard limit as per IS 10500:2012 for Microbiological parameters ............................. 109 Table 3.23 Marine Water Analysis .................................................................................................. 111 Table 3.24 Microbiological Analysis for Marine Water ..................................................................... 112 Table 3.25 Zooplankton Analysis for Marine Water ......................................................................... 112 Table 3.26 Pigment Analysis and Phytoplankton cell count for Marine Water ................................. 112 Table 3.27 Benthos Details ............................................................................................................. 112 Table 3.28 Sediment Quality Analysis ............................................................................................. 113 Table 3.29 Trees in the Study area ................................................................................................. 114 Table 3.30 List of Shrubs in the study area ..................................................................................... 115 Table 3.31 List of Herbs in the study area ....................................................................................... 116 Table 3.32 List of Climbers in the study area .................................................................................. 117




XXXI

Table 3.33 List of Mammals in the Study area ................................................................................ 117 Table 3.34 List of Domestic animal in the Study area ...................................................................... 117 Table 3.35 List of Birds in the Study area ........................................................................................ 118 Table 3.36 List of Reptiles in the Study area ................................................................................... 119 Table 3.37 List of Invertebrates in the Study area ........................................................................... 119 Table 3.38 Details of Fishes ............................................................................................................ 119 Table 3.39 Details of Population in Study Area ............................................................................... 121 Table 3.40: Details of Sex Ratio in Study Area ................................................................................ 122 Table 3.41 Details of Literacy Rate in Study Area ........................................................................... 124 Table 3.42 Details of Occupational Structure .................................................................................. 126 Table 3.43: Education facilities........................................................................................................ 129 Table 3.44: Health Care Facilities ................................................................................................... 129 Table 3.45: Drinking Water facilities ................................................................................................ 129 Table 3.46: Sanitation Facilities ...................................................................................................... 129 Table 3.47: Communication Facilities in the Study Area.................................................................. 130 Table 3.48: Transportation Facilities ............................................................................................... 130 Table 3.49: Road Facilities in the Study Area .................................................................................. 130 Table 3.50: Bank Facilities in the Study Area .................................................................................. 130 Table 3.51: Power Facility in the Study Area ................................................................................... 130 Table 4.1: Impact Identification Matrix (During Construction Phase) ............................................... 134 Table 4.2: Severity Criteria for Magnitude of Impacts ...................................................................... 135 Table 4.3: Cumulative Score range for Beneficial and Adverse impacts .......................................... 135 Table 4.4: Environmental Impact Assessment Matrix without Mitigation Measures (Construction Phase) ............................................................................................................................................ 136 Table 4.5: Impact on Air Environment and Mitigation Measures ...................................................... 136 Table 4.6: Impact on Water Environment and Mitigation Measures ................................................. 137 Table 4.7: Impact on Soil Environment and Mitigation Measures .................................................... 138 Table 4.8: Impact on Noise Environment and Mitigation Measures ................................................. 139 Table 4.9: Impact on Land Use/Land Cover and Mitigation Measures ............................................. 140 Table 4.10: Impact on Hydrogeology and Mitigation Measures ....................................................... 140 Table 4.11: Impact on Geology and Mitigation Measures ................................................................ 140 Table 4.12: Impact of Hazardous/Solid Waste and Mitigation Measures ......................................... 140 Table 4.13: Impact of Risk and Hazards and Mitigation Measures .................................................. 141 Table 4.14: Impact on Ecology and Biodiversity and Mitigation Measures ...................................... 141 Table 4.15: Impact on Socio-Economic and Mitigation Measures ................................................... 142 Table 4.16: Environmental Impact Assessment Matrix with Mitigation Measures (Construction Phase) ....................................................................................................................................................... 143 Table 4.17: Impact Identification Matrix (Operation Phase) ............................................................. 143 Table 4.18: Environmental Impact Matrix Without Mitigation Measures (During Operation Phase) . 144 Table 4.19: Detail of Stack & Emission Rate ................................................................................... 149 Table 4.20: Detail of Vent & Emission Rate..................................................................................... 149 Table 4.21: Summary of Point Source Modeling ............................................................................. 150 Table 4.22: Resultant Concentration Value ..................................................................................... 155 Table 4.23: Impact on Air Environment and Mitigation Measures .................................................... 156 Table 4.24: Impact on Water Environment and Mitigation Measures ............................................... 157 Table 4.25: Impact on Soil Environment and Mitigation Measures .................................................. 157 Table 4.26: Impact on Noise Environment and Mitigation Measures ............................................... 158 Table 4.27: Impact and Mitigation Measures on Hazardous/Solid Waste ........................................ 159 Table 4.28: Impact and Mitigation Measures on Risk and Hazards ................................................. 160 Table 4.29: Impact and Mitigation Measures on Ecology and Biodiversity ...................................... 161 Table 4.30: Impact and Mitigation Measures on Socio-Economic ................................................... 161 Table 4.31: Environmental Impact Assessment Matrix with Mitigation Measures (Operation Phase) ....................................................................................................................................................... 162




XXXII

Table 5.1 Alternative for Technology and other Parameters ............................................................ 164 Table 6.1: Environmental Monitoring Parameters and Frequency ................................................... 168 Table 6.2: Method of Environmental Sampling and Analysis ........................................................... 169 Table 6.3: Budgetary Provision for Environment Monitoring Program ............................................. 171 Table 7.1: Toxicity Index ................................................................................................................. 173 Table 7.2: Flammable Criteria ......................................................................................................... 174 Table 7.3: Physico- Chemical properties of Raw Materials .............................................................. 175 Table 7.4: Physico- Chemical Properties of Raw Materials ............................................................. 177 Table 7.5: Risk Matrix ..................................................................................................................... 179 Table 7.6: Risk Acceptability Criteria ............................................................................................... 179 Table 7.7: HIRA Worksheet ............................................................................................................ 180 Table 7.8: Weather Condition selected for Consequence analysis .................................................. 184 Table 7.9: Input data ....................................................................................................................... 184 Table 7.10: Failure Frequencies for Storage Tanks ......................................................................... 185 Table 7.11: Results of Consequence Analysis ................................................................................ 185 Table 7.12: Contours ...................................................................................................................... 186 Table 7.13: Summary of Maximum Effect Distances ....................................................................... 187 Table 7.14: Emergency Types ........................................................................................................ 192 Table 7.15: On-Site Emergency Planning ....................................................................................... 193 Table 10.1: Wastewater Generation ................................................................................................ 205 Table 10.2: Characteristics of Treated Effluent ............................................................................... 206 Table 10.3: Characteristics of RO treated & MEE condensate ........................................................ 207 Table 10.4: Details of Effluent Treatment Plant, RO plant and MEE with proposed modification ..... 207 Table 10.5: Details of Stack with Air Pollution Control System ........................................................ 213 Table 10.6: Details of Stack with Air Pollution Control System ........................................................ 215 Table 10.7: Details of MDC and Bag filter attached to Spin Flash Dryer .......................................... 216 Table 10.8 CER Activities with year wise budget (Rs. in Lakhs) ...................................................... 223 Table 10.9 Recommended plant species for Green Belt Development ............................................ 225 Table 10.10 Five Year Greenbelt Development Program ................................................................ 225 Table 10.11: Capital cost of Environmental Management system ................................................... 229 Table 10.12 Recurring Cost per Annum .......................................................................................... 229 Table 12.1: EIA Team Member ....................................................................................................... 239




XXXIII

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1.1 Location map of the Project .............................................................................................. 38 Figure 2.1 Google Earth Short view of Project Site ........................................................................... 43 Figure 2.2 Google Earth Long view of Project Site ............................................................................ 43 Figure 2.3 Layout Plan of the Project Site ......................................................................................... 53 Figure: 2.4 Existing Water Balance Diagram ..................................................................................... 54 Figure: 2.5 Water Balance Diagram after Expansion ......................................................................... 55 Figure 3.1: Study Area Map .............................................................................................................. 79 Figure 3.2: Photographs Showing Sampling Activities ...................................................................... 82 Figure 3.3 Graphical Presentation for the month wise Temperature Variation ................................... 84 Figure 3.4 Graphical Presentation for the month wise Humidity Variation ......................................... 84 Figure 3.5 Wind Rose Diagram ......................................................................................................... 85 Figure 3.6 Map showing the Study Region location of Ambient Air ................................................... 87 Figure 3.7 Methodology Used for Land use Classification ................................................................. 94 Figure 3.8: Land Use Map of the study area ..................................................................................... 94 Figure 3.9: Land use Statistics (10 Km) ............................................................................................ 95 Figure 3.10: Drainage Map ............................................................................................................... 96 Figure 3.11: Map Showing the Soil Sampling Locations in the Study Region .................................... 99 Figure 3.12: Map showing the Ground Water Sampling Locations in Study Region ........................ 102 Figure 3.13 Map showing the locations for Surface water ............................................................... 106 Figure 3.14 Map showing the locations for Marine water ................................................................. 111 Figure 3.15: Graph of Literacy Rate ................................................................................................ 126 Figure 3.16 Occupational Structure of Study Area .......................................................................... 128 Figure 4.1: Impact Quantification Chart ........................................................................................... 135 Figure 4.2 Methodology for AQM ................................................................................................... 148 Figure 4.3 Wind rose for December 2018 to February 2019 ............................................................ 151 Figure 4.4: Isopleth for PM10 from flue gas stacks – Point Source ................................................... 152 Figure 4.5: Isopleth for SO2 from flue gas stacks – Point Source .................................................... 153 Figure 4.6: Isopleth for NOx from flue gas stacks – Point Source .................................................... 154 Figure 7.1: Layout Plan Showing Storage Facilities ........................................................................ 178 Figure 7.2: Emergency Organizational Chart .................................................................................. 195 Figure 10.1 Flow Diagram of ETP followed by RO Plant and MEE .................................................. 208 Figure 10.2 Flow Diagram of MEE .................................................................................................. 211 Figure 10.3 Photographs of Existing Green Belt ............................................................................. 226 Figure 10.4: EHS/SH&E Organization Chart ................................................................................... 230




XXXIV

LIST OF ANNEXURES

Annexure I ToR Letter .................................................................................................................... 241 Annexure II Existing EC and its Compliance ................................................................................... 243 Annexure III Existing CC&A ............................................................................................................ 254 Annexure IV Plot allotment letter ..................................................................................................... 265 Annexure V Water Permission letter ............................................................................................... 278 Annexure VI Membership for CETP & TSDF ................................................................................... 280 Annexure VII Environmental Policy ................................................................................................. 283 Annexure VIII Health Checkup Report ............................................................................................ 285 Annexure IX Undertaking for ZLD & Electric meter ......................................................................... 288 Annexure X Compliance of Show cause Notice .............................................................................. 290 Annexure XI PESO Licence ............................................................................................................ 292 Annexure XII MOU for Fly Ash ........................................................................................................ 294 Annexure XIII NABET Certificate .................................................................................................... 297 Annexure XIV CER Activities .......................................................................................................... 299 Annexure XV Agreement of Fuel (NG and Coal) ............................................................................. 303 Annexure XVI MSDS ...................................................................................................................... 311




35

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

1.0 PRELUDE

The chemicals industry makes products with many beneficial uses, but they can also have negative

impacts on human health and the environment. EIA allows the likely significant environmental effects

of a project to be identified and to be avoided, remedied or minimized at an early stage.

The Government of India, as per its policy has given emphasis on Sustainable Development as a part

of any developmental activity. Along with industrial growth, environmental protection is an integrated

criterion for this concept. In line with this policy, Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change

(MoEF&CC) New Delhi has defined „Environmental Clearance‟ (EC) framework under the

Environmental Protection Act, 1986. As per the EIA Notification - 2006, prior EC is required for

establishing/expanding the industry/development projects.

Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd proposes to introduce new product i.e. ethyl chloride from mix solvent of

existing ethyl cellulose product, Ethyl chloride from ethyl alcohol for backward integration, Methyl

chloride from Methyl Alcohol and Hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose (HPMC) at S. No. 302/P, 303/2,

273/2, 275/1, Near Water Works, Abrama, Valsad-396001, Ta: Dist: Valsad, Gujarat.

This chapter describes the purpose of the report, identification of the project and project proponent,

justification of project, brief description, nature, size and location of the project, importance to the

country and region, scope of the study and methodology of the study.

1.1 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT

As per the latest EIA notification of Ministry of Environment and Forests, Govt of India (MoEF&CC)

dated 14th September 2006 and its amendments, the expansion of the Synthetic organic chemicals

manufacturing unit outside the notified industrial area falls under schedule 5 (f) Category „A‟ –

Synthetic Organic chemicals industry (Dyes and dye intermediates, bulk drugs, synthetic

rubber, basic organic chemicals and chemical intermediates) for which prior Environmental

Clearance (EC) from Ministry of Environmental, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC) is

necessary.

In line with the said notification, TOR application was filed to MoEF&CC, New Delhi. Based on the

Standard TOR conditions stipulated by vide letter No. J-11011/316/2011-IA II (I) dated 18th March

2019, EIA report has been prepared. A copy of TOR is enclosed as Annexure-I.

Public hearing is applicable as proposed expansion will be carried out in outside the Notified

Industrial Area. The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) report is prepared to assess the

environmental impacts due to the proposed capacity enhancement of product manufacturing.

1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT AND PROJECT PROPONENT

1.2.1 Identification of the project

Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd proposes to introduce new product i.e. ethyl chloride from mix solvent of





36

chloride from Methyl Alcohol and Hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose (HPMC) at S. No. 302/P, 303/2,

273/2, 275/1, Near Water Works, Abrama, Valsad-396001, Ta: Dist: Valsad, Gujarat.

The proposed expansion project involves the capacity enhancement of existing Products as well as

new products. The unit has obtained environmental clearance vide F. No. J-11011/316/2011- IA II (I)

dated on 25/06/2015 from MOEFCC for the existing unit. The unit regularly submits six monthly EC

Compliance Report to MoEF&CC-RO, Bhopal and complies with all CC&A Conditions. Copy of

Environmental clearance and six monthly compliance reports are attached as Annexure II. CC & A is

attached as Annexure III.

1.2.2 Details of the Proponent

Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd. was incorporated in the year 1988. The Plant is located at Abrama,

Near water Works, Valsad, Dist. Valsad, Gujarat State, which is approx. 1 km off National Highway

No. 8. The location is on the banks of river Auranga and is in the proximity of Abrama water Works.

Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd. is a medium scale unit is located on private land, near water works,

Abrama, Valsad, Di: Valsad having total plot area is 31874 m2 & proposed investment will be

(Existing: Rs. 1516.27 lakhs + Proposed: Rs. 1538 lakhs) 3054.27 lakhs & wishes to introduce new

product i.e ethyl chloride from mix solvent of existing ethyl cellulose product, Ethyl chloride from ethyl

alcohol for backward integration, Methyl chloride from Methyl Alcohol and Hydroxy propyl methyl

cellulose (HPMC).

The unit has experienced technocrats having more than 30 years of experience in manufacturing &

marketing of Ethyl cellulose, Ethyl Chloride, HPMC, Methyl Chloride and its derivatives.

The company has prepared well equipped production plant which will be managed by dedicated,

qualified & skilled persons.

List of Directors:

S. No. Name of Directors

Designation and Role in the Industry

1 Mr. Hirubhai V

Shah

Chief Managing Director,

A graduate having 50 years‟ experience in marketing of cellulose

products. He looks after financial and commercial matter with

development of project and management. His vast experience & vision

will be very much helpful for decision making in all areas of business.

2 Mr. C D Mehta

Director of the company,

A chartered accountant having 40 years‟ experience in financial matter

also he is from well establish business family & he looks after financial

matter of the company.

3 Mr. B B Mehta Director of the company

looks after administration of the company.

4 Mr. K J Dave

Director of the company

Graduate having 35 years‟ experience in the export, import & sales of

product of the company.

5 Mr. J K Mehta

Director of the company

CA having 30 years‟ experience in the financial matter & local sales of

the company.

6 Mr. K Srinivas

Technical Director the company,

A chemical engineer having 33 years of experience in the manufacturing

of organic chemicals and cellulose products.




37

All the directors are well qualified in Engineering, Management, Accounts, operations and

Marketing field.

1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT

1.3.1 Nature, Size and Location of the project

The proposed expansion project involves the capacity enhancement of existing Products as well as

new products for manufacturing of Synthetic Organic Chemicals. As per the amended EIA notification-

2006, the proposed products are covered under category 5(f) – A and hence require Prior

Environmental Clearance.

Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Limited proposes to introduce new product i.e ethyl chloride from mix solvent of


chloride from Methyl Alcohol and Hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose (HPMC) at existing S. No. 303/2,

302/P, 273/2, 275/1 near water works, Abrama, Valsad, Ta: Valsad Di: Valsad in Gujarat state. Project

boundary marked on Google Earth having following co-ordinate:

Existing Plant:


A 20°35'38.59"N 72°57'42.50"E

B 20°35'44.25"N 72°57'42.08"E

C 20°35'42.13"N 72°57'36.74"E

D 20°35'37.38"N 72°57'38.87"E

E 20°35'37.61"N 72°57'41.78"E

Proposed Plant:


F 20°35'36.94"N 72°57'40.29"E

G 20°35'32.85"N 72°57'38.75"E

H 20°35'32.28"N 72°57'41.35"E

I 20°35'33.35"N 72°57'41.02"E

J 20°35'36.84"N 72°57'42.77"E




38

Location map of the project site is depicted as Figure 1.1.

Figure 1.1 Location map of the Project

1.3.2 Importance to the Country and Region

The proposed expansion project provides a potential growth opportunity for the already running

business of the company. The company is already engaged in the business of manufacturing of

“Ethyl cellulose and its derivatives”. The project would increase the overall export and also

increase the foreign revenue. Product is now well established and acceptable in the international

markets like USA, Europe, China, Taiwan, Middle East, Far East, Israel, Egypt etc.

Additional capacities of product range required over & above our existing capacities, as the

company expect strong growth of exports to the extent of 50-60%. Local market also showing

strong growth potential.

Domestic market concentrated in Western India, North India, Hyderabad, Chennai, and Bangalore.




39

1.4 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK AND NEED OF EIA STUDY

S. No.

Activity Aspect Legal Regulation

1. Transportation of raw material

and products

Dust generation Chemical accidents (Emergency Planning,

preparedness and response) Rules, 1996

The Motor Vehicles Act, 1988 and The Central Motor Vehicle rules, 1989

The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 and Rules, 1982, as amended to date.

The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and Rules, 1986, as amended to date

The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 as amended to date

Noise

Gaseous Emission

Accidents

2. Storage and handling of product and raw material

Dust generation The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 and Rules, 1982, as amended to date.

The Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemical rules, 1989, as amended to date.

Chemical accidents (Emergency Planning, preparedness and response) Rules, 1996

Noise

Gaseous Emission

Accidents

3. Manufacturing Process

Operation of Utilities

Gaseous Emission

Factory License

The Factories Act, 1948

The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 and Rules, 1975, as amended to date.

The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 and Rules, 1982, as amended to date.

The Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemical rules, 1989, as amended to date.

The Bureau of Indian Standards Act

The Custom Act, 1962

E-waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011 as amended to date.

Indian boiler act amendment 2015

Environmental Impact Assessment Notification, 2006 as amended to date

Consent to Establish and Operate

Noise

Water pollution

Accidents

Solid & Hazardous

waste

4. Recruitment Social Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 and Rules,

1991 as amended to date

The Factories Act, 1948

1.5 SCOPE OF THE EIA STUDY

Detailed EIA/EMP report has been prepared in line with approved ToR issued by EAC, New Delhi

and as per generic structure as per the guideline provided by EAC. The EIA/EMP report includes

collection of baseline data with respect to major environmental components, viz. Air, Noise, Water,

Land, Biological and Socio-economic components for one season (winter). The study area map

covering 10 km radius of project site is given in chapter – 3 of EIA report.




40

1.6 STRUCTURE OF EIA REPORT

The generic structure of the EIA report as per the guideline provided by MoEF&CC is illustrated in the

following tabulated format.

Table 1.1: Structure of EIA report

S. No.

EIA Structure Contents

1. Introduction Purpose of the Report

Identification of project and project proponent

Brief description of nature, size, location of the project and its importance to

the country, region.

Scope of the study – details of regulatory scoping carried out (As per terms of

reference).

Site Selection Criteria

2. Project Description Type of project

Need for the expansion

Location details showing general location, specific location, project boundary

and project site layout.

Size or magnitude of operation

Project description including drawings showing project layout, components of

project etc.

Proposed schedule for implementation,

Technology and process description,

Schematic representations of the feasibility drawings which give information

important for EIA purpose.

Description of mitigation measures incorporated into the project to meet

environmental standards, environmental operating conditions, or other EIA

requirements

3. Description of the

Environment

Study area, period, components and methodology.

Establishment of baseline for valued environmental components, as identified

in the scope.

Study Period: 1st December 2018 to 28

th February 2019.

Base maps of all environmental components.

4. Anticipated

Environmental Impacts

and

Mitigation Measures

Details of Investigated Environmental impacts due to project location, possible

accidents, project design, project construction, regular operations.

Measures for minimizing and / or offsetting adverse impacts identified.

Assessment of significance of impacts (Criteria for determining significance,

Assigning significance),

Impact scores and Mitigation measures

Air quality modelling

Air Quality Index

5. Analysis of

Alternatives

(Technology and Site)

In case, the scoping exercise results in need for alternatives:

Analysis of Alternatives and Other Technology

Selection of alternative

6. Environmental

Monitoring Program

Technical aspects of environmental monitoring for the effectiveness of

mitigation measures (including measurement methodologies, frequency,

location, data analysis, reporting schedules, emergency procedures, detailed

budget and procurement schedules)

7. Additional Studies Risk Assessment

Disaster management Plan




41

S. No.

EIA Structure Contents

8. Project Benefits Physical Benefits

Ecological Benefits

Social Benefits

Other tangible Benefits

9. Environmental Cost

Benefit Analysis

Not applicable as it is not recommended on scoping stage and project is

located in notified industrial area.

10. Environment

Management Plan

Description of the administrative aspects of ensuring that mitigation

measures are implemented and their effectiveness monitored, after approval

of the Clearance. The Chapter consists of:

- Mitigation Measures for Impacts

- Pollution Prevention Plan

- Greenbelt Development Plan

- Waste Management Plan

- Environment Management Cell

- Budgetary Provisions for EMS

11. Summary and

Conclusion

Overall justification for implementation of the project,

12. Disclosure of

Consultant Engaged

The names of the Consultants engaged with their brief resume and nature of

consultancy rendered.

1.7 SUMMARY

The project is an expansion project by Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd with a total production capacity of

1028.54 TPM. The project is expansion of current manufacturing capacity and addition of new

products of same group within the existing premises of the unit located at S. No. 302/P, 303/2, 273/2,

275/1, Near Water Works, Abrama, Valsad-396001, Ta: Dist: Valsad, Gujarat. Considering the

project details, the expansion falls under schedule 5 (f) Category „A‟ – Synthetic Organic

chemicals industry (Dyes and dye intermediates, bulk drugs, synthetic rubber, basic organic

chemicals and chemical intermediates) as per EIA Notification 2006. The EIA report is prepared

as per Standard TORs given by EAC, New Delhi vide letter No. J-11011/316/2011-IA II (I) dated 18th

March 2019 The EIA document has been prepared as per the generic structure of the EIA report, as

per the guidelines provided EAC, New Delhi.

----------------------------------




42

CHAPTER 2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.0 GENERAL

This chapter described type, need, location, size or magnitude of project, operational activities,

technology to be used and other related activities. It also provides a condensed description of the

aspects which are likely to cause environmental effects to the surrounding environment and

mitigation measures provided to meet environmental standards. Capital investment provided for

environmental management plan to achieve the statutory norms.

2.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd is a medium scale unit located at S. No. 302/P, 303/2, 273/2, 275/1,

Near Water Works, Abrama, Valsad-396001, Ta: Dist: Valsad, Gujarat having total plot area of

31,874 m2 & total investment after proposed expansion will be Rs. 3054.27 Lakh. The proponent

wishes to enhance the Production capacity of Existing Products as well introduce new similar group

of products. The product is well accepted by all leading Pharmaceutical Companies, including

multinationals. The product finds application in paints, printing inks, adhesives, pharmaceutical,

electronic industry besides defense purposes.

The unit is operated by technocrats having more than 25 - 30 years of experience in manufacturing

and marketing of synthetic Organic Chemicals worldwide. The company has established well

equipped production plant which is being managed by dedicated, qualified & skilled persons.

The proposed expansion project is to enhance the capacity of one existing product and addition of

new products of same group. Production capacity of synthetic chemicals will be increased from 96.5

TPM to 1028.54 TPM.

2.1.1 Location, Type and Size of Project

The proposed expansion project site lies on 20035‟38.39” N Latitude & 72057‟40.59” E Longitude.

Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd is located at S. No. 303/2, 302/P, 273/2, 275/1 near water works,

Abrama, Valsad, Ta: Valsad, Di: Valsad in Gujarat state. Short view and Long view of Google Earth

is depicted as Figure 2.1 and 2.2 respectively.




43

Figure 2.1 Google Earth Short view of Project Site

Figure 2.2 Google Earth Long view of Project Site




44

2.1.2 Salient Features

Physical environment setting in the vicinity of the project site have been given below at Table 2.1.

Table 2.1 Physical Environmental setting in the vicinity of the site

S. No. Particulars Description Distance and

Direction

1. Latitude and Longitude of the

site

200 35‟38.39” N

720 57‟40.59” E

---

2. Nearest Village Atak Pardi Village 0.67 km in W

3. Nearest City Vapi At 25.23 km in SW

4. Nearest District Navsari At 16.83 km in N

5. Nearest Highways NH – 48 At 1.13 km in W

6. Nearest Railway station Valsad 3.04 km in W

7. Nearest Airport Surat Domestic Airport At 62.10 km in NW

8. State, National boundaries Dadra and Nagar Haveli

Daman & Diu

At 25.80 km in S

At 16.60 km in SW

9. Nearest River River Auranga At 0.24 km in N

10. Nearest Sea Arabian Sea At 9.18 km in W

11. Archaeological site None

None within 10 km

radius of project

site

12.

National park/ Wildlife sanctuary/

Marine sanctuary/ Reserve

forest

None

None within 10 km

radius of project

site

13. Nearby Industries Nitrex Chemicals India Limited. Ecopast Limited.

Within 10 km radius of project

site

2.1.3 Need of the Project

The proposed expansion project provides a potential growth opportunity for the already running

business of the company. The company is already engaged in the business of manufacturing of

“Ethyl cellulose and its derivatives”. The project would increase the overall export and also

increase the foreign revenue. Product is now well established and acceptable in the international

markets like USA, Europe, China, Taiwan, Middle East, Far East, Israel, Egypt etc.

Additional capacities of product range required over & above our existing capacities, as the

company expect strong growth of exports to the extent of 50-60%. Local market also showing

strong growth potential.

Domestic market concentrated in Western India, North India, Hyderabad, Chennai, and Bangalore.

Demand –Supply Gap

Our products are mainly used in paints, solar panel, printing inks, adhesives, pharmaceutical,

electronic industry besides defense purposes as per requirement. We are the only company

manufacturing Ethylcellulose in India, so demand of our products is sustainable. Most of the raw

materials indigenous and are easily available in India, only one main raw material i.e. wood pulp is

imported.




45

Imports vs. Indigenous production

Existing products manufacturing in the country will be very much economical compare to Imports of

the same except from China and also the export of the same will earn extra foreign exchange for

our county. If we produce raw material (Ethyl Chloride) on our own, we can compete with Chinese

products also.

Export Possibility

Existing products have high export potential. Also these products have very good potential in local

market.

Additional capacities of product range required over & above our existing capacities at Abrama,

Dist: Valsad, as the company expect strong growth of exports to the extent of 20-30 %. Local

market also showing strong growth potential.

Domestic / export Markets

The company‟s product is used as raw material to manufacture various pharmaceutical industries,

chemical industries etc. as per the required applications and having very good market in domestic

and also having very good international markets.

Employment Generation (Direct and Indirect) due to the project

There will be an opportunity of employment generation directly and indirectly due to proposed

expansion project. At present the manpower employed in the industry is 110 numbers. Due to

proposed expansion project 50 people will be directly/indirectly employed as per their skills and

qualification. Thus total number of employees after proposed expansion will be 160.

2.2 DETAIL OF PRODUCTS

The Synthetic organic products are especially used in manufacture of printing inks, solar paste,

specialty paints, in electronic applications, as a binder and coating agent in pharma industry as per

requirement. A detail of existing and proposed products to be manufactured along with its

quantification is presented in Table 2.2.

Table 2.2 List of Products along with capacity

Sr. No.

Product CAS No. Capacity, TPM

End-Use Existing Proposed Total

1. Ethyl Cellulose (Aqua Process)

9004-57-3 20.0 0 20.0 Used in the manufacture of printing inks, solar paste, specialty paints, in electronic applications, as a binder and coating agent in pharma industry besides defense purposes. Used for coating application in Pharmaceutical Industries

2. Ethyl Cellulose

(Solvent Process) 9004-57-3 31.72 0 31.72

3.

Ethyl Cellulose Aqueous

Dispersion- Non Plasticized

9004-57-3 20.124 0 20.124

4.

Ethyl Cellulose Aqueous

Dispersion- Plasticized

9004-57-3 24.70 0 24.70




46

5. Ethyl Chloride (From Alcohol)

75-00-3 0 322.0 322.0 Used as a raw material in the manufacture of Ethyl cellulose and other chemical synthesis.

6. Ethyl Chloride

(From existing mix solvent)

75-00-3 0 160.0 160.0

7. Methyl Chloride 74-87-3 0 250.0 250.0

Used as a raw material in the manufacture of HPMC and other chemical synthesis.

8. Hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose

(HPMC) 9004-65-3 0 200.0 200.0

Used in pharmaceutical coating applications

Total --- 96.544 932.000 1028.544

2.2.1 Transportation of Products

Table 2.3 Details on Product Transportation

Sr. No.

Product Physical State Packing Means of

Transportation

1 Ethyl Cellulose (Aqua

Process) Solid Powder

Fibre Drums, Paper Bags,

Aluminum Bags By Road, Sea & Air

2 Ethyl Cellulose (Solvent

Process) Solid Powder

Fibre Drums, Paper Bags,

Aluminum Bags By Road, Sea & Air

3 Ethyl Cellulose Aqueous

Dispersion- Non Plasticized Dispersion

HDPF Jerry Can

By Road, Sea & Air

4 Ethyl Cellulose Aqueous Dispersion- Plasticized

Dispersion HDPF Jerry

Can By Road, Sea & Air

5 Ethyl Chloride (From Ethyl

Alcohol) Liquid

Through close Pipe line

Captive use /sale

Tonners By Road

6 Ethyl Chloride (From

existing mixed solvent) Liquid


Captive use / sale

Tonners By Road

7 Methyl Chloride Liquid under

pressure


Captive use / sale

Tonners By Road

8 Hydroxy Propyl Methyl

Cellulose Solid Bags By Road, Sea & Air

2.3 RESOURCE REQUIREMENT

Various resources like raw materials, capital investment, land, utility, power, fuel, water, manpower

etc. will be utilized to carry out production activities. Simply production is converting resources into

finished product.




47

2.3.1 Raw Material Requirement

Detail of proposed raw material consumption for proposed plant along with its source and quantity is

detailed in Table 2.4.

Table 2.4 Product-wise Raw Material Requirement

Sr. No.

Raw Material CAS No. Consumption in MT/Month

MT/MT Existing Proposed Total

1.0 For Ethyl Cellulose (Aqua Process)

Wood pulp - 0.825 16.5 0 16.5

Caustic flakes 1310-73-2 5.4 108.0 0 108.0

Ethyl Chloride 75-00-3 3.365 67.3 0 67.3

Acetic acid 64-19-7 0.001 0.1 0 0.1

2.0 For Ethyl Cellulose (Solvent Process)

Wood pulp - 0.836 26.52 0 26.52

Caustic flakes 1310-73-2 1.75 55.6 0 55.6

Ethyl Chloride 75-00-3 2.36 74.9 0 74.9

Toluene 108-88-3 0.40 13.0 0 13.0

Acetic acid 64-19-7 0.60 19.10 0 19.10

SDS 151-21-3 0.19 6.24 0 6.24

3.0 For Ethyl Cellulose Aqueous Dispersion- Non Plasticized

Ethyl cellulose 9004-57-3 0.27 5.460 0 5.460

Solvent (Ethylene Dichloride, Acetone

and Methylene Dichloride)

(Fresh) (Recovered)

Mixture

0.03 0.86

0.624 17.32

0 0

0.624 17.32

Sodium Lauryl Sulfate

– Powder 151-21-3 0.01 0.312

0 0.312

Cetyl Alcohol Powder 36653-82-4 0.03 0.624 0 0.624

4.0 For Ethyl Cellulose Aqueous Dispersion- Plasticized

Ethyl cellulose 9004-57-3 0.2 4.940 0 4.940

Plasticizer – Dibutyl

Sebacate ‎901-34-4 0.05 1.300 0 1.300

Oleic Acid 112-80-1 0.04 1.040 0 1.040

Ammonium Hydroxide 1336-21-6 0.05 1.300 0 1.300

5.0 For Ethyl Chloride (From Alcohol)

Calcium chloride/Zinc

Chloride 10043-52-4/ 7646-85-7 0.0003 0 0.1 0.1

Hydro Chloric acid

(30%) 7647-01-0 1.93 0 624.23 624.23

Ethanol (94%) 64-17-5 0.76 0 247.0 247.0

Caustic lye (10%) 1310-73-2 0.22 0 72.82 72.82

6.0 For Ethyl Chloride (From existing mix solvent)

Mix solvent from existing Ethyl cellulose

product by solvent process

Mixture 0.71 0 114.18 114.18

Mix solvent from Mixture 0.21 0 34.86 34.86




48

existing Ethyl cellulose product process: II

Hydro Chloric acid

(30%) 7647-01-0 1.99 0 319.73 319.73

Caustic lye (10%) 1310-73-2 0.40 0 65.0 65.0

7.0 Methyl Chloride

Calcium Chloride /

Zinc Chloride 10043-52-4/ 7646-85-7

0.0003 0 0.1 0.1

Hydro Chloric Acid

(30%) 7647-01-0

2.45 0 613.6 613.6

Methanol 67-56-1 0.64 0 159.74 159.74

Caustic Lye 1310-73-2 0.21 0 52.0 52.0

8.0 Hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose

Wood Pulp - 0.67 0 134.8 134.8

Methyl Chloride 74-87-3 0.23 0 46.3 46.3

Sodium Hydroxide 1310-73-2 0.185 0 36.9 36.9

Propylene Oxide 75-56-9 0.25 0 49.76 49.76




49

2.3.1.1 Hazardous Chemicals

Table 2.5 Details of safe storage and handling of hazardous chemical

S.No Name of the Raw

Materials

Quantity stored, MT/Month

BP. 0C

MP0C Place of its

Storage

State operating pressure

temperature

Possible type of hazards

Control measures provided

Max Actual

1

Wood pulp 150 100 NA NA

Isolated Store

Atmosphere & Room Temp.

Fire Fire Extinguishers, Hydrant

system

2

Caustic flakes 125 100 NA NA

Isolated Store


Corrosion Corrosion resistant paints

used

3

Ethyl Chloride 12.5 10 12 -138

Isolated Store in tonners


Flammable Foam Fighting and Fire

extinguishers

4

Acetic acid 4 3.5 106 16

Storage Tank


Toxic & Corrosion Fire Hydrant and Fire

Extinguishers

5

Toluene 15 10 110 -95 Isolated Storage

Tank


Flammable Foam Fighting and Fire

Extinguishers

6 Ethyl cellulose 40 35 NA 180 FG Store Atmosphere & Room Temp.

Combustible Fire Extinguishers and Fire

hydrant

7 Ethylene

Dichloride 1.5 1.0 80 -35 Drums


Flammable Foam &Fire Extinguishers

8 Acetone 0.3 0.15 56 -95 Drums Atmosphere & Room Temp.





50

9 Methylene Dichloride

1.0 0.75 40 -97 Drums Atmosphere & Room Temp.


10 Sodium Lauryl

Sulfate – Powder 0.05 0.025 NA NA PP Bag


Combustible Fire Extinguishers

11 Cetyl Alcohol

Powder 0.03 0.015 NA NA PP Bag



12 Plasticizer –

Dibutyl Sebacate 0.025 0.025 340 -35 Carboy



13 Oleic Acid 0.025 0.025 286 16 Carboy Atmosphere & Room Temp.


14 Ammonium Hydroxide

0.025 0.025 NA -69 Carboy Atmosphere & Room Temp.

Toxic Fire hydrant

15 Calcium

chloride/Zinc Chloride

100 100 NA NA HDPE Drum


Toxic Fire hydrant

16 Hydro Chloric acid

(30%) 30 15 100 NA

PP FRP Tank


Toxic Fire hydrant

17 Ethanol (94%) 15 10 79 -114 Isolated Storage

tank


Flammable Fire hydrant

18 Caustic lye 30 15 NA NA Isolated Storage tanks


Corrosion Fire Extinguishers




51

2.3.2 Raw material Transportation

Most of the raw materials are available in local market. Mostly all the raw materials shall be

transported through road in standard packing.

Table 2.6 Raw Materials Transportation

Sr. No.

Substance Physical

State Source of

Supply Means of

Transportation

Distance of supplier from

project site (km)

1 Wood pulp Solid Sheet

Imported By Sea More than 5000

2 Caustic flakes Solid Local Manufacturers By Road 200

3 Ethyl Chloride Liquid In house Pipe line 200

4 Acetic acid liquid Local Manufacturers By Road 200

5 Toluene liquid Local Manufacturers By Road 200

6 SDS liquid Local Manufacturers By Road 200

7 Ethylene

Dichloride Liquid Local Manufacturers By Road 350

8 Acetone Liquid Local Manufacturers By Road 25

9 Methylene Dichloride

Liquid Local Manufacturers By Road 350

10 Sodium Lauryl

Sulfate Solid

Powder Local Manufacturers By Road 200

11 Cetyl Alcohol

Powder Solid

Powder Local Manufacturers By Road 200

12 Ethyl cellulose Powder in-house By road 0-1

13 Plasticizer –

Dibutyl Sebacate


14 Oleic Acid Liquid By Road 200 200

15

Ammonium Hydroxide


16 Calcium

chloride/Zinc Chloride

Solid Local Manufacturers By Road 200

17 Hydro Chloric

acid (30%) Liquid Local Manufacturers By Road 200

18 Ethanol (94%) liquid Local Manufacturers By Road 200

19 Caustic lye Liquid In house Internal Pipeline

--

20 Methanol (99.5%)

liquid Local Manufacturers By Road 200




52

2.3.3 Project Cost

Total Cost after the proposed expansion of the project will be Rs. 3054.27 Lakh, which include cost of

land, building and civil work, plant and machinery purchase, utility/plant machineries, environment

management system and others. Capital cost, cost towards environmental management plan etc. are

mentioned in Table 2.7.

Table 2.7 Estimate of Project Cost

S. No. Particulars Existing, Lakhs Proposed,

Lakhs Total, Lakhs

1.0 Land 31874 m2 76.4 0 76.4

2.0 Building 216.75 350 566.75

3.0 Plant & Machinery

3.1 Equipment & machineries 733.58 850 1583.58

3.2 Pipes, fittings, lagging,

electrification 210.86 150 360.86

3.3 Laboratory equipments 44.18 20 64.18

4.0 Environmental Management

System

4.1 Effluent treatment plant 205.5 35 240.5

4.2 Air pollution control measures 16 8 24

4.3 Hazardous waste management

system (MEE Plant) 13.0 125 138

5.0 Total Project Cost 1516.27 1538 3054.27

2.3.4 Land

The land having area 31874 m2 (3.1874 ha) has been already in possession of Asha Cellulose.

Expansion will be done in existing premises. Out of 16,635 m2 existing open area, approx. 6300 m2

area will be utilized for expansion and remaining 10,335 m2 area will be kept open for future use. Plot

allotment letter is attached as Annexure IV with EIA report and bifurcation of plot area is mentioned

in Table 2.8.

Table 2.8 Land breakup of the project site

S. No. Area Description Area in m2

% Existing Proposed Total

1 Process Plant area 2420 800 3220 10.10

2 RM Storage 500 100 600 1.88

3 ETP , RO, MEE & HW Storage 885 150 1035 3.25

4 Ethyl Chloride/ Methyl Chloride Storage 150 1050 1200 3.76

5 Office Building 602 0 602 1.89

6 Utilities 547 400 947 2.97

7 Engineering Store 455 0 455 1.43

8 Roads 3355 0 3355 10.53




53

9 Open Area 16635 -6300 10335 32.42

10 Green Belt 6325 3800 10125 31.77

11 Total 31874 0 31874 100.00

Layout plan showing location of manufacturing unit, storage area, utilizes, greenbelt area, internal

road, entry and exit gate, parking etc. is depicted as Figure 2.3.

Figure 2.3 Layout Plan of the Project Site




54

2.3.5 Water

The total water requirement after expansion will be 244.9 KLD (Fresh: 37.48 KLD + Recycled from

RO/MEE is 207.5 KLD) and it will be sourced by own bore well. Industry has already obtained

permission from CGWA to withdrawal of ground water. Ground water permission from CGWA is

attached as Annexure V.

Table 2.9 Water consumption

No Particular Existing

KLD Proposed

KLD Total KLD

A. Domestic 2.2 0.8 3.0

B. Industrial

Processing + washing 85.18 18.72 103.9

Boiler 40.5 14.5 55.0

DM Plant 5.0 9.0 14.0

Cooling 17.5 39.5 57.0

Container/floor/equipment washing , QC, R&D 1.6 0.4 2.0

C. Gardening 3.5 6.5 10.0

Total Industrial 149.78 82.12 231.9

Total (A+B+C) 155.48 89.42 244.9

Recycle from RO/MEE 118 89.5 207.5

Net Fresh Water 37.48 0 37.48

Figure: 2.4 Existing Water Balance Diagram

WATER BALANCE AT EXISTING SCENARIO

TOTAL WATER CONSUMPTION: 155.48 M3/DAY ( Fresh: 37.48 m3/day + Recycled: 118 m3/day)

Domestic: 2.2 Processing &Washing: 85.18

Boiler: 40.5 Cooling: 17.5 D M plant: 5.0 floor /containerwashing: 1.6

Gardening: 3.5

88.0 25.0 2.5 5.0 1.0

123.0

1.5

P/S/T ETP: 123.0 Loss: 3.0

REVERSE OSMOSIS: 120

RO Permeate recycle : 102RO Rejection: 18 MEE Salt : 2

Condensate recycle : 16

Water evaporated: 1.25 MT

Dry Salt to TSDF: 0.75 MT




55

Figure: 2.5 Water Balance Diagram after Expansion

2.3.6 Power Requirement

Existing power requirement is 650 kVA. Total Power requirement after proposed expansion will be

1000 kVA. It is/will be sourced from Dakshin Gujarat Veej Co. Ltd. Presently; one D.G. set of 110 kVA

and another 35 kVA is being used in case of power failure. For proposed expansion no additional D.

G. Set will be installed.

2.3.7 Steam Requirement

Table 2.10 Steam Requirement

S. No. Particulars Existing

Kg/h After expansion

Kg/h Source

1. Steam

requirement 1.7 2.3 Obtained from steam boiler.

2.3.8 Fuel Requirement

The details of fuel requirement for the steam boiler, Thermopak and D.G. set are given in below

Table 2.11:




56

Table 2.11 Quantity of Fuel

S. No.

Utilities Fuel Existing Proposed Total Source

1. Steam Boiler (3 TPH)

NG, SCM/h 230 0 230 Gujarat Gas


2. Steam Boiler (3.5 TPH)

Coal, kg/h 0 510 510 Local Traders

3. Thermopak (6 lakhs k cal/h)



4. Hot Air Generator (6 lakhs k cal/h)


LDO, kg/h 40 0 40 Local Traders







7. D G set (110 kVA) HSD, kg/h 45 0 45 From Local Traders

8. D G set (35 kVA) HSD, kg/h 15 0 15 From Local Traders

2.3.9 Manpower

Manpower will be employed due to the project directly and indirectly through contracts, services, etc.

During the construction phase approximate 25-30 Nos. of workers will be required. Presently there

are 110 Nos. of employees. There will be additional 50 Nos. of employees, thus, total number of

employees after proposed expansion will be 160.

2.3.10 Utilities

It is estimated that plant will be run in three shifts for 315 days in a year. Based on this and plant

operation capacity requirement of utilities has been estimated which is as below:

Table 2.12 Utilities

S.

No. Utilities Existing Proposed Total

1. Steam Boiler (TPH) 3 0 3

2. Steam Boiler (TPH) 0 3.5 3.5

3. Thermopak (lakhs k cal/h) 0 6 6

4. Steam Boiler (TPH) 0.8 - 0.8 to be

discontinued 0


discontinued 0


discontinued 0

7. Hot Air Generator (lakhs k cal/h) 6 0 6





57


10. D G set (kVA) 110 0 110

11. D G set (kVA) 35 0 35

2.4 MANUFACTURING PROCESS AND FLOW DIAGRAM

2.4.1 Ethyl Cellulose (Aqua Process) (Existing):

The bleached Cotton Linter / Wood Pulp are fed to a shredding mill. The shredded Bleached Cotton

Linter or Wood Pulp is charged into rector containing Caustic solution, through alkali cellulose tank

and screw conveyor. The reactor is a jacketed and agitated type autoclave. The temperature, time

and concentration depend on the intrinsic viscosity desired in the product. The required amount of

diluents (crude solvent) and ethyl chloride are added to the alkali pulp and viscosity is controlled by

air as an oxidizing agent.

The reaction is carried out in jacketed and agitated autoclave. Ethyl Chloride and crude solvent are

also charged along with Caustic during the course of reaction if necessary. The reactor content is

heated by passing steam through jacket. Working pressure of about 23 Kg / cm2 is obtained

maximum and the reaction is continued till the desired Degree of Substitution of Ethyl Cellulose is

obtained. After completion of reaction, Ethyl cellulose gets separated from solvent, salt, water &

sodium hydroxide. Solvent mixture along with water is stripped off from the reactor, which is purified

in distillation column, part of it is used in the process and remaining is sold off.

As the solvent is removed, ethyl cellulose precipitates in the liquor containing caustic and salt. The

slurry is then discharged from the reactor in to a holding tank, where alkali solution along with salt is

recovered. After giving adequate water wash, the product is neutralized by the addition of acid and

centrifuged. Wet ethyl cellulose is subjected to wet grinding in hammer mill. After grinding, the

material is discharged into to washing tank for further purification. After purification, the slurry is

subjected to centrifuging for maximum water separation and wet cake is fed to a spin flash dryer.

Dried product is packed in Fibre Drum / Paper Bags.

CHEMICAL REACTION:

Main Reaction :

C6H7O2(OH)3 + C2H5Cl + NaOH -------------> C6H7O2(OH)3 + NaCl + H2O

162 64.5 40 232 58.5 18

Reaction Mole Balance :

Reaction C6H7O2(OH)3 + 2.5 C2H5Cl + 2.5NaOH --> C6H7O2(OC2H5)2.5(OH)0.5 +2.5 NaCl +2.5

H2O

M. Wt. 162 161.25 100 232 146.25

45

Name Wood Pulp Ethyl Chloride Sod. Hydroxide Ethyl Cellulose Sodium

Chloride Water




58

Side Reaction :

1 : Ether Formation :

Reaction : 2C2H5Cl + 2 NaOH --------> (C2H5)2O + 2NaCl + H2O

M. Wt. 129 80 74 117 18

Total 209 ----------> 209

2 : Ethyl Alcohol Formation :

Reaction C2H5Cl + NaOH ----------> C2H5OH + NaCl

Mol. Wt. 64.5 40 46 58.5

Name Ethyl Chloride Sodium Hydroxide Ethyl Alcohol Sodium Chloride

Total 104.5 -------------> 104.5

3 : Residual Sodium Hydroxide neutralization with Acetic Acid

Mol.Wt. 60 40 82 18

Name Acetic Acid Sodium Hydroxide Sodium Acetate Water

Total 100 --------- > 100

MASS BALANCE WITH FLOW DIAGRAM:

2.4.2 Ethyl Cellulose (Solvent Process) (Existing):

The bleached cotton linters or Wood Pulp sheet (Cellulose) is dipped in aqueous Caustic solution and

passed through squeeze rollers to remove excess Caustic solution. Then the Alkali Cellulose sheet is

fed to a shredding mill. The shredded Alkali Cellulose is charged into an autoclave containing

FLOW DIAGRAM OF ETHYL CELLULOSE BY AQUA PROCESS

REACTION(AUTOCLAVE

FILTRATION &NEUTRALIZATION

GRINDING &CENTRIFUGE

WASHING

FINAL WASHING &CENTRIFUGING

DRYING: 424.8 kgs

ETHYL CELLULOSE : 260 KG

NaOH Prills : 1400 kg

Water : 854 kg

Wood pulp : 210 kg(Wood pulp: 185.5 kgs

Water: 24.5 kgs)

CAUSTIC SOLN.PREPARATION

SHREDDING& MIXING

Ethyl chloride : 875 kg

Diluents : 284 kg

Mixed solvent to Scrubbing : 732 kg

(EC + EA +Ether +water)

Recycle from Ethyl ChlorideIncineration :

448 kg

Water : 3600 kg

Water : 2400 kg

Water : 4500kg

Acetic acid : 1.02kg

Water : 2233.38 kg

Weak alkali (18-20%) sell : 4800 kg

Eff. To ETP : 2400 kg



Drying loss : 164.3 kg

Drying loss : 0.5 kg




59

Toluene through a mixer and conveyor. This autoclave is jacketed & limpet coiled agitated vessel.

The temperature, time and concentration depend on the intrinsic viscosity desired in the final product.

The required amount of diluents (Toluene / Recycled Solvent mixture) and Ethyl Chloride are added

to Alkali Cellulose. The viscosity is controlled by air as an oxidizing agent.

The reactor contents are heated by passing steam through limpet coil. Ethyl Chloride, Toluene along

with Caustic Flakes / Prills is also charged during the reaction as per requirement. A working pressure

in the range of 10 to 12 Kg / cm2 is obtained and reaction is continued till the desired Degree of

Substitution of Ethyl Cellulose is achieved. After completion of reaction, the unconverted ethyl

chloride and by-products are recovered and reused in the next batch. The viscous reaction product is

discharged into settling tank.

Adequate quantity of recycled solvent mix is added and total mass is mixed thoroughly and

neutralized. The mass is allowed to settle for couple of hours. The upper layer is passed through a

filter press. The salt mass is washed with recycled solvent and washed salt is fed to an ANFD. The

solvents present in the salt are recovered and re used for dilution or sold to actual users. The dried

salts shall be sent to TSDF or partly go for sale if possible. The filtrate from filter press is fed to a

granulator containing water. Live steam is introduced to precipitate Ethyl cellulose and to strip off

organic solvents.

The organic solvents recovered from granulator are scrubbed with water and Toluene is reused in

the next batch. The precipitated Ethyl Cellulose slurry is transferred to washing tanks where the

product is given hot water washes and pH of the product is corrected in the range of 5.5 to 7.5.

The purified Ethyl cellulose is centrifuged in basket type centrifuge and the wet cake is fed to Spin

Flash Dryer. The dried product is passed through a compactor to improve bulk density if required and

packed in Paper Bags or Fibres Drums as per requirement.

CHEMICAL REACTION: Main Reaction :

C6H7O2(OH)3 + C2H5Cl + NaOH -------------> C6H7O2(OH)3 + NaCl + H2O 162 64.5 40 232 58.5 18

Reaction Mole Balance :

Reaction C6H7O2(OH)3 + 2.5 C2H5Cl + 2.5NaOH ----> C6H7O2(OC2H5)2.5(OH)0.5 +2.5 NaCl +2.5 H2O

M. Wt. 162 161.25 100 232 146.25 45 Name Wood Pulp Ethyl Chloride Sodium Hydroxide -> Ethyl Cellulose Sodium Chloride Water

Side Reaction :

1 : Ether Formation :

Reaction : 2C2H5Cl + 2 NaOH --------> (C2H5)2O + 2NaCl + H2O

M. Wt. 129 80 74 117 18

Name Ethyl Chloride Sod. Hydroxide Diethyl Ether Sodium Chloride Water

Total 209 ----------> 209

2 : Ethyl Alcohol Formation :

Reaction C2H5Cl + NaOH ----------> C2H5OH + NaCl




60

Mol. Wt. 64.5 40 46 58.5

Name Ethyl Chloride Sodium Hydroxide Ethyl Alcohol Sodium Chloride

Total 104.5 -------------> 104.5

3 : Residual Sodium Hydroxide neutralization with Acetic Acid

Reaction : CH3COOH + NaOH ---------> CH3COONa + H2O

Mol.Wt. 60 40 82 18

Name Acetic Acid Sodium Hydroxide Sodium Acetate Water

Total 100 --------- > 100

FLOW DIAGRAM OF ETHYL CELLULOSE BY SOLVENT PROCESS

DIPPING BATH

REACTION(AUTOCLAVE)

DILUTION & NEUTRALIZATION

FILTRATION / CENTRIFUGE

NaOH : 2646 kgWater : 954 kg

NaOH Prills : 2700 kg

Ethyl Chloride : Fresh : 7200 kg

Recycled Solvent :30169.4 kgsEthyl Chloride: 2400 kgs

Toluene : 27560 kg

Di Ethyl Ether : 120 kgsEthanol : 44.7 kgWater:44.7 kgs

SDS: 600 kg

Toluene : 8000 kg

Wood pulp : 2550 kg

Vent Losses: 271.55 kgs

Mixed Solvent for Distillation: 12935.7 kgsEthyl Chloride : 2724 kg

Toluene : 7824 kgDi ethyl ether : 2096 kg

Ethanol : 182.7 kgWater : 109 kg

Wet Cake : 10881.7 kg

Toluene: 1240 kg

Cooling watercondenser

Upper layer: 7500 kgs to reactor

Bottom layer: 75 kgs to ETP

Chilled watercondenser

Mixed solvent: 2453 kgs for

ethyl chloride

Chilled Brinecondenser

Column Top : 2484.9 kgs to reactor

Bottom : 151.25 kgs residue recycle for

Ethyl Chloride

Recycled Toluene: 6000 kg

Acetic Acid: 1835 kg

Dry in ANFMixed solvent: 1785.5 kgs for

ethyl chloride

Solvent loss: 69.2 kgs

Solid waste: 9027 kgs

GRANULATION

WASHING

CENTRIFUGING: 27029 kgs

DRYING: 5029.2 kgs

ETHYL CELLULOSE : 3065 KG

Steam : 24000 kg

Water : 42000 kg

Mixed Solvent : 33154 kg

SCRUBBERWater : 22988 kgs to ETP

Fresh Water : 12000 kg

Water Evaporation : 1957.84 kg

Water : 34000 kg

Dry Powder Losses : 6.36 kg

Solvent loss: 217.3 kgs

Solvent loss: 56 kg

Toluene: 26110 kgs recycle

Hot Water : 62336 kg

Recycled Water : 18000 kg Water : 16000 kg

Water : 118032 kgs to ETP




61

2.4.3 Manufacturing Process of Aqueous Ethylcellulose Dispersion- Non Plasticized

Raw Materials / Additives: Ethylcellulose, Dichloro Ethane or Dichloro Methane, Toluene, Acetone,

Water, Sodium Laurel Sulphate, Cetyl Alcohol, Defoamer, Hydrogen Peroxide

Manufacturing Operations: Mixing, Coarse Dispersion, Fine Dispersion, Solvent Recovery and

Packing & Storage of finished product.

Preparation of Part 1 & Part 2 Solutions: Homogenous solution of Ethylcellulose is prepared by

dissolving Ethylcellulose and Cetyl Alcohol in Dichloro Ethane / Dichloro Methane / Toluene /

Acetone. Sodium Lauryl Sulfate solution is prepared by dissolving SLS in water.

Pre – mixing & Coarse Dispersion: Both solutions are mixed and passed through coarse disperser

to achieve homogenous dispersion. Antifoam agent is added as per requirement.

Fine Dispersion: The above dispersion is passed through a fine disperser mill to achieve desired fine

dispersion.

Recovery of solvent: The fine emulsion is charged in a stripping pot and Dichloro Ethane or Dichloro

Methane / Acetone are stripped off to achieve finished product of non-plasticized Ethylcellulose

Aqueous dispersion. Hydrogen Peroxide and defoamer are added before filling the product in HDPE

carboys.

Usage of Ethylcellulose Aqueous Dispersion Non - Plasticized:

Control release of drug

As seal coat

Taste Masking agent

Moisture barrier coat




62

2.4.4 Manufacturing Process of Aqueous Ethylcellulose Dispersion- Plasticized

Raw Materials / Additives: Ethylcellulose, Ammonium Hydroxide, Medium Chain Triglicerides /

Plasticizers (Dibutyl Sebacate, PEG etc), Oleic Acid and water.

Ethylcellulose is blended with Oleic Acid and plasticizers in a mixing vessel thoroughly. The mixture is

homogenized by passing through extruder and heated to the melting temperature. The molten

plasticized Ethylcellulose solution is then emulsified with ammoniated water in a high shear mixing

device under pressure to form the dispersion of plasticized Ethylcellulose particles. Additional Water

is then added to achieve the final solids content.

Usage of Ethyl cellulose Aqueous Dispersion Plasticized:

Control release of drug

As seal coat

Taste Masking agent

Moisture barrier coat

MASS BALANCE FOR ETHYL CELLULOSE DISPERSION NON PLASTICIZED

PRE- MIXING VESSEL: 1(308 Kgs)

Cetyl Alcohol: 8 kgsEthylene Di Chloride (Recovered): 222 kgsEDC/MDC (Fresh): 8 kgsEthyl Cellulose: 70 kgs

PRE- MIXING VESSEL: 1(310 Kgs)

Sodium Lauryl Sulfate: 4 kgsWater (fresh): 186 kgsWater (recovered): 120 kgs

MIXING VESSEL(618 Kgs)

FINE DISPERSION(618 kgs)

EDC loss: 2 kgsWater loss: 2 kgs

FINE DISPERSION RECEIVER(Total 614 kgs) [ Ethyl cellulose: 70 kgs

+ EDC/MDC: 228 kgs + Cetyl Alcohol: 8 kgs + Sodium lauryl sulfate: 4 kgs + water: 304 kgs]

SOLVENT STRIPPING POT (614 kgs)

FINAL PRODUCT: 258 kgs(Ethyl Cellulose: 70 kgs + Cetyl Alcohol: 8 kgs

+ Sodium Lauryl sulfate: 4 kgs + Water: 176 kgs)

PRIMARY/SECONDARY CONDENSOR : (356 kgs)

EDC loss: 6 kgsWater loss: 8 kgs

SEPARATION (342 kgs)

RECOVERED EDC/MDC: 222 kgsRecovered Water: 120 kgs




63

Ethyl cellulose Aqueous Dispersion

Ethyl cellulose Aqueous Dispersion is being used in pharmaceutical industry for tablet coating

specifically for sustained / delayed release applications, as binder, taste masking agent, seal coat,

moisture barrier coat etc.

This product is produced by two methods.

1. Ethyl cellulose Aqueous Dispersion – Non Plasticized

2. Ethyl cellulose Aqueous Dispersion – Plasticized

Ethyl cellulose Aqueous Dispersion – Non Plasticized:

Ethyl cellulose is water insoluble product. It is soluble in almost all solvents. It is very difficult to

disperse Ethyl cellulose in aqueous medium. Hence a process was developed where in Ethyl

cellulose is dissolved in solvents and the solvent solution is dispersed in aqueous medium. After

dispersion the solvent is stripped out to achieve Ethyl cellulose aqueous dispersion. During stripping

of solvent steam is utilized. Customers have the choice of using their plasticizers as per their choice

with respect to quantity and grade.

Ethyl cellulose Aqueous Dispersion – Plasticized:

Ethyl cellulose is water in soluble material as explained above. So Ethyl cellulose is extruded and

melted and molten Ethyl cellulose is dispersed in aqueous medium along with plasticizer. In this type

customer can use the dispersion directly in their application without adding any plasticizer. But they

have no choice of using differ composition or different quantities as it was possible in the above non-

plasticized grade.

Both products are available in the market and customers are using both grades as per their

requirement.

As we are already manufacturing Ethyl cellulose powder we are going to produce both grades of

product which enable the customers the select their choice of product.

MASS BALANCE FOR ETHYL CELLULOSE DISPERSION PLASTICIZED

Ethyl Cellulose: 95 kgs Plasticizer: 25 kgs Oleic acid: 20 kgs

MIXING VESSEL

(140 Kgs)

EXTRUDER

(140 kgs)

DISPERSER

(477 kgs)

FINAL PRODUCT: 475 KGS

Loss: 2 kgs Ammonium Hydroxide: 25 kgs Water: 312 kgs




64

2.4.5 Ethyl Chloride Through Alcohol:

Many processes are known for the manufacture of Ethyl Chloride. We have selected two processes

to manufacture Ethyl chloride as continuous process. In the first process Ethyl Alcohol is reacted with

hydrogen chloride in presence of catalyst solution prepared from Zinc Chloride or Calcium chloride. In

the second process Ethyl Chloride is produced by reacting existing bi-product (mixed solvent of

Alcohol & Diethyl ether mixture) from the Ethyl Cellulose manufacturing processes with hydrogen

chloride. This is part of backward integration.

Manufacturing of Ethyl Chloride through Ethyl Alcohol:

The catalyst solution is prepared in a glass lined reactor and the temperature of catalyst solution is

raised from ambient to 130OC with help of steam or hot oil system. Ethyl Alcohol and 30%

Hydrochloric acid as per the recipe continuously fed at constant rate to the glass lined reactor while

temperature of reactor mass is maintained at between 130OC to 135OC. Vapor mixture of Ethyl

Chloride, Ethanol, Water and hydrochloric acid are pass through a packed column. The un- reacted

Ethanol and hydrochloric acid are returned to the column with the help reflux. The catalyst solution

will remain the reactor only. The vapors are cooled in an over head cooler before feeding to Caustic

scrubber. Small amount of Hydrochloric acid is neutralized in caustic scrubber and continuously

withdrawn from the bottom of the Caustic scrubber and lined to ETP. The scrubbed Ethyl Chloride

vapors are passed through a water scrubber to ensure Ethyl Chloride free from Hydrogen Chloride

and water. Finally the pure Ethyl Chloride vapors condensed in Chilled Brine condenser and collected

in product receiver.

Reaction C2H5OH + HCl C 2H5Cl + H2O

Ethanol Ethyl Chloride Water

Mole Balance: 46 36.5 64.5 18

Mass Balance: 8832 7008 12384 3456

Side reaction C2H5Cl + C2H5OH C2H5OC2H5 + HCl

Ethyl Chloride Ethanol Di-Ethyl Ether Hydrogen Chloride

Mole Balance: 64.5 46 74 36.5

Mass Balance: 64.5 46 74 36.5

12384 kgs/day of Ethyl chloride requires 9500 kgs/day of Ethanol and 24000 kgs/day of Dil.HCl acid

Hydrogen Chloride

64.5 kgs of Ethyl Chloride requires 46 kgs of Ethanol and 36.5 kgs of Hydrogen Chloride.




65

2.4.6 Ethyl Chloride Through existing mix solvent:

Catalyst solution is prepared in a glass lined reactor and temperature of catalyst solution is raised

from ambient to 150OC. The mixture of Ethanol and Diethyl Ether and 30% Hydrochloric acid are

continuously at constant rate fed to glass lined reactor as per the recipe. The temperature of the

reactor is maintained between 150OC and 155OC. Vapor mixture of Ethyl Chloride, Mixed Solvent,

Water and hydrochloric acid are passing through a packed column. The un- reacted mixed solvent

mixture and hydrochloric acid are returned to the column with the help reflux. The catalyst solution will

remain the reactor only. The vapors are cooled in an overhead cooler before feeding to Caustic

scrubber. Small amount of Hydrochloric acid is neutralized in caustic scrubber and continuously

withdrawn from the bottom of the Caustic scrubber and lined to ETP. The scrubbed Ethyl Chloride

vapors are passed through a water scrubber to ensure Ethyl Chloride free from Hydrogen Chloride

and water. Finally the pure Ethyl Chloride vapors condensed in Chilled Brine condenser and collected

in product receiver.

Catalyst solution Preparation vessel :4800 Kgs

Calcium Chloride/Zinc Chloride:4800 Kg

Jacketed ReactorCatalyst Solution 38300 Kg

30% HCl acid: 24000 kg94% Ethanol: 9500 kg

Caustic Scurbber : 12835.5 Kg

Ethyl Chloride: 12312 Kg, HCl: 9.5 Kg

Water: 474 KgDiethyl Ether: 40 Kg,

To ETP: 23464.5 KgCaustic: 40 Kg, Nacl: 351 KgEthanol: 52 kg, Water:22980 KgEthyl Chloride: 7.5 KgDiethyl Ether: 34 Kg

Caustic Lye: 2800 Kg (Water: 2520 + NaOH: 280 Kg)

Water Scurbber : 12400 KgEthyl Chloride: 12312 Kg,

Diethyl Ether: 40 KgWater: 48 Kg,

To ETP: 3435.5 KgHCl : 9.5 KgWater: 3426 Kg

Water: 3000 Kg

Chilled Brine Condenser12380 Kg

Vent condenser : 20 kgEthyl Chloride: 12 KgDiethyl Ether: 8 Kg

Product Receiver: 12380 KgEthyl Chloride: 12300 Kg(99.35%)

Diethyl Ether: 32 Kg (0.26%)Water: 48 Kg ( 0.39%)

Process flow Diagram of ETHYLChloride from Ethyl Alcohol

(1) Condensate from Condenser attached to reactor: 33500 kgsTo caustic scrubber(EthylChloride: 12319.5 kg, Hcl:228.5 Kg

Ethanol: 52 Kg, Water:20826 KgDiethyl Ether: 74Kg )(2) Catalyst from bottom of reactor: 4800 kgs remain in reactor for next cycle




66

2.4.7 Methyl Chloride:

Many processes are proposed for the manufacture of Methyl Chloride. We have selected a process to

produce Methyl chloride in continuous manner. In this process Methanol is subjected catalytic hydro

chlorination. Methyl Alcohol is reacted with hydrogen chloride in liquid phase in presence of catalyst

solution prepared from Zinc Chloride. The process is similar to Ethyl chloride process.

Catalyst solution is prepared in a glass lined reactor and the temperature of catalyst solution is raised

from ambient to 150OC with help of steam or hot oil system. Methanol and 30% Hydrochloric acid

continuously mixed as per recipe and fed at constant rate to the glass lined reactor while temperature

of reactor mass is maintained at between 155OC to 160OC. Vapor mixture of Methyl Chloride,

Methanol, Water and hydrochloric acid are pass through a packed column attached to reactor. The

un- reacted Methanol and hydrochloric acid are returned to the column with the help internal reflux.

The catalyst solution will remain the reactor only. The vapors are cooled in an overhead cooler prior

to feeding to Caustic scrubber. Small amount of entrained Hydrochloric acid is neutralized in caustic

scrubber and continuously withdrawn from the Caustic scrubber and lined to ETP for further

treatment. The scrubbed Methyl Chloride vapours are fed to a water scrubber to ensure Methyl

Chloride free from impurities. Finally the pure Methyl Chloride vapours condensed in Chilled Brine

condenser or compressed to receive in liquid phase before filling in cylinders.




67

Production basis: 9.61 MT/Day Reaction: CH3OH + HCl CH3Cl + H2O 32 36.5 50.5 18 Methanol Hydrochloric Acid Methyl Chloride Water NaOH + HCl NaCl + H2O 40 36.5 58.5 18 Sodium Hydroxide Hydrochloric Acid Sodium Chloride Water

2.4.8 Hydroxy Propyl Methyl Cellulose (HPMC)

Hydroxy Propyl Methyl Cellulose also known as HPMC or Hypromellose is one of cellulose

derivatives widely used in various applications. HPMC is inert visco elastic polymer used in

pharmaceutical and food additive applications. The manufacturing process is a batch type one and

consists of the following stages.

Preparation of alkali cellulose.

Catalyst solution Preparation vessel :4800 Kgs

Calcium Chloride/Zinc Chloride:3600 KgWater: 1200 kgs

Jacketed ReactorCatalyst Solution 34544 Kg

30% HCl acid: 23600 kg99.5% Methanol: 6144 kg

Caustic Scrubber: 9651.3 KgMethyl Chloride: 9593 Kg,

HCl: 6.3 KgWater: 48 Kg

Methanol: 4 kgs

To ETP: 22092.7 KgCaustic: 48 Kg, NaCl: 222.3 KgMethanol: 60 kg, Water: 21760.4 KgMethyl Chloride: 2 Kg

10% NaOH Soln: 2000 Kg (Water: 1800+ NaOH: 200 Kg)

Water Scurbber : 9615 KgMethyl Chloride: 9593 Kg,

Water: 22 Kg,

To ETP: 1036.3 KgHCl : 6.3 KgWater: 1026 KgMethanol: 4 kgs

Water: 1000 Kg

Chilled Brine Condenser9615 Kg

Vent condenser: 5 kg

Product : Methyl Chloride: 9610 Kg

Process flow Diagram of METHYLChloride from Methyl Alcohol

(1) Product vapour from reactor is cooled in a cooler and fed to a caustic scrubber: 29744 kgs(2) (MethylChloride: 9595 kg, HCl:145 Kg

Methanol: 64 Kg, Water:19940 Kg(2) Catalyst from bottom of reactor: 4800 kgs remain in reactor for next cycle




68

Etherification reaction

Recovery solvents

Purification

Drying

Blending and Packing.

Wood Pulp / Cotton linters pulp sheets are fed to a shredder machine and conveyed to reactor. 50%

Caustic solution is prepared and charged into rector to prepare alkali cellulose and allowed for aging

for different durations depend on final viscosity of the product.

The reactants Methyl Chloride and Propylene oxide are charged as per the formulation and the

reactor mass is heated with the help of low pressure steam. The reactor temperature is maintained at

different temperatures as for the formulation to achieve desired degree of substitution. The operating

temperature range is from 50OC to 80OC. The reaction is exothermic in nature and temperature is

controlled precisely with help of cooling water.

After completion of reaction the solvents and by-products formed during reaction are recovered from

the reactor. The reactor product is discharged into a neutch filter unit to separate salt water. The

reaction product is subjected hot water washes to receive salt free product.

The wet cake from neutch filter is discharged into the feed hopper of spin flash dryer. Dry product

from different batches will be blended to achieve designated viscosity product in blender and packed.

C6H7O2(OH)3 + CH3Cl + NaOH + C3H6O 162 50.5 40 58 Wood Pulp Methyl Sodium Propylene Chloride Hydroxide Oxide

C6H7O2(OH)(OCH3)(OCH2CHOHCH3 ) + NaCl + H2O 234 58.5 18 Hydroxy Propyl Methyl Cellulose (HPMC) Sodium Water Chloride Side Reactions: CH3Cl + NaOH CH3OH + NaCl 50.5 40 32 58.5 Methyl Chloride Sodium Hydroxide Methanol Sodium Chloride

2CH3Cl + 2NaOH H2O + CH3OCH3 + 2NaCl 101 80 18 46 117 Methyl Chloride Sodium Hydroxide Water Di-Methylether Sodium Chloride C3H6O + H2O C3H8O2 Propylene Oxide Water Propylene Glycol 58 18 76




69

2.5 POLLUTION POTENTIAL AND ITS CONTROL MEASURES

Based on the overall process study/manufacturing details etc. following are the details of pollution

potential v/s. mitigation measures proposed by the company in areas of wastewater management, air

pollution, hazardous waste handling and management respectively as per the details given below:

2.5.1 Air Environment

Flue gas emission



LDO/Natural gas fired hot air generator having capacity of 6 lakhs k cal/h each. Two numbers

of D G sets having 110 kVA and 35 kVA capacity. 30 meters height of chimney with SMF

provided to 3 TPH boiler, 15 meters common chimney provided for all three boiler and two

HAG. 11 meters chimney provided for D G Sets.


continued. Existing three numbers of 800 kg/h capacity of boiler will be discontinued. Existing

two numbers of hot air generator will be continued. Additional one number of coal fired 3.5

TPH boiler and one number of FO/natural gas fired 6 lakhs k cal/h capacity of thermopak and

one number of natural gas/LDO fired hot air generator of 6 lakhs k cal/h capacity will be

installed. Existing two numbers of D G sets having 110 kVA and 35 kVA will be continued.

REACTOR: 11718 kgs(HPMC: 7488 kgsNaCl: 2047.5 kgs

NaOH: 20 kgsWater: 1996 kgs

Methanol: 32 kgsDi methyl ether: 46 kgs

Propylene glycol: 76 kgs), methyl chloride: 12.5 kgs

Wood pulp: 5184 kgs50% Caustic soln. : 2840 kgsMethyl Chloride: 1780 kgsPropylene o0xide: 1914 kgs

To ETP: 10551.5 kgs ( NaCl: 2047.5 kgs + HPMC: 8 kgs + NaOH: 20 kgs + Methanol: 4 kgs + Water: 8472 kgs)

Hot water: 8000 kgs

Wet Cake Receiver: 9000 kgs

Water Evaporated: 1310 kgs

Product : HPMC: 7690 Kg

PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM FOR HYDROXY PROPYL METHYL CELLULOSE (HPMC)

Crude Product: 11551. 5 kgs

Mix solvent: 166.5 kgs (Di methyl Ether + Propylene glycol + Methanol) sell to

authorized distillator

Washing

Spin Flash Dryer




70


provided for three HAG. 30 meters chimney with ESP will be provided to 3.5 TPH coal fired

boiler. 11 meters height of chimney will be provided to 6 lakhs k cal/h capacity of thermopak.


Table 2.13 Details of Flu gas Stack with Air Pollution Control System

Sr. No. Particulars Details

Existing Proposed Total

1. Capacity of Steam boiler 3 TPH 0 3 TPH

Fuel used NG/FO 0 NG/FO

Consumption 230 SCM/h/

200 kg/h 0

230 SCM/h/ 200 kg/h

APC provided Chimney 0 Chimney

Height of chimney 30 meters 0 30 meters

2. Capacity of Steam boiler 0 3.5 TPH 3.5 TPH

Fuel used 0 Coal Coal

Consumption 0 510 kg/h 510 kg/h

APC provided 0 ESP ESP

Height of chimney 0 30 meters 30 meters

3. Capacity of Thermopak 0 6 lakhs k cal/h 6 lakhs k cal/h

Fuel used 0 NG/FO NG/FO

Consumption 0 135 SCM/h/

115 kg/h 135 SCM/h/

115 kg/h

APC provided 0 Chimney Chimney


4. Capacity of Steam boiler 0.8 TPH

- 0.8 TPH to be discontinued


Fuel used LDO/FO

Consumption 25 kg/h

APC provided Chimney

Height of chimney 15 meters




Fuel used LDO/FO

Consumption 25 kg/h






Fuel used LDO/FO

Consumption 25 kg/h



7. Capacity of Hot air

generator 6 lakhs k cal/h 0 6 lakhs k cal/h

Fuel used NG/LDO 0 NG/LDO

Consumption 50 SCM/h/40 kg/h 0 50 SCM/h/




71

40 kg/h






Consumption 50 SCM/h/40 kg/h 0 50 SCM/h/

40 kg/h




generator 0 6 lakhs k cal/h 6 lakhs k cal/h

Fuel used 0 NG/LDO NG/LDO


40 kg/h 50 SCM/h/

40 kg/h



10. Capacity of D G set 110 kVA 0 110 kVA

Fuel used HSD 0 HSD

Consumption 45 kg/h 0 45 kg/h



11. Capacity of D G set 35 kVA 0 35 kVA

Fuel used HSD 0 HSD




Expected Pollutants PM: < 150 mg/Nm3 SOX: < 100 ppm NOx: < 50 ppm

Process gas emission




Adequate capacity of separate cyclone separator and bag filter along with 11 meters chimney

for each dryer is provided.








72

Table 2.14 Details of Process gas Stack with Air Pollution Control System



1. Capacity of Spin flash dryer 50 kg/h 0 50 kg/h

Hot air supplied by HAG 0 HAG

APC provided Cyclone separator

followed by bag filter

0

Cyclone separator



2. Capacity of Spin flash dryer 100 kg/h 0 100 kg/h




0

Cyclone separator



3. Capacity of Spin flash dryer 0 100 kg/h 100 kg/h

Hot air supplied by 0 HAG HAG

APC provided 0

Cyclone separator


Cyclone separator



Expected Pollutants PM: < 150 mg/Nm3

2.5.2 Water Environment

At Existing Scenario:

Presently, total water requirement is 155.48 KLD (Fresh: 37.48 KLD + Recycled from RO/MEE is

118 KLD) which is sourced from own bore well. Permission for withdrawal of ground water from

CGWA had been obtained.

Total industrial waste water generation is 123 KLD, which is treated in primary, secondary and

tertiary treatment plant. Treated waste water is taken to reverse osmosis plant. 102 KLD of RO

permeate is recycle in the process. Balance 18 KLD of RO rejected is taken to MEE. 16 KLD of

MEE condensate is recycled in the process. Thus there is no discharge of industrial effluent on

land.

Domestic waste water (1.5 KLD) is disposed off through septic tank to ETP.

After Proposed Expansion:

After proposed expansion, total water requirement will be 244.9 KLD (Fresh: 37.48 KLD +

Recycled from RO/MEE is 207.5 KLD) sourced from own bore well. Permission for withdrawal of

ground water from CGWA has been obtained.

Total Industrial waste water generation will be 218.015 KLD. 10.55 KLD high TDS water will be

directly sent to MEE. Balance 207.465 KLD water will be treated in primary, secondary and




73

tertiary treatment plant. Treated water will be taken to Reverse Osmosis. 173 KLD RO permeate

will be recycled in the process. Balance 30 KLD of RO rejected is taken to MEE. 34.5 KLD of

MEE condensate will be recycled in the process. Thus there will be no discharge of industrial

effluent on land.

Domestic waste water (2.0 KLD) will be disposed off through septic tank to ETP.

Table 2.15 Wastewater Generation


KLD Proposed

KLD Total KLD

A Domestic 1.5 0.5 2.0

B Industrial


Boiler 25.0 12.0 37.0

DM Plant 5.0 7.5 12.5

Cooling 2.5 0 2.5

Container/floor washing, QC, R&D 1.0 0.5 1.5

Total Industrial (A+B) 121.5 94.515 216.015

C Total effluent 123.0 95.015 218.015

2.5.3 Solid/Hazardous Waste

Solid and hazardous wastes generated at the end of manufacturing process or waste treatment

process. Waste is/will be stored on impervious floor having roof and boundary wall. Management of

generated wastes will be done as per HW (Management, Handling and Trans boundary Movement)

Rules, 2016 and same is mentioned in Table 2.16. Membership certificates are attached as

Annexure VI.

Table 2.16 Solid/Hazardous Waste Details

Sr. No.

Process waste

Category Source Quantity, TPA Mode of

disposal Existing Proposed Total

Hazardous Waste

1 Used oil Sch: I/5.1 Machineries/ D.G.Set

0.092 0.018 0.11 Incineration at common incineration system of BEIL, Ankleshwar / sold to authorized recyclers

2 Discarded containers/

bags

Sch: I/33.1

Raw Material Storage area &

Utility Area

50 12 62 reused for packing of solid waste or sold to registered recyclers

3 ETP waste Sch: I/35.3

ETP 109 21 130 Disposed off into TSDF site of BEIL, Ankleshwar or




74

VGEL, Vapi

4 MEE waste Sch:I/35.3

MEE 234 714 948 Disposed off into TSDF site of BEIL, Ankleshwar or VGEL, Vapi

5 Dust from air filtration

system

Sch:I/26.2

air filtration system

0.22 0 0.22 Recycled in process

6 Salt from process

Sch:I/26.1

Manufacturing process

1703

0

1703

Disposed off into TSDF site of BEIL, Ankleshwar or VGEL, Vapi.

7 Mixed Solvent from the process

Sch:I/26.4


1787.44

9.98 + 51.96 (vent condenser and HPMC

product)

1849.38

61.9

1787.44 MTPA of mix solvent from solvent process and aqua process will be utilized for manufacture of Ethyl chloride product within the premises and balance 61.9 MTPA of mixed solvent will be sold to actual distillator

8 Distillation Residue / & Laboratory

organic waste

Sch:I/26.1


23.0 - 18.78 4.22 Collection, storage transportation, disposal to BEIL incineration facility.

9 Spent carbon from

ETP & Chimney

Sch:I/36.2

ETP/Chimney

4.8 1.2 6.0 Collection, storage transportation, disposal to BEIL incineration facility.

10

Date-

Expired, Discarded and off-

specification Material &

floor sweeping

Sch:I/28.

5

Product Storage

area

1.0

1.0

2.0

Collection, storage transportation, disposal to BEIL incineration facility.

11 Spent Filter cloth & filter

Sch:I/36.

From process

1.0

0

1.0

Collection,




75

material 2 plant storage transportation, disposal to BEIL incineration facility.

12 Spent Resins from D M plant

Sch:I/35.2

D M plant 1.0 0.2 1.2 Collection, storage transportation, disposal at TSDF/BEIL Collection, storage transportation, disposal at TSDF/BEIL

13 Used hot & cold

insulation material

Schedule: X/02


0.5 0.1 0.6 Collection, storage transportation, disposal at TSDF/BEIL

14 Weak caustic soln (18-20%)

Sch: II/C2


4430.4 0 4430.4

Sell to actual/authorized users

Solid Waste

15 Fly ash - Boiler 0 179 179 Sell to Brick manufacturer

2.5.4 Noise Environment

The noise levels are primarily generated due to industrial activities like mechanical movement and

material handling in unit. Noise may generate from motors, vehicular movement, generators, etc.

General noise levels within plant are expected to remain below 75 dB (A). In order to mitigate the

noise levels during the operational phase, a green belt is/will be developed around the periphery of

the plant. However, at places where noise levels may exceed the permissible limit, acoustic enclosure

will be provided.

2.6 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY

The project proponent is committed towards the health and safety of workers. All the necessary

measure is/will be planned for occupational health of the employees. Routine medical examination of

each person will be carried out as a systematic program on a regular basis. Medical surveillance for

the workers working in risk zone will be carried out regularly and annual report of the health status of

workers for the same will be maintained which is attached as Annexure VIII. Safe Operating

Procedures (SOP) for different works/activities are/will be in place.




76

2.7 IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE

Construction activity for expansion will be started after getting Environmental Clearance (EC) and

NOC from SEAC, Gandhinagar. It is estimated that Implementation of project will be completed within

6 months, considering EC obtained day as a 1st day of implementation.

Project Implementation schedule describing various activities from erection to project commissioning

is tabulated in Table 2.17.

Table 2.17: Project Implementation Schedule

S. No.

Description Starting month

End month Duration in Months

1 2 3 4 5 6

1. Construction and development of other facilities

1 3

2. Installation of machineries 4 6

3. Project Commissioning 5 6

2.8 ASPECTS IMPACTS ANALYSIS

There will be impact due to proposed expansion activities during construction or operation phase.

Based on type of activities impacts may be long or short term. Impacts due to generated pollutant

may be significant on environmental parameters if it is not mitigated properly. Project activities and

cause of impact along with its characteristics are mentioned in Table 2.18.

Table 2.18 Anticipated Impacts during Operation Phase

Activity

Environme

ntal

Attributes

Cause

Impact Characteristics

Nature Duration Reversibility Intensity and

Significance

Vehicle

Movement

and utilities

operation

Air Quality Exhaust

Emissions

i.e. NOx,

SOx and

PM.

Fugitive

emission

Negative Short

Term

Irreversible Low, due to

movement of

vehicle only for

loading and

unloading of raw

material and

finished goods.

Development of

concrete roads.

Provision of

APC‟s.

Noise

Levels

Noise

Generation

Negative Short

Term

Irreversible Low, due to limited

activity

Risk and

Hazards

Accidents,

collision of

transport

vehicles

Negative Short

Term

Irreversible Medium due to

loss of property

and injury to

manpower.

Product and

raw material

Noise

Levels

Noise

Generation

Negative Long

Term

Irreversible Low, due to noise

reduction




77

Activity

Environme

ntal

Attributes

Cause



Significance

handling,

storage and

processing

from utilities,

processing

machineries

and reaction

vessels

measures

Work Zone

Air Quality

Process and

flue gas

generation

Negative Long

Term

Irreversible Medium, due to air

pollution control

devices (APC‟s)

Risk and

Hazards

Catch fire

accidents

Negative Short

Term

Irreversible High, due to injury

to manpower and

loss of properties

and fatal accidents

Leakage

and spillage

from

pipelines or

storage

containers

Negative Short

Term

Irreversible High, due to

corrosion,

leaching, burn

injuries and loss of

properties.

Water

Quality

product

washing,

Floor

washing due

to spillage of

raw material

or products

Negative Short

Term

Reversible Low, due to proper

storage, proper

loading and

unloading practice,

regular

maintenance of

process

equipment‟s and

machineries.

Adequate well

designed internal

drainage system

Solid/

Hazardous

Waste

Disposal

Land and

Soil

Generation

of Solid

Waste

Negative Short

Term

Reversible Low, proper

collection and

disposal

Green Belt

Development

Ecology Planting of

Trees

Positive Long

Term

Reversible High, Positive

Impact

Air Quality Dust barrier Positive Short

Term

Reversible Low, Positive

Impact

Noise Noise

barrier

Positive Short

Term

Reversible Low, Positive

Impact

LU/LC Conservatio

n of Land

Positive Long

Term

Reversible Medium, Positive

Impact

Soil Increase in

soil fertility

Positive Long

Term

Irreversible Medium, Positive

Impact

Water Water

consumption

Negative Long

term

Irreversible Low, due to water

circulation




78

Activity

Environme

ntal

Attributes

Cause



Significance

Employment

Generation

Socio

Economic

Status

Direct and

Indirect

employment

Positive

Long

term

Irreversible High, the project

will generate

employment

2.9 SUMMARY

The proposed expansion plan is for capacity enhancement of 96.54 TPM to 1028.54 TPM of the

manufacturing of Synthetic Organic Chemicals. Expansion will be done within the existing premises

by utilizing an open area at S. No. 302/P, 303/2, 273/2, 275/1, Near Water Works, Abrama, Valsad-

396001, Ta: Dist: Valsad, Gujarat. The unit has 16,635 m2 open area, from which 6300 m2 area will

be utilized for expansion. As per the amended EIA notification - 2006, the proposed products are

covered under category 5(f) - A and hence require prior environmental clearance. There is easy

availability of infrastructure, man power and easy availability of raw materials. For Green Belt

Development as per the layout plan, the company proposes total 10,125 m2 (Existing 6325 m2 +

Proposed 3800 m2), 31.77% of green belt of the total land, i.e. 31874 sq. m. After expansion total

power requirement will be 1000 kVA. Power supply will be taken from DGVCL. The water requirement

of the unit will be met from own bore well. After expansion daily requirement of water for unit will be

244.9 KLD (37.48 KLD fresh + 207.5 KLD recycled) and additional manpower will be about 50

persons, Preference will be given to local person as per their skill and qualification. Domestic waste

water (2.0 KLD) will be disposed off through septic tank and overflow of the septic tank will be

discharged to ETP. Total Industrial waste water generation will be 218.015 KLD. 10.55 KLD high TDS

water will be directly sent to MEE. Balance 207.465 KLD water will be treated in primary, secondary

and tertiary treatment plant. Treated water will be taken to Reverse Osmosis. 173 KLD RO permeate

will be recycled in the process. Balance 30 KLD of RO rejected is taken to MEE. 34.5 m3/day of MEE

condensate is/will be recycled in the process. Thus there is no discharge of industrial effluent on land.

Management of generated wastes will be done as per HW (Management, Handling and

Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016.

----------------------------------




79

CHAPTER 3 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

3.0 INTRODUCTION

The baseline environmental quality is assessed through field studies within the probable impact zone

for various components of the environment viz. Air, Noise, Water, Soil, Ecology & Bio diversity and

Socio-economy. The baseline environmental study has been conducted for the study region within 10

km radius. An exhaustive attempt has been made in the current chapter to disclose all possible

baseline status of environmental quality in the study area, which further serves as the basis for

identification, prediction and evaluation of impacts. Villages covered within study region are shown in

the Figure 3.1.

Figure 3.1: Study Area Map

3.1 BASELINE STUDY AREA AND PERIOD

The baseline environmental study has been conducted for the study region within 10 km radius of the

project site for the period 1st Dec 2018 to 28th Feb 2019. An exhaustive attempt has been made in the

current chapter to disclose all possible base line status of environmental quality in the vicinity of the

project, which further serves as the basis for identification, prediction and evaluation of impacts.

Study area map covering all the villages are shown in the Figure 3.1.




80

3.2 METHODOLOGY

The baseline environmental study was carried out for the various environmental components viz, Air,

Water, Soil, Ecology and Biodiversity, Socio Economy and Noise. A desktop study was carried out to

select the sampling locations and site visit was done by our field area experts. After the site visit,

locations were finalized. During the submission of field area expert report and discussion looking to

the extent of impact, 5 km radius was considered as core zone and rest 5 km radius was considered

as buffer zone. All the locations have been selected within 10 km radius from the project site as per

the requirement of TOR and environmental samples were collected from the selected locations of the

study area. Before starting the survey activity for ecology and bio diversity, secondary data were used

as reference during the desktop survey for listing the species of study zone and planning the survey.

In case of socio economy, secondary data have also been used for deciding the parameters to be

surveyed during socio economic data collection. As a secondary source of data, for Ecology and

Biodiversity survey various publications by the government of India and literature available on internet

site were used. Some photograph showing the monitoring and survey activities are presented in

Figure 3.2.

3.2.1 Frequency of Sampling

Details of frequency of environmental sampling considered for the study are illustrated in Table 3.1.

Table 3.1: Frequency of Environmental Monitoring

Attributes Sampling

Locations Parameters Frequency

A. Air Environment

Micro-meteorological Data

Near Project Site Temperature, Relative Humidity, Precipitation Wind direction, Wind Speed.

Hourly data for the period 1st Dec 2017 to 28th Feb 2018.

Ambient Air Quality 8 numbers of locations in the study area of 10 km radius.

PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx CO, Total VOC

24 hour basis, twice a week during study period.

B. Noise 8 numbers of locations in the study area of 10 km radius.

Noise Levels in dB (A). Once in Study Period.

C. Water

Ground Water Samples from 7 numbers of locations within 10 km radius from the project site.

Physical, Chemical, Microbiological and Heavy Metal.

Once in Study Period.

Surface Water Samples from 5 numbers of locations within 10 km radius from the project site.

Physical, Chemical, Microbiological and Heavy Metal.


D. Soil Quality Samples from 4 numbers of locations within 10 km radius from the project site.

Physical, Chemical Characteristics, Soil Texture.





81

3.2.2 Method of Environmental Sampling and Analysis

The methods adopted for environmental sampling and analysis are illustrated in following Table 3.2.

Table 3.2: Method of Environmental Sampling and Analysis

Attributes Methods

Sampling/Preservation Analysis/data analysis

A. Air Environment

Micro-meteorological Data

Data collected on hourly basis using wind monitor as per CPCB Guideline.

NA

Ambient air quality As per IS: 5182, CPCB & AWMA. As per IS:5182,CPCB & AWMA

B. Noise Instrument : Sound level meter Survey carried out as per CPCB guideline.

C. Water

Ground Water and Surface Water

Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater, 23rd edition, APHA 2017.

IS 3025 & Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater, 23rd edition, APHA 2017.

D. Soil Quality

IS 2720, Soil Testing in India (Department of Agriculture & Cooperation).

IS 2720, Laboratory developed Method as per NABL requirement and Book - Soil Testing in India (Department of Agriculture & Cooperation).

Ambient air – Project site

Noise – Project site




82

EB Survey

Ambient Air – Gundlav

Noise – Gundlav

Ground Water – Valsad

Figure 3.2: Photographs Showing Sampling Activities

3.3 MICROMETEOROLOGY

The study of micro meteorological data helps to understand the variations in the ambient air quality

status in that region. The prevailing micrometeorological condition at project site plays a crucial role in

transport and dispersion of air pollutants. The persistence of the predominant wind direction and wind

speed at the project site decide the direction and extent of the air pollution impact zone. The principal

variables which affect the micrometeorology are horizontal transport and dispersion, convective

transport and vertical mixing and topography of the area towards local influences.

Micrometeorological data were collected by using the wind monitor as per CPCB guideline which was

installed near project site. All the micrometeorological data were collected on hourly basis.

Meteorological conditions of the study area are presented in Table 3.3.




83

Table 3.3: Meteorological Condition of Study Area

Month Temperature (oC) Relative Humidity (%) Wind Speed (km/h)

Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.

Dec'18 13.2 33.2 22.0 95.0 0.1 10.0

Jan'19 12.3 34.7 16.0 90.0 0.1 15.0

Feb'19 13.2 35.6 18.0 92.0 0.1 13.0

3.3.1 Temperature

During the study period minimum temperature was recorded 12.3 ºC on 29th Jan 2019 and maximum

temperature was recorded as 35.6 ºC on 20th Feb 2019. Temperature data on were collected hourly

basis during the study period. Variation of temperature is graphically presented in Figure 3.3.

3.3.2 Humidity

Humidity affects the nature and characteristics of pollutants in the atmosphere as it is the measure of

amount of moisture in the atmosphere. Humidity helps suspended particulate matter to coalesce and

grow in size to settle under the gaseous pollutants by providing them aqueous medium. During the

study period minimum Humidity was recorded 16% on 28th Jan 2019 and maximum Humidity was

recorded as 95% on 11h Dec 2018. The variation in humidity is represented graphically in Figure 3.4.

3.3.3 Wind Speed and Wind Direction

Hourly wind speed data were collected for the period 1st Dec 2018 to 28th Feb 2019 with the help of

wind monitor. The rate of dispersion, diffusion and transportation of pollutants in the atmosphere

mainly depend on wind speed and its direction. Wind direction and velocity data have been collected

during the study period. Dominant wind direction in the study period was from NE –SW during the

study period. Wind speed was observed from 0.1 to 10.0 km/h in the month of Dec 2018, 0.1 to 15.0

km/h in the month of Jan 2019 and from 0.1 to 13.0 km/h in the Month of Feb 2019. Month-wise

maximum and minimum wind speed data are tabulated in Table 3.3.

3.3.4 Wind Rose

Wind rose diagram is a graphical representation of the magnitude and direction of wind speed

considering all the directions. From the knowledge of wind rose one can easily predict the direction

and extent of spreading of the gaseous and particulate matter from the source. Wind rose diagram

has been prepared by using hourly wind velocity and dominant wind direction data and is presented

in Figure 3.5


Proposed Expansion Project For Manufacturing of Ethyl Chloride (From Ethyl Alcohol), Ethyl Chloride (From Mixed Solvent of Existing Process), Methyl Chloride (From Methyl Alcohol) & Hydroxy Propyl Methyl Cellulose (HPMC)


84

Figure 3.3 Graphical Presentation for the month wise Temperature Variation

Figure 3.4 Graphical Presentation for the month wise Humidity Variation

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819202122232425262728

Max. 313233313132323031303030292828302829282930313230302627262930283230323130292829302928292930293130323433282827262625262727303029282833332926252628323433313030323232353132333032312829

Min. 171620211920171618171719181918181814131515151617171513131317171615151515141414151514131415161516161717191917161313151312141415151618191914131314131720191918171719192120201817212019

0.0

5.0

10.0

15.0

20.0

25.0

30.0

35.0

40.0

Tem

per

atu

re (

oC

)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

Max. 86 84 75 86 77 70 84 81 89 85 95 91 81 76 86 81 69 59 57 65 65 68 82 70 60 78 80 79 84 80 75 73 68 67 74 76 74 64 74 68 64 84 77 74 80 78 76 70 72 74 88 90 85 88 81 70 67 60 59 59 79 75 67 75 78 75 81 77 68 66 55 58 65 60 76 70 81 77 72 90 92 82 85 83 68 75 87 84 84 80

Min. 39 42 43 44 41 36 36 34 52 56 54 45 38 48 58 50 32 40 22 30 40 24 43 34 32 32 33 36 35 42 38 25 25 33 36 34 32 24 32 39 26 40 28 34 26 40 32 30 20 29 38 38 49 47 34 22 35 30 16 24 30 30 36 39 58 39 38 27 46 33 18 19 22 25 28 32 29 25 23 20 34 26 44 38 28 22 20 38 43 43

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

Hu

mid

ity

(%)




85

Figure 3.5 Wind Rose Diagram




86

3.3.5 Interpretation of Micrometeorological Data

During the study, maximum wind blow was in the direction of NE-SW and wind speed range 0.1 to

15.0 km/h. Wind was also blowing in the direction NNE –SSW. Dominant wind direction of the study

region may be considered NE to SW during the period of December to February .Based on the wind

direction and wind speed it is interpreted that maximum dispersion of air pollutant will be in SW

direction during the period of Dec to Feb. SSW direction will be also impacted as 2nd dominant wind

direction was NNE-SSW. Based other meteorological and its comparison with last 10 years data, It is

interpreted that there is not any considerable change in micrometeorological condition.

3.4 AIR ENVIRONMENT

Air is the Earth‟s atmosphere having the gases in which living organisms live and breathe but air is

being deteriorated day by day due to the anthropogenic and natural sources. In present scenario

Industrialization, Energy production and the burning of fossil fuels has polluted the air environment.

Ambient air quality monitoring was carried out for the assessment of the existing status of

background air quality in the study area. This will be useful for assessing the conformity of the

ambient air quality to the standards even after commencement of the proposed project.

3.4.1 Selection of Sampling Locations

Following points were considered during the selection of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring locations.

Topography/terrain of the study area,

Regional synoptic scale climatologically norm‟s,

Densely populated areas within the region,

Location of surrounding Industries,

Representation of regional background,

Facility for Ambient Air Monitoring,

Representation of valid cross – sectional distribution in downwind direction,

Avoidance of proximity of roads, construction activity or any other perturbing activity

which may be temporary in nature, which may lead to some erroneous conclusions.

Availability of manpower, electricity, approach, sturdy structure and protection of

samplers.

Dominant Wind Direction.

To establish the baseline status around the project site of the study region, monitoring was conducted

for 8 numbers of locations during 1st Dec 2018 to 28th Feb 2019. At the time of location selection

previous micrometeorological data was referred and general wind pattern in the study region was

considered for the selection of minimum one location in the downwind direction and minimum one

location in upwind direction. However, ambient air monitoring locations were selected in all the

directions looking towards the possibility of change in wind pattern during the study period. Ambient

Air Quality monitoring locations are presented in Figure 3.6 and Table 3.4.




87

Figure 3.6 Map showing the Study Region location of Ambient Air

Table 3.4: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations for Study Region

Code Location Distance/Direction Latitude and Longitude

Selection Criteria

A1 Project site - 20°35'38.67"N 72°57'39.08"E

-

A2 Gundlav 2.90 km/ NNE 20°37'7.58"N 72°58'12.87"E

Upwind

A3 Chanvai 8.58 km/ NE 20°33'16.77"N 72°57'39.47"E

Crosswind

A4 Vashiyar 3.00 km/ SW 20°34'49.24"N 72°56'9.71"E

Downwind

A5 Magod 5.01km/ SW 20°34'11.45"N 72°55'13.84"E

Downwind

A6 Valsad 2.72 km/ NWW 20°36'0.25"N 72°56'7.24"E

Crosswind

A7 Kajan

Ranchhod 7.85 km/ E

20°35'11.25"N 73° 2'9.85"E

Crosswind

A8 Muli 5.45 km/ NE 20°37'50.86"N 73° 0'3.63"E

Upwind




88

3.4.2 Frequency and Parameters for Sampling

Sampling team was appointed with one FAE and Technical Assistant to carry out Ambient Air Quality

Monitoring for 8 numbers of locations within 10 km radius from the project site. Sampling and analysis

was carried out as per CPCB, IS 5182 & EPA and instrument operation manual for the parameters

PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx, CO and Total VOC. After the completion of sampling, samples were

brought to the laboratory in Ice box and filter box for analysis. Frequency of sampling was twice a

week during study period.

3.4.3 Methodology for Sampling and Analysis

Samples were collected by using the PM10 and PM2.5 micron dust samplers at suitable height from

obstruction free area as per the availability of the facility. Sampling and Analysis was carried out as

per CPCB Guideline, instrument operational manual and National Environmental Engineering

Research Institute. Detail of reference method is presented in Table 3.5.

Table 3.5: Details of Analysis Method

Sr. No. Parameters Test Method

i. Particular matter (PM 2.5) SOP No. WI/5.4/02-B/03,Issue No.1 Date:01/01/2010, CPCB Guideline

ii. Particulate Matter (PM10) IS 5182 (Part 13):2006/Reaffirmed 2012

iii. Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) IS 5182 (Part 2):2001/Reaffirmed 2012

iv. Oxide of Nitrogen (NOx) IS 5182 (Part 6):2006

v. Carbon monoxide (CO) Methods of Air Sampling & Analysis AWMA,

APHA (CO Analyser)

vi. Total VOC Methods of Air Sampling & Analysis AWMA,

APHA (VOC Analyser)

3.4.4 Quality of Ambient Air

Minimum, maximum, average and 98th percentile values for the parameters PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx,

CO and Total VOC are tabulated in Table 3.6 to Table 3.8 to describe the quality of Ambient Air.

Table 3.6: Min, Max, 98th Percentile and Average Value of PM10 and PM2.5

Code

PM10 (µg/m3) PM2.5 (µg/m3)

Min. Percentile

98th Max. Avg. Min.

Percentile

98th Max. Avg.

A1 67.2 87.0 87.3 80.4 37.6 48.4 48.4 42.6

A2 63.2 77.2 77.8 70.6 32.1 41.0 41.4 37.2

A3 62.5 75.2 75.3 69.5 33.1 41.8 42.4 37.3

A4 65.2 84.7 85.2 76.1 37.2 46.2 46.7 41.3

A5 64.2 82.2 82.6 75.1 34.9 44.5 45.6 39.7

A6 63.4 77.4 78.2 72.0 32.5 41.8 42.3 38.0

A7 64.5 78.9 79.3 71.9 33.6 43.0 43.5 38.8




89

A8 64.6 82.4 82.6 72.6 34.2 43.9 44.3 39.4

NAAQ Standard

limit 100 60

Table 3.7: Min, Max, 98th Percentile and Average Value of SO2 and NOx

Code

SO2 (µg/m3) NOX (µg/m3)

Min. Percentile

98th Max. Avg. Min.

Percentile

98th Max. Avg.

A1 13.1 17.7 17.8 15.7 19.2 23.4 23.6 21.5

A2 8.8 12.7 12.7 10.9 14.1 17.6 17.9 15.9

A3 8.6 12.3 12.4 10.5 13.6 17.9 18.3 15.6

A4 10.2 14.6 14.7 12.3 15.4 19.4 19.6 17.8

A5 9.6 14.1 14.2 12.1 14.2 19.2 19.3 17.1

A6 9.3 13.3 13.3 11.3 15.4 18.8 19.6 17.3

A7 8.9 12.9 13.0 11.1 15.1 18.6 18.7 17.0

A8 9.2 13.5 13.6 11.5 13.2 18.6 19.1 16.3

NAAQ Standard

limit 80 80

Table 3.8: Min, Max, 98th Percentile and Average Value of CO

Code

CO(µg/m3) Total VOC (ppm)

Min. Percentile

98th Max. Avg. Min.

Percentile

98th Max. Avg.

A1 578 633 634 607 1.4 2.3 2.3 1.9

A2 457 511 512 488 1.2 2.1 2.1 1.7

A3 385 442 443 414 1.0 1.9 1.9 1.4

A4 496 575 577 535 1.0 2.1 2.1 1.5

A5 456 541 543 504 1.1 1.9 1.9 1.5

A6 393 437 438 417 1.1 1.8 1.8 1.5

A7 379 431 432 404 1.1 2.2 2.2 1.6

A8 397 450 452 422 1.0 1.9 1.9 1.4

NAAQ

Standard

limit

2000

-

3.4.5 Summary of Ambient Air Quality

Results were compared with the standard for ambient air quality monitoring as per the Ministry of

Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF & CC).

During the study PM2.5 was observed in the range of 32.1 – 48.4 µg/m3. Maximum

concentration of PM2.5 was found at Project Site.




90

PM10 was observed in the range of 62.5 – 87.3 µg/m3. Maximum concentration of PM10 was

found at Project Site.

SO2 concentration was observed in the range of 8.6 – 17.8 µg/m3, which is well within the

standard limit.

NOx concentration in was observed in the range of 13.6- 23.6 µg/m3, which is well within the

standard limit.

Monitoring and analysis was also carried out for CO and Total VOC. Results for the CO and

Total VOC was found well within the norms.

3.4.6 Interpretation of Ambient Air Quality Data

All the results of ambient air quality parameters have been found within the limit as per NAAQS.

Based on comparison study of results for tested parameters with NAAQS, it is interpreted that

ambient air quality of studied locations is good. This interpretation relate to the results found for

particular locations and monitoring for that day of study period.

3.5 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

The objective of the baseline noise survey was to identify existing noise sources and to measure

background noise levels at the sensitive receptors within the study area. Peoples‟ perception of noise

varies depending on number of factors including their natural sensitivity and hearing ability, past

experience of sound, cultural factors and the time of day at which sound is experienced. Continuous

sound is perceived quite differently from intermittent sound at the same level. High or continuous

noise levels may cause permanent loss of hearing ranging from reduced perception at certain

frequencies to total deafness. At comparatively lower levels noise may have psychological effects

including disturbance of sleep, annoyance and irritation.

3.5.1 Sources of Noise Pollution

The sources of noise pollution in the study area are industrial noise, noise due to commercial

activities, noise generated by Community, Vehicular traffic etc.

3.5.2 Noise Level in the Study Area

Noise level monitoring was carried out with the help of sound level meter at 8 different locations fall

under residential, industrial and high noise generating source. Noise sampling locations are

presented in Figure 3.7 and Table 3.9. Analysis results are presented in Table 3.9 and Table 3.11.




91

Figure 3.7: Map Showing the Study Region for Noise Locations

Table 3.9: Noise Monitoring Locations in the Study Region

Code Location

Distance from

project

site/Direction

Latitude and

Longitude Selection Criteria

N1 Project Site (Nr. Main

Gate) -

20°35'38.18"N

72°57'41.98"E Industrial Area

N2 Project Site (Nr. ETP

area) -

20°35'40.67"N


N3 Project Site (Nr. ADM

building) -

20°35'39.15"N


N4 Project Site (Nr.

Garden area) -

20°35'40.49"N


N5 Vashiyar 2.85 km/SW 20°34'56.48"N

72°56'12.47"E Residential Area

N6 Gundlav 2.92 km/NNE 20°37'9.00"N

72°58'12.00"E Residential Area

N7 1.0 meter away from National Highway-8 near Vapi

1.06 km/NW 20°35'27.64"N

72°57'5.21"E

Road (Noise generating

source)

N8 1.0 meter away from 3.23 km/N 20°37'24.07"N Road (Noise generating




92

State Highway-67 near Vapi

72°57'48.56"E source)

Table 3.10: Noise Monitoring Report during day time

Code Lmin dB

Ld dB(A)

Lmax

dB

Limit dB(A) as per Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules,

2000

N1 54.7 68.1 73.1 75

N2 63.1 68.8 72.4 75

N3 54.7 65.9 70.1 75

N4 54.6 66.8 71.2 75

N5 50.4 54.0 60.2 55

N6 50.9 53.6 58.4 55

N7 66.9 77.0 83.6 -

N8 58.7 75.7 79.7 -

Table 3.11: Noise Monitoring Report during night time

Code Lmin dB

Ln dB(A)

Lmax

dB

Limit dB(A) as per Noise Pollution (Regulation and

Control) Rules, 2000

N1 50.7 62.3 67.4 70

N2 55.4 61.1 67.3 70

N3 47.8 55.2 60.5 70

N4 50.4 62.0 65.1 70

N5 56.1 45.0 41.8 45

N6 52.4 45.2 42.1 45

N7 64.2 75.9 81.8 -

N8 54.6 72.2 76.4 -

Note: Day time – 6.00 am to 10.00 pm, Night time – 10.00 pm to 6.00 am Noise standards have been designated for different types of land use i.e. residential, commercial,

industrial areas and silence zones, as per „The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000,

Notified by Ministry of Environment and Forests, New Delhi, February 14, 2000. Different standards

have been stipulated for day (6 AM to 10 PM) and night (10 PM to 6 AM). The noise level study

shows that the noise levels are meeting the acceptable norms.




93

3.5.3 Summary of Noise Data

Equivalent noise level varies from 54.6.6 to 73.1 dB (A) at Project Site and it is 50.4 to 60.2

dB (A) in residential area during day time.

Equivalent noise level varies from 47.8 to 67.4 dB (A) at Project Site and it is 41.8 to 56.1 dB

(A) in residential area during night time.

Noise level monitoring was carried out 1 meter away from National Highway- 8 near vapi and

equivalent noise level was recorded 77.0 dB (A) during day time and 75.9 dB (A) during night

time as per factory act 1948 noise level exposure limit for 8 hrs.is 90 dB (A).

Noise level monitoring was carried out 1 meter away from State Highway- 67 near vapi GIDC

and equivalent noise level was recorded 75.7 dB (A) during day time and 72.2 dB (A) during

night time.

3.5.4 Interpretation of Noise Data

Based on noise level data obtained during the survey for residential area and industrial area and

comparison study with standard norms prescribed by MoEF & CC., it is interpreted that average noise

levels for studied locations are within the limit. Looking towards the increase in noise generating

sources it is suggested that there is need to apply noise reducing devices at noise generating

sources and generate public awareness.

3.6 LAND ENVIRONMENT

3.6.1 Land Use Pattern of the Study Area

Studies on land use aspects of eco system play an important role to identify sensitive issues and to

take appropriate action for maintaining ecological homeostasis in the region. The main objective of

this section is to provide a baseline status of the area, so that temporal changes due to the proposed

project on the surroundings can be assessed in future.

Data Used: United States Geological Survey (USGS) Satellite Data: Land sat 8 cloud free data has

been used for Land use /Land cover analysis, Satellite Sensor–OLITIRS multi-spectral digital data

has been used for the preparation of land use/ land cover map of present study. Survey of India

reference map on 1:50,000 scales have been used for the preparation of base map and geometric

correction of satellite data. Ground truthing has been carried out to validate the interpretation

accuracy and reliability of remotely sensed data, by enabling verification of the interpreted details and

by supplementing with the information, which cannot be obtained directly on satellite imagery.

Methodology: The methodology used for the study consists of following components.

Methodology Adopted for Thematic Data Extraction from the Satellite Imageries

ERDAS image processing 10.0 software and ARC/GIS 10.0 software were used for the project.

ERDAS 10.0 image processing software was used for digital processing of the spatial data. Digital

image processing techniques were applied for the mapping of the land use land cover classes of the

provided area from the satellite data. Methodology used for land use classification and mapping is

presented in figure 3.7. Land use map is presented in figure 3.8. Land Use Statistic (10 km) is

presented in figure 3.9 and Table 3.12.




94

Figure 3.7 Methodology Used for Land use Classification

Figure 3.8: Land Use Map of the study area




95

Table 3.12: Land use Statistics (10 km)

% (Percentage) Area

(Sq.km) Land Use Land Cover

Area

(Sq.km) % (Percentage)

27.82 89.98 Range Land

Grass Land 14.95 4.62

Scrub Land 6.04 1.87

Trees 68.99 21.33

15.88 51.38 Water Land

River/ pond 19.08 5.90

Salt Pan 6.73 2.08

Sea Water 25.56 7.90

36.16 116.98 Agriculture Fallow Land 52.34 16.18

Crop Land 64.64 19.98

15.30 49.50 Settlement Settlement 49.50 15.30

4.84 15.66 Barren Land Barren Land 15.66 4.84

100 323.50 Total 323.50 100

(Source: Land use mapping and primary survey of the area)

Figure 3.9: Land use Statistics (10 Km)

3.6.2 Drainage Map

A drainage Map describes that an area of land where all surface water from rain or from some other

sources converges to a single point at a lower elevation, usually the exit of the basin, where the

waters join another body of water, such as a river, lake, reservoir, estuary, wetland, sea, or ocean.

This map tool is used to search for documents while viewing map features. Drainage Map of studied

region is presented in Figure 3.10.

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Surface_water

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rain

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/River

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lake

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Reservoir

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Estuary

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wetland

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sea

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ocean




96

Figure 3.10: Drainage Map

3.6.3 Summary

The area surrounding the project site is largely an agriculture land like Crop land and Fallow land are

covering around 19.98 % and 16.18 % of the total study area. Range Land like Grass land, Scrub

Land and Trees are covering around 4.62 %, 1.27% and 21.33 % respectively of the total study area.

Build up Land like settlement zone is covering around 15.30 % of the total study area. Water body

like River/pond, Salt pan and Sea water are covering around 5.90%, 2.08% and 7.90% of the total

study area. It is existing project and all the construction activities will be done in the existing

premises. There will be no change in Land Use Pattern due to expansion of the project.

3.7 GEOLOGY

The Proposed site is located in Valsad District, Gujarat. Valsad district can be divided to three

geographic units: hilly area (in the east), alluvial plain and coastal zone. Prominent rivers of the

district are, the River Damanganga and the Kolak, debauching into the Arabian Sea. The average

annual rainfall is 208 cm. The area consists predominantly of basaltic flows intruded, profusely by the

basic rocks. Basaltic lavas with „pahohoe‟ and „Aa; volcanic characters form „compound‟ and „simple‟

flows. Some of the flows carry giant phenocrysts of plagioclase. The basic dykes are basaltic to

dolertic in nature and trend in N-S to NNW-SSE, NW-SE, ENE-WSW and WNW-ESE directions.

Compositionally, these are similar to the lava type‟s viz. normal tholeilite, olivine tholelite, pictrite

basalt and giant phenocryst basalt. The soils in the district are fine, loamy, clayey, mixed,

montmorillonitic and calcareous in nature. They are isohyperthermic, vertic ustropepts and typic

chromusterts and are moderately deep well drained, fine soils on very gently sloping foot-hills with

moderate erosion and slight stoniness. The bouger gravity anomaly varies between -70 to +30 m Gal.




97

The basement depth is about 1500 m in the western part which decreases towards east. The area

lies in the moderate risk zone (Zone – III) of seismic zonation.

3.8 HYDROGEOLOGY

The groundwater in Valsad district occurs in porous unconsolidated formations and fissure formations

both under water table conditions as well as under confined conditions. The unconsolidated

formations comprise gravel, sand, silt, clay and kankars while the fissure formations mainly consist of

basaltic rock. Generally the water table follows topographic configuration. The depth to water is

greater in upland areas whereas in valley portion and shallow grounds, the levels are very close to

surface. In hilly terrain of eastern, north-eastern and southeastern part of the district, spring zones are

seen in river section and also along the section of the Daman Ganga, Kolak, Par & Auranga rivers of

the district. In major part of the district, basalt rock units form aquifers whereas alluvium deposits form

aquifer system in north western part and in central part along river courses and also all along narrow

coastal stripes of the district. The weathered basalts formations are covered by soil / muram, valley fill

and piedmont deposits forming potential aquifers in the vicinity of rivers and in the vast undulating

plains adjacent to hilly terrain. But their regional continuity and extension are limited due to

heterogeneous nature of deposits with limited thickness and lateral extension. As such they rarely

exceed a few square kilometers. The alluvium formation of Northwest along coastal area has major

constraint of quality, which have high TDS in ground water. The interior patches have limited

thickness and they form unique contiguous unconfined system of alluvium portion and underlying

weathered basalt rock units.

Ground water level

Range of water table Pre monsoon season

15-20 mbgl

Range of water table Post monsoon season

5-10 mbgl

3.9 TRAFFIC STUDY

Proposed project connects to National Highway No. 48 and State Highway No. 67 Proposed project

will attract to commercial vehicles as a result traffic load will also increase on highways. Traffic load

play a major role in polluting the air. To assess the traffic load, 4 no. of surveyors were appointed to

survey for National Highway No. 48 and State Highway No. 67.

Traffic data collected continuously for 24 hours by visual observation and counting of vehicles under

three categories, viz., heavy motor vehicles, light motor vehicles and two/three wheelers. As traffic

densities on the roads are high, two persons were deployed simultaneously at each station during

each shift- one person on each of the two directions for counting the traffic. At the end of each hour,

fresh counting and recording was undertaken. Total numbers of vehicles per hour under the three

categories were determined. Traffic study is conducted on National Highway No. 48 and State

Highway 185 from 11th and 12th Feb 2019.




98

Table 3.13: Traffic Study Report

S.

No.

Vehicles

Distribution

No. of Vehicles/Day Passenger

Car Unit

(PCU)

Total No. of

Vehicle in PCU

Total No. of

Vehicle

(PCU)/Hour

NH-8 SH-67 NH-8 SH-

185 NH-8 SH-185

1. Cars 18235 7472 1.0 18235 7472 760 311

2. Buses 3128 1068 3.0 9384 3204 391 134

3. Trucks 3214 943 3.0 9642 2829 402 118

4. Two wheelers 5213 6765 0.5 2607 3383 109 141

5. Three wheelers 1243 1542 0.75 932 1157 39 48

Total 34121 16155 40800 19270 1701 752

Table 3.14: Existing Traffic Scenario with respect to LOS

Road V (Volume in

PCU/h) C (Capacity in

PCU/h) Existing V/C

Ratio LOS

NH-8 1701 3000 0.56 C

SH-185 803 1250 0.60 C

V/C LOS Performance

0.0-0.2 A Excellent

0.2-0.4 B Very Good

0.4-0.6 C Good/Average/Fair

0.6-0.8 D Poor

0.8-1.0 E Very Poor

3.9.1 Interpretation of Traffic Study

LOS values have been calculated based on traffic data on NH-48 and SH-67 and it has been found

0.56 and 0.60 respectively. LOS value indicates that the performance of NH-48 and SH-185 are

good.

3.10 SOIL QUALITY

4 numbers of samples were collected from different locations within 10 km radius to assess the base

line status of soil. Analysis was also carried out for physico-chemical parameters as well as the

parameters to define the texture class. Soil samples were collected by using core cutter and brought

to the laboratory in polythene bags. Standard procedures have been followed for soil sampling and

analysis. Soil sampling locations are presented in Figure 3.11 and tabulated in Table 3.15. Results

are presented in Table 3.16.




99

Figure 3.11: Map Showing the Soil Sampling Locations in the Study Region

Table 3.15: Soil Monitoring Locations in the study region

Code Location Distance from the

project site/Direction Latitude and Longitude

Selection Criteria

S1 Nr. Project Site -- 20°35'42.43"N 72°57'40.39"E Non- Agricultural Land

S2 Chanvai 8.57 km/ NE 20°33'9.45"N 72°58'29.32"E

Agricultural Land

S3 Valsad 9.26 km/ NW 20°36'1.11"N 72°56'29.22"E

Agricultural Land

S4 Muli 5.45 km/ NE 20°37'33.96"N 73° 0'5.08"E

Agricultural Land

Table 3.16: Soil Sample Analysis Result

S. No Parameters Unit S1 S2 S3 S4

1 Water Holding Capacity % 54.2 52.3 55.1 56.2

2 Porosity % 37.1 36.2 37.8 39.6

3 Particle Size Distribution

a. Sand % 22.6 32.3 30.7 32

b. Silt % 25.0 23.1 25.9 28

c. Clay % 52.4 44.6 43.4 40

4 Texture - Clay Clay Clay Clay




100

5 Cation Exchange Capacity meq/100 g 44.7 38.3 38.7 40.4

6 pH - 7.43 7.59 7.38 7.63

7 Electrical Conductivity dS/m 2.0 1.24 1.11 1.18

8 Sodium Absorption ratio - 2 1.3 1.1 1.2

9 Exchangeable Sodium % 13.4 9.9 8.3 8.7

10 Exchangeable Calcium meq/100g 26.3 23.5 24.1 24.5

11 Exchangeable Magnesium meq/100g 10.8 9.5 10.2 10.7

12 Exchangeable Sodium meq/100g 6 3.8 3.2 3.5

13 Exchangeable Potassium meq/100g 1.6 1.5 1.2 1.7

14 Organic Carbon(OC) % 0.6 0.8 0.85 0.82

15 Total Nitrogen % 0.052 0.07 0.073 0.071

16 Nitrate N mg/100g 6.1 9.4 9.8 8.8

17 Total Phosphorus mg/100g 16.8 18.7 17.8 18.4

18 Total Iron mg/100gm 113.2 108.5 105.5 107.6

19 Total Zinc mg/100gm 2.5 4.7 4.0 4.3

20 Total Copper mg/100gm 1.1 1.3 1.2 1.0

21 Total Boron mg/100gm 1.42 2.48 2.28 2.62

21 Total Chromium mg/100gm 2.1 1.8 2.4 2.0

3.10.1 Summary of Soil Data

The soils are categorized as clay based on different soil separates (sand, silt and clay).

Porosity of soils varies from 36.2 % to 39.6 % and water holding capacity without pressure

53.2 % to 56.2 % . Clay soils are having low porosity and good water holding capacity.

The soil is categorized as deep black having > 1m depth and lower layers are having calcium

nodules.

The pH of the soil samples narrowly ranged from 7.43 to 7.63 during the study period.

Electrical conductivity test was conducted and results were varying from 1.11 dS/m to 2 dS/m

and SAR was found 1.1 to 2.0. ESP has been found in range of 8.3 %to 13.4 %. Soils having

conductivity > 0.8 dS/m and SAR > 0.8 are considered saline soil.

Among exchangeable basic cations predominance of calcium (23.5 to 26.3 meq/100 g soil)

was seen followed by Mg (9.5 –10.8 meq/100 g soil).

Organic carbon was found in the range of 0.6 % to 0.85 %. Soil having the organic carbon >

0.75 % are considered as good organic carbon and nitrogen status.

The results relating to total Fe, Cu, Cr, B and Zn do not show alarming concentrations in

different soil samples.

3.10.2 Interpretation of Soil Data

Based on different soil separates soils of the study region are characterized as clay soils. pH of soils

are slightly alkaline and the results of EC , SAR and ESP shows that soil is slightly ingresses with

sodic metals and Sodicity in the soil is up to certain level. Such type of soil can be considered as

sodic soil as conductivity is > 0.8 dS/m and SAR is also > 0.8. Organic carbon and Nitrogen in the

soil is in good status. The results relating to total Fe, Cu, Cr, B and Zn do not show alarming

concentrations in different soil samples. Sodicity in soil does not favor the growth of pant. Clay soils

also not good for some agricultural activities like ground nut and wheat etc. Such type of soil should

be used for plantation after applying some phosphatic fertilizers. These type of soils are suitable for




101

plantation of mango, chickoo, mangrove species and for the cultivation of cotton, jowar, bajara and

maize. These interpretations are relating to the soil samples taken to the particular locations and their

results.

3.11 WATER ENVIRONMENT

Physical, Chemical and Microbiological factors influencing water quality are so interrelated that a

change in any water quality parameter may trigger other changes in a complete network of

interrelated variables. Selected water quality parameters for surface and ground water resources

along with biological indicators within study region have been used for water environment and

assessing the impact on it by proposed project. A study on water environment aspects of ecosystem

plays an important role in environmental assessment to identify water related sensitive issues.

3.11.1 Reconnaissance

As a significant part of predefined framework of the present study water samples were collected from

selected locations. The Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were

finalized based on:

Presence, Location and uses of major water bodies in the region,

Type and Location of Industrial/residential areas, their intake and effluent disposal locations,

Likely areas that can represent baseline conditions.

3.11.2 Water Quality

With the start of water quality study, the water resources in the study area were divided into two

categories for getting ideal upshot of baseline status of water quality of the region. These two

categories as determined are:

Ground water resources (tube well, open well, springs etc.)

Surface water resources including ponds, river, canals.

3.11.3 Sampling and Analysis

All the water samples were collected and analyzed as per “Standard Methods for Examination of

Water & Wastewater”, APHA 23rd edition, 2017. Water Samples for the analysis of physico-chemical

parameters were collected in plastic carboy and parameter wise preserved onsite as per the

technique defined in the book of APHA, 23rd edition, 2017. Temperature, pH and DO were analyzed

onsite and samples were brought to the laboratory for the analysis of remaining parameters.

3.11.4 Ground Water Resources

To assess the quality of ground water, samples were collected from 7 numbers of locations for the

analysis of physico-chemical and microbiological parameters. Ground water sampling locations are

presented in Table 3.17 and Figure 3.12. Analysis results are presented in Table 3.18.




102

Figure 3.12: Map showing the Ground Water Sampling Locations in Study Region

Table 3.17: Details of Ground Water sampling locations

Code Location Distance from the

project site/Direction

Latitude and Longitude

Source

GW1 Gundlav 2.90 km/ NNE 20°37'5.31"N 72°58'13.71"E

Hand Pump

GW2 Chanvai 4.80 km/ SSE 20°33'9.45"N 72°58'29.32"E

Hand Pump

GW3 Vashiyar 3.00 km/ SW 20°34'55.36"N 72°56'5.61"E

Bore well

GW4 Magod 3.03km/ SW 20°34'10.67"N 72°55'13.53"E

Bore well

GW5 valsad 2.72 km/ NWW 20°35'57.81"N 72°56'7.04"E

Hand Pump

GW6 Kajan Ranchhod 7.85 km/ E 20°37'51.80"N 73° 0'3.21"E

Hand Pump

GW7 Muli 5.45 km/ NE 20°37'51.80"N 73° 0'3.21"E

Hand Pump




103

Table 3.18: Ground water Analysis Results

S. No. Parameters Unit GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5 GW6 GW7

Drinking Water Specification IS 10500: 1992 (Reaffirmed 2012)

Desirable Limit

Permissible Limit

1. Temperature 0C

26 25.5 26 25.5 25.5 25.5 25.5 -- --

2. pH @ 250C pH Unit 7.14 7.46 7.34 7.22 7.56 7.18 7.38 6.5 – 8.5 No Relaxation

3. Colour Hazen <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 5 15

4. Odour -- Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable --

5. TDS @ 1800C mg/L 726 782 675 664 843 692 719 500 2000

6. Conductivity µmho/cm 1112 1192 1030 1011 1236 1048 1092 -- --

7. Turbidity NTU 1.9 2.3 2.7 1.7 2.4 2.0 2.1 -- --

8. TSS mg/L <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 -- --

9. Total Hardness as

CaCO3 mg/L

467 430 380 363 428 404 410 200 600

10. Calcium mg/L 150 128 120 108 132 130 123 75 200

11. Total Alkalinity as

CaCO3 mg/L

347 416 276 286 312 308 342 200 600

12. Chloride mg/L 186 204 187 202 286 189 213

250 1000

13. Magnesium mg/L 21 24 20 23 24 20 25 30 100

14. Sulphate mg/L 28 34 46 39 29 45 23 200 400

15. Total Phosphorus

(PO4-P) mg/L 2.3 3.2 2.6 3.2 3.1 3.8 3.1 -- --

16. Sodium mg/L 96 143 97 113 146 116 119 -- --




104

17. Potassium mg/L 14 9 14 11 12 15 17 -- --

18. Fluoride mg/L 0.6 0.3 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.6 0.7 1.0 1.5

19. Phenolic Compound mg/L <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 0.001 0.002

20. Oil and Grease mg/L <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 -- --

21. Dissolved Oxygen mg/L 5.1 5.0 5.2 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.1 -- --

22. Nitrate mg/L 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.6 0.7 45 No Relaxation

23. Total Nitrogen mg/L 1.2 1.4 1.3 1.1 1.3 1.8 2.2 - -

24. Iron mg/L 0.3 0.3 0.32 0.28 0.3 0.24 0.24 0.3 No Relaxation

25. Copper mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 0.05 1.5

26. Boron mg/L 0.10 0.12 0.08 0.05 0.08 0.09 0.12 0.5 1.0

27. Chromium mg/L <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 0.05 No Relaxation

28. Zinc mg/L 0.14 0.17 0.13 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.14 5 15

29. Total Coliform Present/Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Shall not be detectable in

any100 ml of sample




105

3.11.5 Summary of Ground Water Quality

The test results were compared with the Drinking Water Specification: IS: 10500, 1992 (Reaffirmed

2012) and it is summarized as under.

pH was observed in the range of 7.14 – 7.56, which meets with drinking water desirable

norms.

Turbidity was found in the range of 1.7 – 2.7 NTU.

Total Dissolved Solid (TDS) were recorded in the range of 664 - 843 mg/L with minimum at

Magod village and maximum at Valsad village.

Conductivity varies from 1011 to 1250 µmho/cm. The ratio of TDS to conductivity was

observed in the range of 0.65 to 0.67 which is within the desired range.

Total Hardness was in the range of 363 - 467 mg/L with minimum at Magod village and

maximum at Gundlav village.

Total Alkalinity was found in the range of 276 – 416 mg/L with minimum at Vashiyar village

and maximum at Chanvai village.

Chloride was found in the range of 186 to 286 mg/L and Sulphate varies from 23 to 46 mg/L.

Iron was found in the range of 0.24 - 0.39 mg/L with minimum at kajan Ranchhod, Muli village

and maximum at Valsad village.

As microbiological parameters MPN analysis was also carried out and it was found Nil.

3.11.6 Interpretation of Ground Water Quality Data

Based on comparison study with drinking water standard as per IS:10500,2012 and results found

during the testing it is interpreted that portability of water can be considered good except vashiyar

village as all the results have been found during the permissible range of drinking water. Iron content

in the ground water of vashiyar village have been found slightly higher than the permissible limit.

Ground water of vashiyar village should not be directly used in drinking purpose. It can be used for

drinking after passing through RO. Other ground water sources can be utilized for all domestic,

drinking purpose and irrigation purpose. This interpretation relate to the comparison study with IS:

10500 and results found for the sample collected from particular location.

3.11.7 Surface Water

To assess the quality of Surface water, samples were collected from 5 numbers of locations for the

analysis of physico-chemical and microbiological parameters. Frequency of sampling was once

during the study period. Sampling and analysis was carried out as per “Standard Methods for

Examination of Water and Wastewater 23rd edition, 2017. Surface water sampling locations are

presented in the Table 3.19 and Figure 3.13. Analysis results are presented in Table 3.20.




106

Figure 3.13 Map showing the locations for Surface water

Table 3.19 Details of Surface Water Sampling Locations

Code Location Distance from the project

Site/Direction Latitude and Longitude

Source

SW1 Auranga River 0.6 km/NE 20°35'49.14"N 72°57'58.22"E

River

SW2 Pardi River 1.46 km/ SW 20°34'53.46"N 72°57'26.06"E

River

SW3 Par River 6.6 km/ S 20°32'2.58"N 72°57'37.51"E

River

SW4 Palan talov 5.43 km/NE 20°38'8.92"N 72°59'20.90"E

Pond




107

Table 3.20 Surface water Analysis Results

S. No.

Parameters Unit SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

Drinking Water Specification IS 10500: 1992/(Reaffirmed 2012)

Desirable Limit

Permissible Limit

1. Temperature 0C 27 25 26 25.5 - -

2. pH @ 250C pH Unit 7.47 7.78 7.56 7.25 6.5 – 8.5 No Relaxation

3. Colour Hazen 10 12 8 11 5 15

4. Odour - Unobjectionable Unobjectionable Unobjectionable Unobjectionable Agreeable -

5. TDS @ 1800C mg/L 197 285 330 187 500 2000

6. Conductivity µmho/cm 296 432 498 279 - -

7. TSS mg/L 8 7 10 10 - -

8. Total Hardness

as CaCO3 mg/L

143 175 287 128 200 600

9. Calcium mg/L 36 40 80 32 75 200

10. Total Alkalinity

as CaCO3 mg/L

113 146 215 127 200 600

11. Chloride mg/L 46 83 54 30 250 1000

12. Magnesium mg/L 11 18 22 12 30 100

13. Sulphate mg/L 18 9.6 22 13 200 400

14. Total

Phosphorus mg/L

4.1 3.8 3.5 4.4 - -

15. Sodium mg/L 30 42 22 22 - -

16. Potassium mg/L 8 7 3 6 - -

17. Fluoride mg/L 0.5 0.8 0.7 0.5 1.0 1.5

18. Phenolic Comp.

mg/L <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

0.001 0.002

19. Oil and Grease mg/L <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 - -

20. Dissolved Oxygen

mg/L 5.2 4.7 4.9 5.1

- -

21. COD mg/L 12 18 16 16 - -

22. BOD(3 days at

27 0C)

mg/L 3 6 5 5

- -

23. Nitrate mg/L 0.8 0.9 0.7 0.5 45 No Relaxation




108

24. Total Nitrogen mg/L 1.5 2.2 1.4 1.3 - -

25. Iron mg/L 0.38 0.44 0.30 0.35 0.3 No Relaxation

26. Copper mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 0.05 1.5

27. Boron mg/L 0.09 0.14 0.10 0.13 0.5 1.0

28. Chromium mg/L <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 0.05 No Relaxation

29. Zinc mg/L 0.13 0.25 0.19 0.22 Nil 15




109

Table 3.21 Bacteriological Analysis of surface Water

Code Total coliform Fecal coliform

Escherichia coli

Fecal Streptococci

Most Probable No (MPN): No/100 mL

SW1 18 15 <1.8 <1.8

SW2 22 18 <1.8 <1.8

SW3 22 20 <1.8 <1.8

SW4 20 16 <1.8 <1.8

Table 3.22 Standard limit as per IS 10500:2012 for Microbiological parameters

S.No. Organisms Requirements

1.

All water intended for drinking: a) E. coli or thermo tolerant coliform bacteria

Shall not be detectable in 100 ml sample

2.

Treated water entering the distribution system: a) E. coli or thermo tolerant coliform bacteria b) Total coliform bacteria

Shall not be detectable in 100 ml sample Shall not be detectable in 100 ml sample

3. Treated water in the distribution system: a) E. coli or thermo tolerant coliform bacteria b) Total coliform bacteria

Shall not be detectable in 100 ml sample Shall not be detectable in 100 ml sample

1) Immediate investigative action shall be taken if either E.coli or total coliform bacteria are detected.

The minimum action in the case of total coliform bacteria is repeat sampling; if these bacteria are

detected in the repeat sample, the cause shall be determined by immediate further investigation.

2) Although, E. coli is the more precise indicator of fecal pollution, the count of thermo tolerant coli

form bacteria is an acceptable alternative. If necessary, proper confirmatory tests shall be carried out.

Total coliform bacteria are not acceptable indicators of the sanitary quality of rural water supplies,

particularly in tropical areas where many bacteria of no sanitary significance occur in almost all

untreated supplies.

3) It is recognized that, in the great majority of rural water supplies in developing countries, fecal

contamination is widespread. Under these conditions, the national surveillance agency should set

medium-term targets for progressive improvement of water supplies.

3.11.8 Summary of Surface Water Quality

The following description is based on the analysis of the samples:

During the analysis pH of the samples was found in the range of 7.25 – 7.78.

TDS analysis was also carried out for surface water sample and it was found in the range of

187-330 mg/L.

TSS was found in the range of 7 – 10 mg/L.

Total Hardness ranges from 128 – 287 mg/L with maximum in the water sample of Par river

and minimum in Palan village pond.

DO is one of the important parameter to indicate towards the contamination of organic matter.

DO level decrease as soon as organic contamination increases. During analysis DO was

found in the range of 4.7-5.1 mg/L.




110

COD and BOD analysis was also carried out during the study period and results were found

more than the expected value for the Rivers. Various literatures show that BOD should be

less than 7.0 mg/L for the better survival of aquatic life.

Total Nitrogen was found in the range of 1.3 – 2.2 mg/L.

Iron content was found in the range of 0.30- 0.44 mg/L and other heavy metals were found

well within the limit.

MPN test was also carried out for the surface water sample and it was found positive. E-coli

and Streptococci test was found negative.

3.11.9 Interpretation of Surface Water Quality Data

Based on test result data comparison study, it is interpreted that River water quality does not meet

with drinking water norms as per IS 10500:2012. Results of COD, BOD and Iron indicate towards the

contamination of organic matter and metal. This organic contamination may be due to throwing the

flowers in rivers, animal bath in rivers or directly/indirectly discharge of sewage/Effluent. These

waters should not be directly used in drinking purpose but it can be used in drinking after

conventional treatment followed by disinfection. These waters can directly be used in irrigation and

other domestic purposes. Interpretation relate to sample collected from particular points and results

for tested sample only.

3.11.10 Marine Water

To assess the quality of Marine water, 2 nos. of sample were collected during low tide and high tide

for the analysis of physico chemical, nutrient, heavy metal, and demand analysis, microbiological and

biological parameters. All the sampling and analysis activities were carried out as per standard

method for the examination of water and wastewater APHA 22nd Edition, 2012. Sediment sample was

also collected for the analysis of nutrient and heavy metal parameter. Sampling location is shown in

the Figure 3.14. Test results are presented in Table 3.23 to Table 3.28.




111

Figure 3.14 Map showing the locations for Marine water

Table 3.23 Marine Water Analysis

S. No. Parameters Unit Low Tide High Tide

1. pH pH -unit 8.02 7.96

2. Temperature oC 24 25

3. Colour Pt.Co.scale 15 20

4. Odour -- Odourless Odourless

5. TSS mg/L 589 526

6. Salinity as NaCl mg/L 35700 34600

7. Total Hardness mg/L 6645 6420

8. Calcium mg/L 356 312

9. Magnesium mg/L 1302 1291

10. Total Alkalinity mg/L 167 149

11. Sulphate mg/L 918 877

12. Oil and Grease mg/L <1.0 <1.0

13. Total Nitrogen mg/L 1.4 1.2

14. Nitrate mg/L 0.08 0.06

15. Total Phosphorous mg/L 3.4 3.1

16. Fluoride mg/L 0.8 0.6

17. Phenolic Compound mg/L Nil Nil

18. DO mg/L 5.2 5.4

19. BOD mg/L <4 <4

20. Iron mg/L 0.24 0.19




112

21. Copper mg/L <0.05 <0.05

22. Zinc mg/L 0.5 0.4

23. Boron mg/L <0.01 <0.01

24. Chromium mg/L <0.03 <0.03

Table 3.24 Microbiological Analysis for Marine Water

S. No.

Sampling during

Most Probable No (MPN): No./100 mL

Total coliform

Faecal coliform

Escherichia coli

Faecal Streptococci

1. High Tide 36 30 <1.8 <1.8

2. Low Tide 32 28 <1.8 <1.8

Table 3.25 Zooplankton Analysis for Marine Water

S. No. Sampling during Total Count

per m3

Percentage of organism in each group

Protozoa Rotifera Copepoda

1. High Tide 4960 65 15 20

2. Low Tide 5200 62 12 26

Table 3.26 Pigment Analysis and Phytoplankton cell count for Marine Water

S.

No Sampling during

Chlorophyll – a

mg/m3

Pheophytin

mg/m3

Cell Count

Unit/L

1. High Tide 0.6 0.22 228

2. Low Tide 0.8 0.3 271

Table 3.27 Benthos Details

Systematic

Group Observations

Polychaetes +

Mysides _

Ostracodes -

Isopodes +

Amphipodes +

Brachyurans +

Insects +

Gastropodes -

Pelecypodes -

Copepode +

Fishlarvae +

Fisheggs +

Note: + denotes present and – denotes absent Dominant groups are Polychaetes, Fishlarvae fishes and Brachyurans.




113

Table 3.28 Sediment Quality Analysis

S.

No. Sampling Point

Total

Phosphorous

mg/kg

Cr

mg/kg

Mn

mg/kg

Fe

mg/kg

Zn

mg/kg

Cu

mg/kg

Organic

Carbon

1. Arabian Sea 135 9.4 10.1 678 9.10 10.2 0.7

3.11.11 Summary of Marine Water Quality

Temperature of any water bodies more than the ambient temperature is an indicator of some

exothermic reactions in that water body. It should always be less than ambient temperature.

During the study temperature was recorded 24 0 C during low tide and 25 0C during high tide.

At that time ambient temperature was 28 0C.

The pH variation was observed 8.02 during low tide and 7.93 during high tide. pH of marine

water exists between 7.9 to 8.2. pH variation was found between expected range.

Salinity was observed in the range of 34600 to 35700 mg/L which is near to the expected

value.

DO is an essential parameter which affects the biotic component of the water. Fish and other

aquatic life take oxygen through the gill. DO levels affect the aerobic bacterial population as

well as Chlorophylls Phytoplankton. DO value > 4 mg/L is required for the survival of macro

biological organisms. During study period maximum DO level was recorded in the range of

5.2 to 5.4 mg/L.

BOD is also an important parameter to define the environmental scenario of marine

ecosystem as it affects the DO level. BOD was found <4 mg/L.

Iron varies from 0.19 to 0.24 mg/L. Minimum value for Iron was recorded during high tide.

Other Heavy metals were found well within the range.

Microbiological and biological analysis was also carried out for marine water sample and

results for total coliform and faecal coliform during high tide and low tide were found in the

range 32 to 36 and 28 to 30 Nos/100 ml respectively. E- coli and streptococci were found

absent. High salinity does not favour the growth of micro-organism.

3.11.12 Interpretation of Marine Water Quality Data

On the basis of test results, it is interpreted that water quality of marine is as per expectation and

suitable for sustaining the aquatic life. During Microbiological analysis it was found that water

contains some microbial organisms like Total Coliforms, Faecal Coliform. Indeed marine water body

receives the water from different sources like rivers lakes and domestic sources. These

microorganisms come from these external sources. Based on data, it can be concluded that organic

load is not more than the self-purification capacity of marine water body.




114

3.12 ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY

Mainly two types of Vegetation cover are on the earth surface. One is self-growing and another is

cultivated. Plants are renewable resource and useful to living organism in many ways. It is therefore

the role of man in manipulating and changing vegetation population. Due to lack of awareness

deforestation is occurring which in turn is responsible for imbalance of ecosystem. The main objective

of the ecological survey is aimed to find out baseline status of flora and fauna of the study region. An

ecological survey of the study area was conducted particularly with reference to listing of species and

assessment of the existing baseline ecological (terrestrial and marine ecosystem) conditions in the

study area.

3.12.1 Methodology adopted for the study of Flora and Fauna

The EB surveys have been conducted as per our QMS Quality Procedure for Ecology and

Biodiversity for conducting ecology and biodiversity study.

Study Area: 314.642 sq.km.

Core Zone: Projects site and 5 km radius w.r.t. project site.

Buffer Zone: 10 km radius w.r.t. project site.

Study Period: 1st Dec 2018 to 28th Feb 2019

3.12.2 Floral Diversity of the Study Area

The objective of this floral inventory of the study area is to provide necessary information on floristic

structure in the study area for formulating effective management and conservation measures. The

climatic, edaphic and biotic variations with their complex interrelationship and composition of species,

which are adapted to these variations, have resulted in different vegetation cover, characteristic of

each region (Ohasi, 1975).

Trees: The dominant trees in the study area are Manikara zapota (Chickoo) and Mangifera indica

(Aam). Total 32 species of trees belong to 15 families are enumerated from the study area. Details of

the trees in study area are described in Table No. 3.29.

Table 3.29 Trees in the Study area

S. No. Family and Scientific Name Vernacular Name

1 Fabaceae

1/1 Acacia auriculiformis Bengali Baval

2/2 Acacia nilotica Desi Baval

3/3 Albizzia odoratissima Kalo Siras

4/4 Albizzia procera Killai (kelvo)

5/5 Butea monosperma Palas

6/6 Cassia fistula Bahwa garmalo

7/7 Dalbergia sissoo Sissoo

8/8 Pithecellobium dulce Mithi Amli (Goras Amli)

9/9 Millettia pinnata Karanj

10/10 Prosopis juliflora Gando Baval

11/11 Tamarindus indica Amli

2 Rutaceae

12/1 Aegle marmelos Bili

3 Simaroubaceae




115

Shrubs: Total 18 species of Shrubs belong to 12 families are enumerated from the study area.

Details of the shrubs in study area are described in Table No. 3.30

Table 3.30 List of Shrubs in the study area

S.No. Family name & Scientific Name Vernacular Name

1 Malvaceae

1/1 Abutilon indicum Khapat

2/2 Gossypium herbaceum Kapas

2 Rosaceae

3/1 Rosa Damascena Rose

3 Apocynaceae

4/1 Calotropis procera Akado

5/2 Carissa conjesta Karmada

6/3 Nerium indicum Karen

4 Rutaceae

7/1 Cirtus species Limbu

5 Fabaceae

13/1 Ailanthus excelesa Arduso

4 Cornaceae

14/1 Alangium salvifolium Ankol

5 Meliaceae

15/1 Azadirachta indica Limbado

6 Leguminosae

16/1 Bauhinia purpurea Kachnar

7 Casuarinaceae

17/1 Casuarina equisetifolia Sharu

8 Boraginaceae

18/1 Cordia gharaf Gundi

9 Myrtaceae

19/1 Eucalyptus species Nilgiri

20/2 Syzygium cumunii Jambu

10 Moraceae

21/1 Ficus bengalensis Vad

22/2 Ficus glomerata Umero

23/3 Ficus religiosa Pipdo

24/4 Morus alba Shetur

11 Arecaceae

25/1 Phoenix sylvestris Khajuri

12 Combretaceae

26/1 Terminalia belleric Bahedo

27/2 Terminalia tomentosa Sadad

13 Rhamnaceae

28/1 Zizyphus mauritiana Bor

29/2 Zizyphus xylopyrus Ghat Bor

14 Sapotaceae

30/1 Manikara zapota Chickoo

15 Anacardiaceae

31/1 Mangifera indica Aam

32/2 Anacardium occidentale Kaju




116

8/1 Prosopis juliflora Vilayati Mendi

9/2 Tephrosia purpurea Sartankho

6 Solanaceae

10/1 Datura stramonium Dhaturo

7 Mallows

11/1 Hibiscus rosa-sinensis Jasud

12/2 Thespesia lampas Paras Piplo

8 Verbenaceae

13/1 Lantana camara Lantana

9 Lythraceae

14/1 Lawsonia inermis Mendi

10 Oleaceae

15/1 Nyctanthus arbortristis Parijatak

11 Euphorbiaceae

16/1 Riccinus communis Divelo (Erandi)

12 Rhamnaceae

17/1 Zizyphus nummularia Chanibor

18/1 Zizyphus oenoplia Boydinovelo

Herbs: Total 14 species of Herbs belong to 11 families are enumerated from the study area

Table 3.31 List of Herbs in the study area

S. No. Family name & Scientific Name Vernacular Name

1 Papaveraceae

1/1 Argemone mexicana Darudi

2 Amaranthaceae

2/1 Aerva sanguinolenta Karadia

3/2 Achyranthes aspera Anghedi

3 Fabaceae

4/1 Arachis hypogea Mungfali F

5/2 Cassia tora Kunvandio

4 Apocynaceae

6/1 Catharanthus roseus Barmasi

5 Solanaceae

7/1 Capsicum annum Marchi

8/2 Datura metel Ganthovalo Dhaturo

6 Apiaceae

9/1 Centella asiatica Bhrami

7 Malvaceae

10/1 Hibiscus lobatus Tali

8 Convolvulaceae




117

11/1 Ipomoea aquaticaForsk Mali Ni Bhaji

9 Musaceae

12/1 Musa paradisiacal Kela

10 Lamiaceae

13/1 Ocimum sanctum Tulsi

11 Phyllanthaceae

14/1 Phyllanthus fraternus Bhonya Amli

Climbers: Total 4 species of Herbs belong to 4 families are enumerated from the study area.

Table 3.32 List of Climbers in the study area

S.No. Family Name & Scientific Name Vernacular Name

1 Vitaceae

1/1 Ampelocissus latfolia Jungli

2 Nyctaginaceae

2/1 Bougainvillea spectabilis Bougain velia

3 Cucurbitaceae

3/1 Cucurbita maxima Kolu

4 Menispermaceae

4/1 Tinosporacordifolia Gulvel

Fauna:

There was no endangered species observed during faunal survey, list of fauna detail summarized in

Table 3.33 to 3.38.

Table 3.33 List of Mammals in the Study area

S. No. Scientific Name Common

Name Local Name

Schedule as per WPA 1972

1. Herpestes edwardsi Nurulia, Noria Common

mongoose Schedule II

2. Funambulus penanti Khiskoli Three striped Schedule IV

3. Rattus rattus Rat - Schedule V

4. Mus musculus Mouse - Schedule V

5. Chiroptera Bat - Schedule V

Table 3.34 List of Domestic animal in the Study area

S.No. Scientific Name Common Name

1. Bubalus bubalis Buffalo

2. Bos taurus Cow

3. Capra aegagrushircus Goat

4. Canis lupus familiaris Dog




118

Table 3.35 List of Birds in the Study area

S. No. Scientific Name Common Name Local Name Schedule

and Status Mig.

Status

1. Ardeola grayii Indian pond heron - Schedule IV R

2. Bubulcus ibis Cattle egret Dhorbaglo Schedule IV R

3. Egretta garzetta Little egret Baglo Schedule IV R

4. Pseudibis papillosa Black ibis - Schedule IV R

5. Milvus migrans Black winged kite Govinda Samadi

LC R

6. Pavo cristatus Indian Peafowl Mor Schedule I R

7. Vanellus indicus Red-watted lapwing Titodi Schedule IV R

8. Charadrius dubius Yellow-wattled lapwing - LC R

9. Tringa ochropus Little ringed plover Leelitutvari LC R

10. Himantopus himantopus Green sandpiper - LC R

11. Sterna aurantia Indian river tern - LC R

12. Columba livia Blue rock pigeon Parevun Schedule IV R

13. Streptopelia decaocto Indian ring dove Dhol LC R

14. Streptopelia chinensis Spotted dove Vanaholi LC R

15. Psittacula krameri Rose ringed parakeet Sudo, Popat LC R

16. Cuculus micropterus Indian cuckoo - Schedule IV R

17. Glaucidium radiatum Jungle owlet Ghubad Schedule I R

18. Alcedo atthis Common kingfisher Lagothi Schedule IV R

19. Merops orientalis Green bee-eater Nano

patrangiyo - R

20. Coracias benghalensis Indian roller Nilkant Schedule IV R

21. Galerida malabarica Malabar crested lark - LC R

22. Hirundo rustica Common swallow - LC R

23. Hirundo daurica Red rumped swallow Kenchia babil LC R

24. Oriolus xanthornus Black headed oriole - Schedule IV R

25. Dicrurus adsimilis Fork Tailed Drongo Kalokoshi Schedule IV R

26. Sturnus pagodarum Brahminy myna - Schedule IV R

27. Acridotheres tristis Indian myna Kabar Schedule IV R

28. Acridotheres ginginianus Bank myna Kabar Schedule IV R

29. Pycnonotus cafer Red vented bulbul Bulbul Schedule IV R

30. Turdoides caudata Common babbler Sheradi Schedule IV R

31. Turdoides striata Jungle babbler Vanalaledo Schedule IV R

32. Orthotomus Tailor bird Darjido LC R

33. Megalurus palustris Striated marsh warbler - LC R

34. Copsychus saularis Magpie robin Daiyad LC R

35. Saxicoloides fulicata Indian robin Deoli LC R

36. Geokichla citrina Orange headed ground

thrush Malagirkasturo LC R

37. Parus spilonotus Yellow cheeked tit - Schedule IV R

38. Motacilla flava Yellow wagtail Matanopilakya LC R

39. Cinnyris asiaticus Purple sunbird Phulchakli LC R

40. Passer domesticus House sparrow Chakli LC R

41. Ploceus philippinus Baya Sughari Schedule IV R




119

Table 3.36 List of Reptiles in the Study area

S. No. Scientific Name Common Name Local Name

Schedule as per WPA,1972

1. Hemidactylus flaviviridis Northern house gecko Garoli Not Listed

2. Calotes versicolor Common garden lizard Kachindo Not Listed

3. Calotes rouxi Forest calotes Kachindo Not Listed

4. Sitana ponticeriana Fan-throated lizard - Not Listed

5. Chameleo zeylanicus Indian chameleon Sarado Not Listed

6. Ptyas mucosus Common rat snake Dhaman Not Listed

7. Naja naja Indian cobra Nag Schedule II

Table 3.37 List of Invertebrates in the Study area

S. No. Scientific Name Common Name Local Name

1. Anisoptera Dragonfly Dragonfly

2. Apis Honey bee Honey bee

3. Argiopeaurantia Garden Spinder The garden

Table 3.38 Details of Fishes

S. No. Species S. No. Species

Marine Fishes

1. White Pomfret 9. Mullet

2. BlachPomfret 10. Ribbon Fish

3. Bombay Duck 11. Silverbar

4. Thread Fin 12. Eel

5. Jew Fish 13. Smallscineldies

6. Clupeids 14. Cat Fish

7. Coilia 15. Crab

8. Levta 16. Leather Jacket

Fresh water Fishes

1. Catla 5. Mullet

2. Mrigal 6. Eel

3. Minor Carp 7. Shrimps

4. Vallagoattu Source: Local Information from Villagers & Primary Survey

3.12.3 Interpretation of Ecology and Biodiversity

Different species of flora were observed among which Mango and Chickoo species were dominant,

as the soil of the study region also support for the cultivation of same. Herbal species were observed

rarely. Looking to the density of plant it may also be suggested to improve the quality of environment

by planting more trees. Due to destruction of natural habitat, less numbers of wild mammals were

observed. Number of species and density of wild mammals can be increased by promoting/

facilitating the growth of bush. There was no endangered species observed during primary survey.




120

3.13 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

Socioeconomics (also known as socio-economics or social economics) is the social science that

studies how economic activity affects social processes. In general it analyzes

how societies progress, stagnate, or regress because of their local or regional economy, or the global

economy.

In order to assess and evaluate the likely impacts arising out of any new or existing projects in socio-

economic environment, it is necessary to gauge the apprehension of the people in the surrounding

areas. Socio-economic survey serves as an effective tool for fulfilling this requirement.

The rapid industrialization of the study region has greatly influenced the socio economic and health

environment in the villages. Increasing industrialization and population density has increased

pressure on resources, civic amenities and public infrastructure. Economic conditions of the local

people have improved with the increasing industrialization and greater employment opportunities.

The socio-economic environment includes demography structure, population density, literacy level,

and employment levels. The data establish a baseline for the prediction of likely impacts of the

proposed activity on the socio-economic environment. Secondary information pertaining to the study

area villages was collected from Government Agencies, Census data for the year 2011, and

statistical abstracts to compile the socio-economic data.

3.13.1 Socio-Economic Survey Methodology

Socio-economic survey tools provide a means of improving understanding of local resource

management systems, resource use and the relative importance of resources for households and

villages. They can also be used to elicit insights on interaction with government decision-making

systems, community perceptions of trends and priority issues, and community-based institutions and

their role in the sustainable use and conservation of natural resources.

Data Collection: Following steps were considered for the collection of primary data:

1. Identification of Study Area: The study area was identified before carrying out the survey. All the

related information which could affect the prosperity, development & literacy were also collected.

2. Site Visit: Location wise survey plan & format for data collection were prepared for site visit. Data

regarding Land Characteristics, Population, Literacy, Workers and Amenities were collected during

the survey.

Analysis of Data: The data collected by primary survey were verified with secondary data collected

from sources like Government Agencies, Census data for the year 2011, and statistical abstracts.

3.13.2 Demography

Almost all villages in the study area are experiencing a rapid growth of population due to

industrialization. The total population of study region is summarized in Table 3.39.




121

3.13.3 Population Density

Population density in the study area varies from 57 - 67616 person/sq. km. Details of the same are

tabulated in Table 3.39.

Table 3.39 Details of Population in Study Area

Villages No. of Household Total

population Total area In (Sq.km)

Population density

Person/sq.km

Kanjan Hari 750 3209 6.75 475

Jujwa 850 3420 8.54 400

Pardi Hariya 19 63 0.45 140

Pathri 318 1231 3.21 383

Ovada 354 1499 4.01 374

Ghadoi 543 2188 4.88 448

Dhamdachi 674 2679 4.81 557

Gorwada 267 1115 1.65 676

Nandawala 171 666 1.94 343

Chanvai 1321 5834 9.32 626

Chichwada 238 1025 1.43 717

Magod 655 2758 7.39 373

Magod Dungri 1020 4701 2.14 2197

Atar 188 765 1.23 622

Meh 304 1364 1.38 988

Bhagod 390 1666 3.96 421

Surwada 449 2179 1.24 1757

Kundi 622 2642 7.49 353

Sarodhi 419 1813 3.23 561

Chikhla 651 2825 6.15 459

Bhadeli Jagalala 1781 9133 3.57 2558

Bhadeli Desai Party

296 1262 5.03 251

Lilapore 657 2971 10.58 281

Umarsadi 201 828 2.28 363

Saron 410 1732 2.99 579

Khajurdi 474 2095 2.62 800

Palan 310 1298 4.51 288

Fanaswada 332 1419 4.55 312

Dhanori 877 3669 3.31 1108

Endergota 326 1356 2.47 549

Segva 366 1620 2.42 669

Muli 318 1391 1.82 764

Kochwada 148 664 1.34 496

Kalwada 864 3761 8.48 444

Sarangpur 219 930 2.78 335




122

Kanjan Ranchhod

798 3666 6.42 571

Thakkarwada 261 1032 2.48 416

Gadaria 729 3058 7.39 414

Ronvel 548 2345 7.97 294

Anjlav 604 2536 2.16 1174

Binwada 665 2735 6.79 403

Rabada 468 1962 5.91 332

Bhoma Pardi 244 1029 5.70 181

Pardi Parnera (CT)

1305 5454 10.0 545

Valsad (INA) 320 1162 10.0 116

Pardi Sondhpur (CT)

1682 7833 10.0

783

Parnera (CT) 2683 12296 10.0 1230

Atul (CT) 869 3486 10.0 349

Vashiyar (OG) WARD NO.-0020 (Rural MDDS CODE:523323)

465 1867 10.0 187

Segvi (OG) (Part) WARD NO.-0019 (Rural MDDS CODE:523280)

654 2948 10.0 295

Tithal (OG) WARD NO.-0018 (Rural MDDS CODE:523322)

596 2464 10.0 246

Chharwada 2170 8806 2.15 4096

Balda 868 3621 7.73 468

Pardi (M) 6278 28495 10.0 2850

Total 39,989 1,74,566 284.65 37,617

3.13.4 Sex Ratio

The sex ratio i.e. the number of females per 1000 males is in range of 711 - 1030 with lowest in

Chharwada village and highest in Segva village. The Sex ratio i.e. the number of females per 1000

males indirectly reveals certain sociological aspect in relation to female births, infant mortality among

female children. Details of the same are tabulated in Table 3.40.

Table 3.40: Details of Sex Ratio in Study Area

Zone of Study Male

Population Female

Population Total

Population Sex Ratio

(Female to 1000 Male)

Kanjan Hari 1617 1592 3209 985

Jujwa 1758 1662 3420 945

Pardi Hariya 33 30 63 909

Pathri 621 610 1231 982

Ovada 774 725 1499 937




123

Ghadoi 1122 1066 2188 950

Dhamdachi 1397 1282 2679 918

Gorwada 581 534 1115 919

Nandawala 332 334 666 1006

Chanvai 2944 2890 5834 982

Chichwada 537 488 1025 909

Magod 1387 1371 2758 988

Magod Dungri 2337 2364 4701 1012

Atar 384 381 765 992

Meh 692 672 1364 971

Bhagod 842 824 1666 979

Surwada 1134 1045 2179 922

Kundi 1356 1286 2642 948

Sarodhi 941 872 1813 927

Chikhla 1494 1331 2825 891

Bhadeli Jagalala 4633 4500 9133 971

Bhadeli Desai Party 647 615 1262 951

Lilapore 1523 1448 2971 951

Umarsadi 432 396 828 917

Saron 881 851 1732 966

Khajurdi 1034 1061 2095 1026

Palan 651 647 1298 994

Fanaswada 740 679 1419 918

Dhanori 1890 1779 3669 941

Endergota 709 647 1356 913

Segva 798 822 1620 1030

Muli 730 661 1391 905

Kochwada 336 328 664 976

Kalwada 1878 1883 3761 1003

Sarangpur 461 469 930 1017

Kanjan Ranchhod 1846 1820 3666 986

Thakkarwada 521 511 1032 981

Gadaria 1592 1466 3058 921

Ronvel 1200 1145 2345 954

Anjlav 1271 1265 2536 995

Binwada 1395 1340 2735 961

Rabada 999 963 1962 964

Bhoma Pardi 545 484 1029 888

Pardi Parnera (CT) 2883 2571 5454 892

Valsad (INA) 619 543 1162 877

Pardi Sondhpur (CT) 4104 3729 7833 909

Parnera (CT) 6440 5856 12296 909

Atul (CT) 1786 1700 3486 952




124


941 926 1867

984


1475 1473 2948

999


1258 1206 2464

959

Chharwada 5146 3660 8806 711

Balda 1888 1733 3621 918

Pardi (M) 14648 13847 28495 945

Total 90,183 84,383 1,74,566 -

3.13.5 Literacy Rate

The literacy level of the study area is summarized in Table 3.41 and graphically presented in Figure

3.15

Table 3.41 Details of Literacy Rate in Study Area

Zone of Study Literate Literacy (%)

Male Female Total Male Female Total

Kanjan Hari 1327 1192 2519 82.07 74.87 78.50

Jujwa 1437 1197 2634 81.74 72.02 77.02

Pardi Hariya 27 22 49 81.82 73.33 77.78

Pathri 526 450 976 84.70 73.77 79.29

Ovada 624 509 1133 80.62 70.21 75.58

Ghadoi 971 823 1794 86.54 77.20 81.99

Dhamdachi 1173 973 2146 83.97 75.90 80.10

Gorwada 496 423 919 85.37 79.21 82.42

Nandawala 266 235 501 80.12 70.36 75.23

Chanvai 2442 1978 4420 82.95 68.44 75.76

Chichwada 462 389 851 86.03 79.71 83.02

Magod 1208 1156 2364 87.09 84.32 85.71

Magod Dungri 2081 1998 4079 89.05 84.52 86.77

Atar 320 288 608 83.33 75.59 79.48

Meh 619 543 1162 89.45 80.80 85.19

Bhagod 730 636 1366 86.70 77.18 81.99

Surwada 989 925 1914 87.21 88.52 87.84

Kundi 1123 1003 2126 82.82 77.99 80.47

Sarodhi 749 558 1307 79.60 63.99 72.09

Chikhla 1298 1057 2355 86.88 79.41 83.36

Bhadeli Jagalala 4009 3562 7571 86.53 79.16 82.90

Bhadeli Desai Party 500 420 920 77.28 68.29 72.90




125

Lilapore 1213 1089 2302 79.65 75.21 77.48

Umarsadi 386 328 714 89.35 82.83 86.23

Saron 720 622 1342 81.73 73.09 77.48

Khajurdi 844 766 1610 81.62 72.20 76.85

Palan 510 471 981 78.34 72.80 75.58

Fanaswada 657 560 1217 88.78 82.47 85.76

Dhanori 1547 1308 2855 81.85 73.52 77.81

Endergota 600 477 1077 84.63 73.72 79.42

Segva 680 579 1259 85.21 70.44 77.72

Muli 611 532 1143 83.70 80.48 82.17

Kochwada 251 233 484 74.70 71.04 72.89

Kalwada 1515 1390 2905 80.67 73.82 77.24

Sarangpur 375 328 703 81.34 69.94 75.59

Kanjan Ranchhod 1535 1289 2824 83.15 70.82 77.03

Thakkarwada 395 353 748 75.82 69.08 72.48

Gadaria 1359 1178 2537 85.36 80.35 82.96

Ronvel 942 779 1721 78.50 68.03 73.39

Anjlav 1111 1002 2113 87.41 79.21 83.32

Binwada 1187 1065 2252 85.09 79.48 82.34

Rabada 784 640 1424 78.48 66.46 72.58

Bhoma Pardi 455 363 818 83.49 75.00 79.49

Pardi Parnera (CT) 2484 1902 4386 86.16 73.98 80.42

Valsad (INA) 532 456 988 85.95 83.98 85.03

Pardi Sondhpur (CT)

3331 2725 6056 81.16 73.08 77.31

Parnera (CT) 5292 4362 9654 82.17 74.49 78.51

Atul (CT) 1562 1341 2903 87.46 78.88 83.28


748 626 1374 79.49 67.60 73.59


1295 1227 2522 87.80 83.30 85.55


1117 1071 2188 88.79 88.81 88.80

Chharwada 4237 2710 6947 82.34 74.04 78.89

Balda 1628 1294 2922 86.23 74.67 80.70

Pardi (M) 12016 10447 22463 82.03 75.45 78.83

Total 75,296 63,850 1,39,146 - - -




126

Figure 3.15: Graph of Literacy Rate

Among all the villages of study area Tithal (OG) is having high literacy rate i.e. 88.80 %. There is not

much difference between female literacy rate and male literacy rate in the study region. Female

literacy rate is an important indicator for social change.

3.13.6 Economic Aspects

Economic aspects of the study area include the economic structure of the people of the surrounding

area. It can be predicted that economic structure of the study area will be improved with time,

because it consists large industrial estate and hence there are more employment opportunities.

According to working status, whole population of the study area is divided into,

Marginal workers

Non workers

Main workers

Census department has defined 10 categories of workers in Main workers. It consists of cultivators,

agricultural, labourer those engaged in livestock, forestry, fishing, mining and quarrying,

manufacturing, processing and repairs in household industries and other services. Workers engaged

in the work for a period less than 6 month during the reference year falls under marginal workers.

Workers engaged in unpaid household duties e.g. students, retired person, dependents etc. falls

under non-workers. Detail of occupational structure is shown in Table 3.42.

Table 3.42 Details of Occupational Structure

Zone of Study Non-Workers (%) Total Workers

Main Workers (%) Marginal Workers (%)

Kanjan Hari 44.19 48.33 7.48

Jujwa 47.02 43.39 9.59

Pardi Hariya 34.92 49.21 15.87

Pathri 61.74 36.80 1.46

Ovada 57.91 35.62 6.47

Ghadoi 62.02 32.31 5.67

Dhamdachi 48.15 41.28 10.56

0102030405060708090

100

% L

iter

acy

Villages

Literacy (%) Male Literacy (%) Female Literacy (%) Total




127

Gorwada 38.12 37.85 24.04

Nandawala 39.79 57.66 2.55

Chanvai 60.13 33.03 6.84

Chichwada 61.85 30.73 7.41

Magod 53.63 39.34 7.03

Magod Dungri 68.86 26.57 4.57

Atar 52.94 33.33 13.73

Meh 53.52 23.61 22.87

Bhagod 58.16 39.44 2.40

Surwada 66.54 33.00 0.46

Kundi 58.40 39.63 1.97

Sarodhi 41.26 55.21 3.53

Chikhla 55.54 39.43 5.03

Bhadeli Jagalala 68.58 28.67 2.76

Bhadeli Desai Party

59.19 34.63 6.18

Lilapore 60.59 31.98 7.44

Umarsadi 67.03 32.97 0.00

Saron 55.95 40.36 3.70

Khajurdi 34.75 37.14 28.11

Palan 51.16 20.65 28.20

Fanaswada 59.41 39.04 1.55

Dhanori 48.62 35.35 16.03

Endergota 36.80 20.87 42.33

Segva 52.41 46.54 1.05

Muli 51.91 47.23 0.86

Kochwada 57.08 42.62 0.30

Kalwada 57.06 40.84 2.10

Sarangpur 64.19 21.72 14.09

Kanjan Ranchhod 59.52 37.48 3.00

Thakkarwada 39.05 60.76 0.19

Gadaria 63.02 34.34 2.65

Ronvel 55.10 35.57 9.34

Anjlav 54.26 33.28 12.46

Binwada 60.37 23.91 15.72

Rabada 48.52 33.03 18.45

Bhoma Pardi 63.46 33.82 2.72

Pardi Parnera (CT)

58.87 31.65 9.48

Valsad (INA) 62.48 32.96 4.56

Pardi Sondhpur (CT)

58.87 33.73 7.40

Parnera (CT) 63.13 31.93 4.94

Atul (CT) 62.48 34.74 2.78




128

Vashiyar (OG) WARD NO.-0020

(Rural MDDS CODE:523323)

55.70 30.48 13.82

Segvi (OG) (Part) WARD NO.-0019

(Rural MDDS CODE:523280)

63.06 33.89 3.05

Tithal (OG) WARD NO.-0018 (Rural

MDDS CODE:523322)

57.14 32.63 10.23

Chharwada 58.80 37.50 3.70

Balda 54.63 36.95 8.42

Pardi (M) 57.38 35.20 7.42

Thakkarwada village has significant employment i.e. 60.76 % as main workers, while the lowest

employment as main workers in Palan village i.e. 20.65%. Almost all the villages have more than 50

% people as non-workers. Rapid industrialization in the last two decades has resulted in significant

changes in the occupational profile of the local people. There is an overall trend among the youth to

opt for employment in service sector and move away from traditional occupation.

Figure 3.16 Occupational Structure of Study Area

3.13.7 Amenities

The infrastructure resources base of the eleven study areas with reference to education, medical

facility, water supply, post and telegraph, transportation, communication facility, power supply and

existence of nearest town etc. according to the Village Directory Census CD 2011 of Gujarat State.

The significant features of these important parameters for each study area are discussed as follows.

.

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

% o

f W

ork

ers

Villages

Non Workers (%) Total Workers Main Workers(%)




129

Education

As per 20011 village directory record, almost all villages having education facility in the

form of primary schools, and middle school are as follows.

Table 3.43: Education facilities

Private Pre - Primary School

(Nursery/LKG/UKG) (Numbers)

Govt Primary School

(Numbers)

Private Primary School

(Numbers)

Govt Secondary

School (Numbers)

Private Secondary

School (Numbers)

Govt Senior Secondary

School (Numbers)

1 80 3 12 1 4

Medical/Primary Health Care

Medical facilities in terms of community health workers are available in some of the

villages. Primary health center and primary health sub centers are available in few villages.

Table 3.44: Health Care Facilities

Community Health Centre (Numbers)

Primary Health Centre (Numbers)

Primary Health Sub Centre (Numbers)

Mobile Health Clinic (Numbers)

Family Welfare Centre (Numbers)

0 6 29 10 1

Drinking Water

The water supply in the region is through dug wells, hand pumps, taps and other allied

sources.

Table 3.45: Drinking Water facilities

Tap Water Untreated

Covered Well

Uncovered Well

Hand Pump

Tube Wells/Borehole

River/Canal Tank/Pond/Lake

45 2 37 44 24 28 17

Drainage and Sanitation Facilities

Drainage and sanitation facilities were not adequate in the study area. Mostly Open

drainage, and open kuccha drainage observed in the village.

Table 3.46: Sanitation Facilities

Closed Drainage Open Drainage No Drainage Open Kuccha

Drainage

1 41 3 28

Communication

Communication facility is fairly good in this region. Near about 50% villages having

telephone connectivity and having post office.




130

Table 3.47: Communication Facilities in the Study Area

Post Office Sub Post Office Telephone (landlines) Public Call Office

/Mobile (PCO)

1 30 45 39

Transportation

A well planned and efficient network of transport is an essential component for a

developing country. In the absence of efficient network of transport, a State‟s economy would suffer

from major grid lock in terms of overall growth potential of that area. In village public bus facility was

availed and other facilities were private bus.

Table 3.48: Transportation Facilities

Public Bus

Service

Private Bus

Service

Auto/Modified Autos

Taxi Vans Tractors Carts

Drivens by Animals

45 1 29 1 8 6 45

Road Approach Facilities

Road condition facility was found in village from following.

Table 3.49: Road Facilities in the Study Area

Black Topped (pucca) Road

Gravel (kuchha) Roads

Water Bounded Macadam

All Weather Road Foothpath

45 44 7 43 45

Bank Facilities

Banking and credit society facility was found in village. Self help group activities were

performed by the women groups

Table 3.50: Bank Facilities in the Study Area

Commercial Bank Cooperative Bank Agricultural Credit

Societies Self - Help

Group (SHG)

4 1 9 33

Power Supply

Almost all villages are electrified in the region and electricity is available for both domestic

and agriculture.

Table 3.51: Power Facility in the Study Area

Power Supply For Domestic Use

Power Supply For Agriculture Use

Power Supply For Commercial Use

Power Supply For All Users

45 45 45 45

Source: District Census Handbook 2011, Gujarat.




131

3.13.8 Interpretation of Socio Economic Data

During the primary survey it was observed that almost pakka road facility is available in all villages

within 10 km radius. Literacy rate of the study region is from 72.09% to 88.80%. On the basis of

survey for literacy rate data it is interpreted that there is need to promote education among more and

more people. Almost all the villages have more than 50 % people as non-workers. It indicates that the

problem of unemployment can be solved by providing proper training and education. There is also

need to establish more industries so that maximum number of employment can be generated. Basic

amenities like Education facilities Health care facilities, water supply, electric power supply, mode of

transportation etc. are available in all villages.

3.14 Summary

AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING

Sr.

No.

Criteria

Pollutants Unit

Maximum

Value

Minimum

Value Prescribed Standard

1. PM10 µg/m3 87.3 62.5 100

2. PM2.5 µg/m3 48.4 32.1 60

3. SO2 µg/m3 17.8 8.6 80

4. NOX µg/m3 23.6 13.6 80





NOISE MONITORING

Sr.

No. Parameter Unit Maximum Value Minimum Value

Prescribed

Standard

1. Leq (Day) dB(A) 77.0 54.6 -

2. Leq(Night) dB(A) 75.7 47.8 -

Based on noise level data obtained during the survey for residential area and industrial area

and comparison study with standard norms prescribed by MoEF & CC., it is interpreted that

average noise levels for studied locations are within the limit . Looking towards the increase in

noise generating sources it is suggested that there is need to apply noise reducing devices at

noise generating sources and generate public awareness.

Soil Quality and Characteristics

Sr.

No. Parameter Unit Maximum Value Minimum Value

1. pH - 7.63 7.43

2. Electrical

Conductivity dS/m 2.0 1.11

3. Sodium meq/100gm 6.0 3.2

4. Potassium meq/100gm 1.7 1.2

5. Phosphorous mg/100gm 18.7 16.8

6. Total Nitrogen % 0.073 0.052

Based on different soil separates soils of the study region are characterized as clay soils. pH of

soils are slightly alkaline and the results of EC , SAR and ESP shows that soil is slightly

ingresses with sodic metals and Sodicity in the soil is up to certain level. Such type of soil can




132

be considered as sodic soil as conductivity is > 0.8 dS/m and SAR is also > 0.8. Organic

carbon and Nitrogen in the soil is in good status. The results relating to total Fe, Cu, Cr, B and

Zn do not show alarming concentrations in different soil samples. Sodicity in soil does not favor

the growth of pant. Clay soils also not good for some agricultural activities like ground nut and

wheat etc. Such type of soil should be used for plantation after applying some phosphatic

fertilizers. These types of soils are suitable for plantation of mango, chickoo, mangrove species

and for the cultivation of cotton, jowar, bajara and maize. These interpretations are relating to

the soil samples taken to the particular locations and their results.

GROUND WATER

Sr.

No. Parameter Unit

Maximum

Value

Minimum

Value

Desirable

Limit

Permissible

Limit

1. pH - 7.56 7.14 6.5-8.5 No

Relaxation

2. TDS mg/L 843 664 500 2000

3. TSS mg/L <2 <2 - -

4. Total

Hardness mg/L 467 363 200 600

5. Chloride mg/L 286 186 250 1000

6. Total

Alkalinity mg/L 416 276 200 600

7. Fluoride mg/L 0.7 0.3 1.0 1.5

8. Iron mg/L 0.32 0.24 0.3 No

Relaxation

Based on comparison study with drinking water standard as per IS:10500,2012 and results

found during the testing it is interpreted that portability of water can be considered good except

vashiyar village as all the results have been found during the permissible range of drinking

water. Iron content in the ground water of vashiyar village has been found slightly higher than

the permissible limit. Ground water of vashiyar village should not be directly used in drinking

purpose. It can be used for drinking after passing through RO. Other ground water sources can

be utilized for all domestic, drinking purpose and irrigation purpose. This interpretation relate to

the comparison study with IS: 10500 and results found for the sample collected from particular

location.

SURFACE WATER

Sr.

No. Parameter Unit

Maximum

Value

Minimum

Value

Desirable

Limit

Permissible

Limit

1. pH - 7.78 7.25 6.5-8.5 No

Relaxation

2. TDS mg/L 330 187 500 2000

3. DO mg/L 5.1 4.7 - -

4. COD mg/L 18 12 - -

5. BOD mg/L 6 <4 - -

Based on test result data comparison study, it is interpreted that River water quality does not

meet with drinking water norms as per IS 10500:2012. Results of COD, BOD and Iron indicate

towards the contamination of organic matter and metal. This organic contamination may be due




133

to throwing the flowers in rivers, animal bath in rivers or directly/indirectly discharge of

sewage/Effluent. These waters should not be directly used in drinking purpose but it can be

used in drinking after conventional treatment followed by disinfection. These waters can directly

be used in irrigation and other domestic purposes. Interpretation relate to sample collected

from particular points and results for tested sample only.

MARINE WATER

On the basis of test results, it is interpreted that water quality of marine is as per expectation

and suitable for sustaining the aquatic life. During Microbiological analysis it was found that

water contains some microbial organisms like Total Coliforms, Fecal Coliform. Indeed marine

water body receives the water from different sources like rivers lakes and domestic sources.

These microorganisms come from these external sources. Based on data, it can be concluded

that organic load is not more than the self-purification capacity of marine water body.

ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY

Different species of flora were observed among which Mango and Chickoo species were

dominant, as the soil of the study region also support for the cultivation of same. Herbal species

were observed rarely. Looking to the density of plant it may also be suggested to improve the

quality of environment by planting more trees. Due to destruction of natural habitat, less

numbers of wild mammals were observed. Number of species and density of wild mammals

can be increased by promoting/ facilitating the growth of bush. There was no endangered

species observed during primary survey.

SOCIO ECONOMIC

During the primary survey it was observed that almost pakka road facility is available in all

villages within 10 km radius. Literacy rate of the study region is from 72.09% to 88.80%. On the

basis of survey for literacy rate data it is interpreted that there is need to promote education

among more and more people. Almost all the villages have more than 50 % people as non-

workers. It indicates that the problem of unemployment can be solved by providing proper

training and education. There is also need to establish more industries so that maximum

number of employment can be generated. Basic amenities like Education facilities Health care

facilities, water supply, electric power supply, mode of transportation etc. are available in all

villages.

----------------------------------




134

CHAPTER 4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION

MEASURES

4.0 GENERAL

This chapter presents identification and appraisal of various impacts from the proposed plant. The

environmental impacts are categorized as either primary or secondary impacts. Primary impacts

are those, which are attributed directly to the project and secondary impacts are those, which are

indirectly induced and typically include the associated investment and changed pattern of social

and economic activities by the proposed action. The construction and operational phase of the

proposed project comprises various activities, each of which may have an impact on some or all

environmental parameters. Various impacts during the construction and operation phase on the

environment have been studied listed along with mitigating measures in the subsequent sections.

4.1 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE

This includes the activities related to construction of additional building and other related

structures, erection of boilers and other related equipment. As this is an expansion project and

project site is already developed, leveling of site is not needed. Construction activity will be

undertaken at production area, Utility area and storage area. There will be no demolition,

underground or reclamation works. The probable impacts during construction phase on various

sectors of environment (such as air, water, soil, biotic, socio-economic environment etc.) have

been identified and listed in Table-4.1.

Table 4.1: Impact Identification Matrix (During Construction Phase)

Activities

Environmental Attributes

Air

Wa

ter

So

il

No

ise

LU

/LC

Hyd

ro

ge

olo

gy

Ge

olo

gy

SH

W

Ris

k

Haza

rdo

us

Ec

olo

gy

&

Bio

div

ers

ity

So

cio

Ec

on

om

ic

Transportation of construction material and operation of machineries

✔ - ✔ ✔ - - - ✔ ✔ ✔ -

Storage and handling of construction material

✔ - ✔ ✔ - - - ✔ ✔ - -

Civil Construction Activities ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ - ✔ ✔ - -

Disposal of Construction Debris

✔ ✔ - - - - - ✔ ✔ ✔ -

Wastewater-sewage Disposal

✔ ✔ ✔ - - - - ✔ - ✔ -

Additional Greenbelt Development

✔ - ✔ ✔ ✔ - - - - ✔ -

Employment Generation - ✔ - - - - - ✔ - - ✔




135

Table 4.2: Severity Criteria for Magnitude of Impacts

S. No Category Description of category Impact

Adverse Beneficial

1. No impact - 0 0

2. No appreciable impact Short term reversible -1 1

3. Significant impact Long term reversible -2 2

4. Major impact Irreversible but of lesser extent -3 3

5. High impact Irreversible but of medium extent -4 4

6. Permanent impact Severe irreversible impact -5 5

Pro

ba

bilit

y

Impact

Very low

1

Low

2

Medium

3

High

4

Very High

5

Very High 5 5 10 15 20 25

High 4 4 8 12 16 20

Medium 3 3 6 9 12 15

Low 2 2 4 6 8 10

Very Low 1 1 2 3 4 5

Figure 4.1: Impact Quantification Chart

Table 4.3: Cumulative Score range for Beneficial and Adverse impacts

S. No.

Cumulative Score

Meaning

1. +ve / -ve Beneficial impact / adverse impact

2. 0-150 No appreciable Beneficial impact / adverse impact

3. 151-300 Appreciable but reversible adverse impact-mitigation measures are needed

4. 301-450 Significant adverse impacts: most of the impacts are reversible. Mitigation measures

are crucial.

5. 451-600 Major adverse impacts; most of the impacts are reversible. Alternative site selection to

be considered.

6. >600 Permanent irreversible impact; alternatives to the project need to be explored




136

Table 4.4: Environmental Impact Assessment Matrix without Mitigation Measures

(Construction Phase)

Activities


Total

Air

Wa

ter

So

il

No

ise

LU

/LC

Hy

dro

ge

olo

gy

Ge

olo

gy

SH

W

Ris

k

Ha

za

rdo

us

Ec

olo

gy

&

Bio

div

ers

ity

So

cio

Ec

on

om

ic


-4 - -4 -8 - - - -4 -6 -4 - -30

Storage and handling of construction

material

-4 - -2 -6 - - - -6 -4 - - -22

Civil Construction Activities

-4 -6 -3 -8 -2 -6 - -4 -6 - - -39

Disposal of Construction

Debris

-3 -6 - - - - - -4 -6 -4 - -23


-2 -9 -8 - - - - -9 - -6 - -34


+9 - +6 +9 +4 - - - - +9 - +37

Employment Generation

- -6 - - - - - -4 - - +12 +2

Total -8 -27 -11 -13 +2 -6 - -31 -22 -5 +12 -109

Total Cumulative Score for various Environmental Parameters without mitigation measures is -109

which is - not adverse impact during construction phase.

4.2 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION

MEASURES DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE


Table 4.5: Impact on Air Environment and Mitigation Measures

Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures


Fugitive Dust Emissions due to vehicle Movement may deteriorate the quality of Air.

Exhaust emissions from vehicles and equipment deployed during the construction phase is also likely to result in marginal increase in the levels of SO2, NOx and

Excavated soil and construction debris will be sprinkled with water and kept moist.

The industries connected with well-developed paved road. Also Company has developed Cement concrete road in project premises. It shall reduce the dust emission due to transportation.

Trucks used for transportation of construction materials shall be covered with tarpaulin sheet to avoid dust dispersion at site.

Only PUC vehicle shall be used for the






137


Disposal of Construction Debris

PM which leads to respiratory ailments like asthama and other dust related problems to the human health.

Stomatal index may be minimized due to dust deposit on leaf which reduces crop yield and deteriorate crop quality.

Spillage and fugitive emissions of construction materials

Increase of dust and airborne particulates may create health issues to the workers.

Construction debris and disposed domestic garbage may create nuisance due to odour generation.

Odour generation due to sewage disposal may create nuisance to the people

Positive impact due to greenbelt development as it will act natural barrier for dust and noise emission.

Existing greenbelt plantation would reduce the impacts during the construction phase.

transportation of materials and equipment.

For control of emission from D. G. set, adequate stack height shall be provided to minimize the impacts. And it will be only used in case of power failure and/ or emergency

Construction materials will be covered with tarpaulin sheets throughout the construction phase to avoid dust generation.

Barricading will be done at the construction area.

Regular water sprinkling will be done to control dust emission.

Personnel Protective Equipment (PPEs) will be provided to the construction workers. Hence there will be no significant impacts on their health due to the dust particle.

Separate bins will be provided storing Garbage/wastes and will be disposed off adequately.

Existing sanitation facilities will be provided to construction workers. Sewage is/will be disposed off to septic tank/soak pit.

Implementation of plantation plan for trees & plants

Greenbelt of 6325 m2 is already developed and additional 3800 m2 Green belt will be developed for proposed expansion.

The impact will be confined within the project boundary and is expected to be negligible outside the plant boundaries.

Wastewater-sewage disposal



Table 4.6: Impact on Water Environment and Mitigation Measures


Civil Construction Activities and disposal of construction debris

Decrease the ground water level due to consumption of water

Untreated sewage may have negative impact.

Industry has already obtained permission from the

CGWA for withdrawal of ground water.

Rain water harvesting will be done for water

conservation and ground water recharge.

The water requirement during construction work




138



Water resource depletion due to water consumption

will be a temporary requirement and the quantity

will not be significant as minor construction work

will be carried out.

Minimum withdrawal is advisable for construction

work and care shall be taken to avoid wastage of

water during the construction phase.

Existing sanitation facilities shall be provided to

construction workers. Sewage will be disposed

through soak pits.

Adequate use and minimum wastage of water

shall be practiced.


4.2.3 Soil Environment

Table 4.7: Impact on Soil Environment and Mitigation Measures



Soil may get contaminated from the spillage of chemicals such as fuels, oils, paints and other construction chemicals and concrete. This normally happens when these materials are transported in open or loosely capped containers.

The excavated earth material if stacked loosely may result into runoff resulting in loss of topsoil.

Soil contamination due to handling and storage of construction material.

Oil spillage can affect physical and chemical properties of the soils.

Unmanaged sewage can also contribute to contamination of soil.

Positive impact as improvement in soil texture due to binding of top soil materials and root structure.

Control measures will be provided for oily residues such as transformer oil and lubricants in the case of accidental or unexpected release. Transformer oil is/will be supplied in drums from an imported source.

Oily residues and fuel and any contaminated oil residues will be captured at source and refuelling and maintenance will take place in dedicated areas away from surface water resources. Contaminated residues and waste oily residues will be disposed at a site agreed with the local authority.

As the proposed project is an expansion project, No major excavation will be carried out.

Excavated earth (if any) shall be stored in stockpiles and covered with plastic/tarpaulin sheets or stored in closed room and reused for landscape development along the corridor.

The construction material & diesel /oil to be used for various construction activities shall be stored in designated storage yards to reduce the spills into unwarranted areas.

Civil construction activities







139


Good practices of storage and material handling is/will be carried out.

Spillage control is/will be carried out by disposing the affected soil at adequate place.

Sanitary units will be provided for the constructional workers.

This wastewater will be treated in existing septic tanks and discharged into soak pits.

The greenbelt development is/will control the soil erosion due to wind and runoff water.

Regular maintenance of greenbelt is/will be done.


Table 4.8: Impact on Noise Environment and Mitigation Measures



Continuous Noise pollution affects the human working efficiency.

It is anticipated that powered mechanical equipment and some local labour with hand tool methods will be used to construct the sub-project works.

Powered mechanical equipment can generate significant noise and vibration.

The cumulative effects from several machines can be significant. Noise and vibration from the construction of the towers would not be a major consideration as there are no schools or hospitals present near the construction site.

Plant parts such as stems, leaves, branches, wood, etc. absorb sound. Rough bark and thick, fleshy leaves are particularly effective at absorbing sound with their dynamic surface area for absorbing sound.

Only PUC vehicle will be used for the transportation of materials and equipment.

Construction activities shall be allowed only during day time.

Machinery used for construction will be of high standard reputed make and will adhere to International standards. These standards itself take care of noise pollution control / vibration control and air emission control.

Lubrication is/will be carried-out periodically for rotation machinery.

Use of well-maintained construction equipment as well as vehicles used for transportation.

Vibration control damped tools shall be used and the number of hours that a worker uses them must be limited.

D. G. Set is/shall be provided with acoustic enclosures and is/shall be used only in case of power failure/emergency.

Provision of PPEs like earmuffs/earplug to avoid adverse effects of noise on occupational health and hearing capacity of workers as well as planning of working hours and shift of workers.

Greenbelt of 6325 m2 is already







140


developed and additional 3800 m2 Green belt will be developed.

4.2.5 Land Use/ Land Cover

Table 4.9: Impact on Land Use/Land Cover and Mitigation Measures


Civil Construction


No major impact as the proposed expansion will be take place in existing premises only.

Green belt development will lead to permanent change in land cover pattern at the site as a direct impact.

Greenbelt area will be developed which will result in beneficial impacts on land cover of the project area.

4.2.6 Hydrogeology

Table 4.10: Impact on Hydrogeology and Mitigation Measures


Construction Activity

Decrease the ground water level due to water consumption.

Water will be sourced by own bore well. Industry has already obtained from the CGWA for withdrawal of ground water.

Rain water harvesting will be carried out for the water conservation and ground water recharge.

4.2.7 Geology

Table 4.11: Impact on Geology and Mitigation Measures


No impact is envisaged on the geology of the area due to construction activities.

4.2.8 Hazardous/ Solid Waste

Table 4.12: Impact of Hazardous/Solid Waste and Mitigation Measures



The excavated earth material if stacked loosely may result into runoff resulting in loss of top soil.

Due to construction activity construction waste will be generated may cause negative impact, if not disposed properly.

As the proposed project is an expansion project, No major excavation will be carried out.

Excavated earth shall be stored in stockpiles and covered with plastic/tarpaulin sheets or stored in closed room and reused for landscape development along the corridor.

Fuel leakage/spillage shall be mitigated by providing properly lined storage area.

Transportation and Disposal of Construction Debris





141


material Fuel leakage/ spillage used for construction equipment or vehicles may cause land contamination.

The solid wastes generated from the domestic activities of construction workforce and sewage generation may cause land contamination.

The construction wastes shall be utilized for leveling work etc.

Care shall also be taken that stagnant pools are not formed at the site during the construction phase.

Separate bins is/will be provided storing Garbage/wastes and is/will be disposed off adequately.

Proper sanitation and drinking water facilities shall be provided for construction workers.

Sewage generated will be disposed properly through existing soak pit to avoid any adverse impacts on land.



4.2.9 Risk and Hazard

Table 4.13: Impact of Risk and Hazards and Mitigation Measures



Chances of accident may increase due to proposed construction activity.

All the activities will be carried out under the supervision and control of the management.

The Vehicles must be maintained in good repairs and checked thoroughly at least once a week by the competent person authorized by the Management.

Safety equipment such as helmet, goggles, ear plug, etc., shall be provided.

Civil Construction Activities and disposal of construction debris


4.2.10 Ecology and Biodiversity

Table 4.14: Impact on Ecology and Biodiversity and Mitigation Measures



Transportation of Construction material by the trucks/dumper will disturb the movement of animal and birds.

Fugitive emission from vehicle movement will form a layer in leaves thus reducing the gaseous exchange process. This ultimately affects the growth of plants.

Sewage discharge from the proposed activity can contaminate the soil and

Transportation of products and raw material should be minimize in the morning and evening and cannot be done in night.

During the site visit, it was observed that there is no forest land, or ecologically sensitive area near the project site. Hence impact on the same is not envisaged.

The proposed activities do not envisage destruction of habitat and feeding or breeding area of faunal species. Further, development of

Disposal of construction debris

Waste water and sewage disposal

Green belt Development




142

ultimately effect the growth of plants.

Greenbelt development may cause positive impacts on the flora by enhancement of green spaces

Generation of habitats for avifauna i.e. positive impact.

plantation will provide habitat, food and breeding areas for small animals and insects. Thus a positive impact is envisaged.

Sewage will be disposed off through soak pit/septic tank.

No rare or endangered species of fauna are reported to exist in the area. Thus, no impacts on rare/endangered species are envisaged due to normal operations.

Greenbelt of 6325 m2 is already developed and additional 3800 m2 Green belt will be developed.

Regular watering and maintenance of the greenbelt for sustained plant growth.

4.2.11 Socio-Economic

Table 4.15: Impact on Socio-Economic and Mitigation Measures



The construction phase will generate employment opportunity of in the skilled as well as unskilled categories. Although the workforce requirement will be temporary in nature, it will be met from the local populace hence there will be positive impact.

Construction workers will require essential basic infrastructure facilities viz. safe drinking water, adequate sanitation, etc. will have temporary impact on the existing facilities.

The contractor will provide all existing facilities to the workers to reduce the impact on the existing facilities in the study area.

Local businessmen will get opportunity to supply construction materials.

Demands generated from the employees working at site for basic facilities will increase the local business activity of the area. During the construction phase approximate 25-30 Nos. of workers will be required.

Any development, either temporary or permanent will support the family of many villagers. Thus, positive impacts are envisaged on socio-economic environment.




143

Table 4.16: Environmental Impact Assessment Matrix with Mitigation Measures

(Construction Phase)

Activities


Total

Air

Wa

ter

So

il

No

ise

LU

/LC

Hy

dro

ge

olo

gy

Ge

olo

gy

SH

W

Ris

k

Ha

za

rdo

us

Ec

olo

gy

&

Bio

div

ers

ity

So

cio

Ec

on

om

ic


-2 - -2 -6 - - - -2 -4 -2 - -18


material

-2 - -2 -4 - - - -2 -4 - - -14


-2 -4 -3 -3 -2 -3 - -2 -4 - - -23

Disposal of Construction

Debris

-3 -6 - - - - - -2 -4 -2 - -17


-1 -6 -4 - - - - -6 - -4 - -21


+9 - +6 +9 +6 - - - - +9 - +39


- -4 - - - - - -2 - - +12 +6

Total -1 -20 -5 -4 +4 -3 - -16 -16 1 +12 -48

Total Cumulative Score for various Environmental Parameters with mitigation measures is -48

which is not appreciable adverse impact during construction phase.

4.3 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION DURING OPERATION PHASE

Probable impacts on various sectors of environment during operation and operation phase are

given in Table-4.17

Table 4.17: Impact Identification Matrix (Operation Phase)

Activities


Air

Wa

ter

So

il

No

ise

LU

/LC

Hyd

ro

ge

olo

gy

Ge

olo

gy

SH

W

Ris

k

Haza

rdo

us

Ec

olo

gy

an

d

Bio

div

ers

ity

So

cio

Ec

on

om

ic

Transportation (Materials Supply &

product)

✔ - ✔ ✔ - - - - ✔ ✔ -

Raw material and product Handling and

Storage

✔ - ✔ ✔ - - - ✔ ✔ - -

Product Manufacturing ✔ ✔ - ✔ - - - ✔ ✔ - -




144

Gaseous emission ✔ - - - - - - - ✔ ✔ -

Effluent Discharge ✔ ✔ ✔ - - ✔ - - ✔ ✔ -

Solid/Hazardous Waste generation

✔ - ✔ - - - - ✔ ✔ ✔ -

Recruitment - ✔ - - - - - ✔ - - ✔

Greenbelt development

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ - ✔ - - - ✔ ✔

Table 4.18: Environmental Impact Matrix Without Mitigation Measures (During

Operation Phase)

Activities


Total

Air

Wa

ter

So

il

No

ise

LU

/LC

Hy

dro

ge

olo

gy

Ge

olo

gy

SH

W

Ris

k

Haza

rdo

us

Ec

olo

gy

an

d

Bio

div

ers

ity

So

cio

Ec

on

om

ic


product)

-8 - -4 -8 - - - - -9 -6 - -35


Storage

-4 - -4 -6 - - - -4 -6 - - -24

Product Manufacturing -9 -8 - -6 - - - -8 -8 - - -39

Gaseous emission -9 - - - - - - - -8 -8 - -25

Effluent Discharge -6 -9 -6 - - -6 - - -6 -6 - -39


-4 - -4 - - - - -8 -4 -4 - -24

Recruitment - -6 - - - - - -4 - - +12 +2


+6 -4 +4 +6 - +2 - - - +6 +4 +24

Total -34 -27 -14 -14 0 -4 0 -24 -41 -18 16 -160


MEASURES DURING OPERATION PHASE


4.4.1.1 Emissions from transportation of vehicles

The sources likely to be affecting the pollutant concentrations in project area would be vehicular

emission due to transportation in proposed project.

Additional Raw Material Consumption – 2571.12 TPM

Additional Production – 932 TPM

Total transportation Material – 3503.12 TPM

Capacity of Truck – 20 T

Total nos. of truck per Month – 175.156 ~ 175 nos./Month




145

Total nos. of truck per Day – 5.8 ~ 6 Truck/Day ~ 12 Trips/Day

Frequency of trucks deployed/h – 0.5

Increase in PCU/h – 0.5 x 3 = 1.5

No of additional people employed for expansion - 50

Cars – 10 No. = 20 Trips/day =20*1 PCU/day = 20/24 PCU/h =0.8~1 PCU/h

Two Wheelers – 35 No.= 70 Trips/day= 70*0.5 PCU/Day= 35/24=1.45 PCU/h

Total PCU/h = 1.5 + 1 + 1.45 = 3.95 ~4 PCU/h

Modified Traffic Scenario and LOS

Road Increased

PCUs V (Volume in

PCU/h) C (Capacity in

PCU/h) New V/C

Ratio LOS

NH-48 5*80%= 4 1701+4=1705 3000 0.56 C

SH-185 5*20%= 1 803+1=804 1250 0.64 C

Existing road traffic at the proposed project site is mentioned in Section No. 3.8 of Chapter – 3.

The LOS value from the expansion project will be the almost same as before i.e. “C” “Good” for

the National highway and State Highway falling in the study area. So, the additional load on the

carrying capacity of the concern roads is not likely to have any significant adverse effect.

4.4.1.2 Air Quality Index

The Minister for Environment, Forests and Climate Change Shri Prakash Javadekar launched The

National Air Quality Index (AQI) in New Delhi on 17 September 2014 under the Swachh Bharat

Abhiyan. It is outlined as „One Number- One Colour-One Description‟ for the common man to

judge the air quality within his vicinity. The index constitutes part of the Government‟s mission to

introduce the culture of cleanliness.

Air Quality Index (AQI) is one such tool for effective dissemination of air quality information to

people. As such an Expert Group comprising medical professionals, air quality experts, academia,

advocacy groups, and SPCBs was constituted and a technical study was awarded to IIT Kanpur.

IIT Kanpur and the Expert Group recommended an AQI scheme in 2014.

There are six AQI categories, namely Good, Satisfactory, Moderately polluted, Poor, Very Poor,

and Severe. The proposed AQI will consider eight pollutants (PM10, PM2.5, NO2, SO2, CO, O3,

NH3, and Pb) for which short-term (up to 24-hourly averaging period) National Ambient Air Quality

Standards are prescribed. Based on the measured ambient concentrations, corresponding

standards and likely health impact, a sub-index is calculated for each of these pollutants. The

worst sub-index reflects overall AQI.

AQI to be calculated by using the pollutant concentration data, the following table, and the

following equation (linear interpolation):

Where,

Ip = the index for pollutant p

Cp = the rounded concentration of pollutant p

BPHi = the breakpoint that is greater than or equal to Cp




146

BPLo = the breakpoint that is less than or equal to Cp

BPHi = the breakpoint that is greater than or equal to Cp

IHi = the AQI value corresponding to BPHi

ILo = the AQI value corresponding to BPLo

AQI is divided into six categories.

Air Quality index (AQI) values

Levels of health concern

Description Color

0 – 50 Good Minimal Impact Dark Green

51 - 100 Satisfactory Minor breathing discomfort to sensitive people

Light Green

101 – 150 Moderate

Breathing discomfort to the people with Lung, heart disease, children and other adults.

Lemon Yellow

151- 200 Poor Breathing discomfort to people on prolonged exposure

Yellow

201 – 300 Very Poor Respiratory illness to the people on prolonged exposure

Red

301 - 500 Severe Respiratory effects even on healthy people.

Brown

Source: Central Pollution control board series CUPS/8z/2014-15

S. No.

Locations SUB INDEX AQI

PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NOx CO

1. Project site 80 71 20 27 30 80

2. Gundlav 71 62 14 20 24 71

3. Chanvai 70 62 13 20 21 70

4. Vashiyar 76 69 15 22 27 76

5. Magod 75 66 15 21 25 75

6. Valsad 72 63 14 22 21 72

7. Kajan Ranchhod

72 65 14 21 20 72

8. Muli 73 66 14 20 21 73

AQI of 8 locations is recorded satisfactory in study area. The AQI for all 5 parameters has been

calculated for running 8-h averages. It can be seen that for pollutants air quality is

good/satisfactory.

From the above representative table of air quality index for 10 Km radius of project site,

responsible parameter for pollution is PM10. Maximum AQI and responsible parameter for

pollution are recorded in project area are PM10 and PM2.5 with satisfactory pollution.

4.4.1.3 Air Quality Modelling

A number of sources from proposed project can cause potential impacts on Air environment during

operation phase are discussed as below:

Operational Phase

Impacts on ambient air, during operation phase, would be;




147

1. Flue gas emission due to operation of proposed NG/FO fired 3 TPH boiler, FO/NG fired 6

lakhs k cal/h capacity of thermopack & NG/LDO fired 6 lakhs k cal/h capacity of hot air

generator.

2. Process gas emission due to proposed spin flash dryer having a capacity of 100 kg/h.

Air Quality Modeling – Point Source

The flue gas stacks and process vent are considered as point source to predict impact on ambient

air quality during operational phase. The prediction has been done by using AERMOD View model.

Methodology

The methodology for Air Quality Modeling using AERMOD View model is given in Figure 4.2.

Meteorological Parameters

Surface meteorological data at project site was collected for Dec-18 to Feb-19. The hourly

meteorological data considered during this period were:

Wind speed;

Wind direction;

Ambient atmospheric temperature;

Cloud cover;

Relative humidity.

Following parameters were considered for dispersion modeling – Point source

Quantity of fuel;

Emission rate of pollutants;

Stack/Vent:

o Internal diameter at top of stack;

o Height of stack;

o Exit gas velocity;

o Exit gas temperature.




148

Figure 4.2 Methodology for AQM

Source of Emission

Point Source:

1. Flue gas emission due to proposed

a. NG/FO fired 3 TPH steam boiler;

b. FO/NG fired 6 lakhs k cal/h capacity of thermopack &

c. NG/LDO fired 6 lakhs k cal/h capacity of hot air generator.

2. Process gas emission due to proposed

a. Spin flash dryer having a capacity of 100 kg/h.

The stack details along with emission rate of Pollutants are given in Table 4.19 & Table 4.20




149

Table 4.19: Detail of Stack & Emission Rate

Stack

No.

Stack

Attached to Capacity

Height

(m)

Diameter

(m)

Gas Exit

Velocity,

(m/s)

Gas

Exit

Temp, oK

Fuel*

Fuel

Consumption

(Kg/h)

APCM

PM10

Emitted

(gm/sec)

SO2

Emitted

(gm/sec)

NOx

Emitted

(gm/sec)

1 Steam Boiler 3.5 TPH 15 0.9 5.0 398 Coal 510

MDC

and

Bag

filter

0.1 0.05 0.21

2 Thermopack 6 lakhs k

cal/h 15 0.4 4.9 408 FO 130 - 0.04 0.10 0.04

3 Hot Air

Generator

6 lakhs k

cal/h 11 0.2 3.2 393 LDO 43 - 0.01 0.03 0.01

*Assumed worst case scenario for fuel consumption: Coal in steam boiler, FO in thermopack, LDO in hot air generator.

Table 4.20: Detail of Vent & Emission Rate

Vent

No. Vent Attached to

Height

(m) Diameter(m)

Gas Exit

Velocity,

(m/s)

Gas

Exit

Temp, oK

Pollutant Permissible limit

(mg/Nm3) APCM

Emission

(gm/sec)

1 Spin Flash Dryer 11 0.2 3.8 318 PM 150 Cyclone Separator

followed by Bag filter 0.0005




150

Assumptions

The dispersion modeling assumptions considered are as follows:

The emission rate for PM10 & SO2 was calculated based on the Specification of fuel as well as

the NOx was calculated based on GPCB permissible standards in flue gas stacks.

The emission rate of PM was calculated based on permissible standards for process emission

through vent.

The terrain of the study area was considered as flat.

Stability class was evaluated based on solar insulation and cloud cover.

The mathematical equations used for the dispersion modelling assumes that the earth surface

acts as a perfect reflector of plume and physic-chemical processes such as dry and wet

deposition and chemical transformation of pollutants are negligible.

Isopleths & Results

The maximum 24 hourly average GLC‟s of PM10, SO2 & NOx due to flue gas stacks & vent (Point

source) is summarized in Table 4.21.

Table 4.21: Summary of Point Source Modeling

Pollutant Concentration (µg/m3) Distance (m) Direction

PM10 3.47 100 W

SO2 4.78 100 SSW

NOx 5.74 100 W




151

Figure 4.3 Wind rose for December 2018 to February 2019




152

Figure 4.4: Isopleth for PM10 from flue gas stacks – Point Source




153

Figure 4.5: Isopleth for SO2 from flue gas stacks – Point Source




154

Figure 4.6: Isopleth for NOx from flue gas stacks – Point Source




155

Prediction of Incremental GLC of Pollutants on Air Environment

Results

The incremental increase in GLC of PM10, SO2 & NOx due to flue gas stacks & process vent (Point

Source) presented in Table 4.22.

Table 4.22: Resultant Concentration Value

S. No. Location Background

Conc. (g/m3)

Incremental

Conc. (g/m3)

Resultant

Conc. (g/m3)

A. PM µg/m3 (Permissible Limit :100 µg/m3)

1. Project site 87 1.14 88.14

2. Gundlav 77.2 0.09 77.29

3. Chanvai 75.2 0.17 75.37

4. Vashiyar 84.7 0.50 85.2

5. Magod 82.2 0.30 82.5

6. Valsad 77.4 0.05 77.45

7. Kajan Ranchhod 78.9 0.04 78.94

8. Muli 82.4 0.22 82.62

B. SO2 µg/m3 (Permissible Limit :80 µg/m3)

1. Project site 17.7 1.83 19.53

2. Gundlav 12.7 0.15 12.85

3. Chanvai 12.3 0.30 12.6

4. Vashiyar 14.6 0.40 15

5. Magod 14.1 0.39 14.49

6. Valsad 13.3 0.06 13.36

7. Kajan Ranchhod 12.9 0.07 12.97

8. Muli 13.5 0.43 13.93

C. NOX µg/m3 (Permissible Limit :80 µg/m3)

1. Project site 23.4 1.70 25.1

2. Gundlav 17.6 0.12 17.72

3. Chanvai 17.9 0.24 18.14

4. Vashiyar 19.4 0.82 20.22

5. Magod 19.2 0.50 19.7

6. Valsad 18.8 0.08 18.88

7. Kajan Ranchhod 18.6 0.06 18.66

8. Muli 18.6 0.29 18.89

Conclusion

The concentration limit for PM10, SO2 and NOx in the ambient air, as specified by CPCB is 100 µg/m3,

80 µg/m3 & 80 µg/m3 hence, the predicted impact level due to the proposed project is within the

prescribed limits of CPCB for the ambient air quality. Consequently, ambient air quality due to

proposed activities is not expected to cause an effect on vegetation and human settlements in the

vicinity of the operational sites.




156

Table 4.23: Impact on Air Environment and Mitigation Measures


Transportation

(Materials

Supply &

product)

During movement of loaded

vehicles on the roads, fine

dust settled on the roads get

airborne and remains

suspended for a long time.

Repetitive movement of

vehicles throughout the day

leads to substantial fugitive

emissions. It can have

pronounced effect on people‟s

health and wellbeing.

Generation of Particulate

Matter, which can affect

human health as PM affect the

lung and respiratory system.

Pollutants as PM, SOX, NOX

make the adverse impact on

health of human being and

deteriorate the diversity of

ecosystem.

Effluent generation from

process contains odorous

compound. It may create

nuisance to people.

Positive impact of Green belt

as it plays an important role in

cleaning the atmosphere by

absorbing certain toxic air

pollutants from its

surroundings.

Trucks used for transportation of raw

material and products is/shall be closed/

covered with tarpaulin sheet to avoid dust

dispersion at site.

Although all the roads in the plant and

connected roads for transportation are

paved roads, during the movement of

trucks, fugitive emissions is/will be

minimized by water sprinkling on roads

and regular vehicular maintenance.

Only PUC vehicle is/will be used for the

transportation.

Adequate height of stack is/will be

provided to D.G. set. D.G. set is/will be

operated in case of power failure only.

To reduce PM emission Cyclone separator

and bag filter is/will be installed.

The final gaseous emissions would be well

within the permissible limits as prescribed

by GSPCB/CPCB/MoEF&CC.

Usage of respiratory protective equipment

by all employees is/shall be ensured.

From air modeling study, it has proved that

the air emission from the proposed

expansion will not be increased in

significant manner.

The industry has already developed 6325

m2 greenbelt and after proposed

expansion Industry will develop additional

3800 m2 and will maintain well along the

periphery of the proposed site.

It shall greatly serve as an efficient barrier

for prevention of air pollution and odour

outside the plant premises.

While making choice of plant species for

green belts, weightage has to be given to

the natural factor of bio-climate.

Raw material

and product

Handling and

Storage

Gaseous

emission

Product

Manufacturing

Effluent

Discharge

Solid and

Hazardous

waste generation

Greenbelt

development




157


Table 4.24: Impact on Water Environment and Mitigation Measures

Project Activity

Impact Mitigation Measures

Product

Manufacturing

Decrease the ground

water level due to

consumption of water

during various

activities in the

industry.

The major quantity of

liquid waste that would

be generated in the

normal day to day

operations at the

proposed project

includes sewage,

washing, run off from

domestic activities,

etc. This wastewater

together with sewage

has a potential to

pollute river water if

disposed untreated.

Ground Water

depletion due to

consumption of water

for employees and

green belt

development.

The Industry has already obtained permission to

CGWA for ground water withdrawal.

Moreover, Valsad district falls under safe zone of

CGWA and ground water is easily available, hence

no major impact has been identified on groundwater.

There will be insignificant impact on the ground water

table. However, it will be balanced by recharging

ground water during the monsoon season.

Total Industrial waste water generation will be

218.015 KLD. 10.55 KLD high TDS water will be

directly sent to MEE. Balance 207.465 KLD water will

be treated in primary, secondary and tertiary

treatment plant. Treated water will be taken to

Reverse Osmosis. 173 KLD RO permeate will be

recycled in the process. Balance 30 KLD of RO

rejected is taken to MEE. 34.5 KLD of MEE

condensate is recycled in the process. Thus there is

no discharge of industrial effluent on land.

Domestic waste water (2.0 KLD) will be disposed off

through septic tank to ETP. Online monitoring system

will be provided.

Drinking water is/will be provided to the employees.

Industry is/will be doing Rain Water Harvesting which

recharges ground water every year.

However green belt will help to seepage water to the

ground.

Effluent

/sewage

Generation

Greenbelt

development

Recruitment

4.4.3 Soil Environment

Table 4.25: Impact on Soil Environment and Mitigation Measures


Transportation

(Materials

Supply &

product)

The soil

contamination due

to leakage/

spillage of

material during

handling of

materials or

contaminated

As mentioned earlier, the project has proposed a very

good wastewater management facility with proper

disposal facility. Hence, the issue of contamination of

soil due to wastewater is also not envisaged.

Solid/hazardous waste generated from the process,

shall be properly handled with adequate

solid/hazardous waste management facilities.

Proper storage area will be proposed with lining to avoid

Raw material

and product

Handling and

Storage




158

Effluent

/Sewage

generation

water or

hazardous waste.

Leachate from the

process waste

water collection

tank may

contaminate the

soil and create

odour nuisance.

The greenbelt will

significantly help

to protect the soil

from erosion and

contamination.

leakage. Closed container collection, storage and

transportation of all hazardous wastes within the plant

and outside.

Care shall be undertaken to avoid spillage/leakage of

fuel. Proper spill control measures will be done.

Regular road sweeping will be done for recovery of dust

from the spilled areas within the plant boundary.

Regular monitoring will be done as per monitoring plan

mentioned in chapter 6.

The company has already developed 6325 m2 area of

greenbelt. After proposed expansion further 3800 m2 of

greenbelt will be developed along the periphery of the

proposed site and in common premises available

outside the company premises.

Solid/Hazardous

Waste

generation

Greenbelt

development


Table 4.26: Impact on Noise Environment and Mitigation Measures


Transportation

(Materials

Supply &

product

Noise generation during

transportation of

materials/ products,

operation of Utilities such

as boiler, Thermopack,

D.G. set may leads

Occupational health

issues associated with

high noise level such as

Decreases the efficiency

of a man, Lack of

concentration.

Continuous exposure in

high noise may causes

Temporary or permanent

Deafness.

Greenbelt will be greatly

served as an efficient

barrier for prevention of

noise propagation

outside the plant

premises.

PUC certified vehicles is/will be used.

Noise anticipated from the proposed project shall

be confined only within the plant boundary and

more precisely within the source area.

All the equipment/machineries operated in the

proposed project shall be designed/operated in

such a way that the noise level in work place shall

not exceed 75 dB (A) as per the requirement of

Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules,

2000.

Periodical noise monitoring is/shall be carried out

to ensure that ambient noise levels are restricted to

permissible limits.

Provision of PPEs like earmuffs/earplug to avoid

adverse effects of noise on occupational health

and hearing capacity of workers as well as

planning of working hours and shift of workers.

D. G. Set is/will be provided with acoustic

enclosures and shall be used only in case of power

failure/emergency.

The company has already developed 6325 m2 area

of greenbelt. After proposed expansion further

3800 m2 of greenbelt will be developed along the

periphery of the proposed site and in common

premises available outside the company premises.

Product

Manufacturing

Raw material

and product

Handling and

Storage

Greenbelt

development




159

4.4.5 Land Use/ Land Cover


There will be no impact on land use/ land cover pattern due to green belt development during

operation phase.

4.4.6 Hydrogeology


Effluent/

Sewage

generation

Infiltration of untreated

effluent can contaminate

the ground water.

Tree roots improve

drainage because each

root acts as an

underground water

channel to help water

penetrate the soil.

Care shall be undertaken to avoid

spillage/leakage of Effluent/sewage. Proper

spill control measures is/will be done.

Selection of trees should be as per guidelines

prescribed by CPCB/MoEFCC. Green Belt

Development

4.4.7 Geology


The expansion will be done in existing plant premises only. Hence no major impact is

envisaged on geology due to proposed expansion.

4.4.8 Hazardous/Solid Waste

Table 4.27: Impact and Mitigation Measures on Hazardous/Solid Waste


Raw material

and product

Handling and

Storage

Improper

handling and

disposal of

hazardous/ solid

wastes generated

from

manufacturing

process, Utility

area will cause ill

health of the

workers.

All the solid/hazardous waste generated shall be stored

in Hazardous Waste Storage Facility having impervious

layer.

PPEs will be provided to the workers. Hence there will

be no significant impacts on their health.

Used oil will be taken to common incineration system of

BEIL, Ankleshwar / sold to authorized recyclers.

Discarded containers/bags will be reused for packing of

solid waste or sold to registered recyclers.

ETP waste and MEE waste will be disposed off into

TSDF site of BEIL, Ankleshwar or VGEL, Vapi.

Dust from air filtration system will be recycled in

process.

Salt from process will be disposed off into TSDF site of

BEIL, Ankleshwar or VGEL, Vapi.

1787.44 MTPA of mix solvent from solvent process and

aqua process will be utilized for manufacture of Ethyl

chloride product within the premises and balance 61.9

Product

Manufacturing

Solid/Hazardous

Waste

generation

Recruitment




160


MTPA of mixed solvent will be sold to actual distillatory.

Distillation Residue / & Laboratory organic waste, Spent

carbon from ETP & Chimney, Date-Expired, Discarded

and off-specification Material & floor sweeping, Spent

Filter cloth & filter material Collection, storage

transportation, disposal to BEIL incineration facility.

Spent Resins from D M plant, used hot & cold insulation

material will be taken to Collection, storage

transportation, disposal at TSDF/BEIL.

Weak caustic soln. (18-20%) will be sold to

actual/authorized users.

Fly ash will be sold to Brick manufacturer.

4.4.9 Risk and Hazard

Table 4.28: Impact and Mitigation Measures on Risk and Hazards


Transportation

(Materials

Supply)

Raw material

and product

Handling and

Storage

Product

Manufacturing

Effluent/Sewage

Discharge

Solid/Hazardous

Waste

generation

Chances of accident

may increase due to

transportation

activity.

Spillages/ leakages,

discharge of

chemicals

Stack emission,

wastewater and

solid wastes, from

process operations

will cause ill health

of the workers.

Loading and unloading equipment inspected and

maintained regularly.

External and internal visual inspections, leakage and

pressure tests are conducted.

Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) of all raw

materials and products will be readily available to all.

The training for awareness of MSDS will be provided.

Adequate ventilator is provided on top of roof.

Adequate height of stack and APC is/will be provided

for gaseous emission control.

Fire extinguishers and fire hydrant systems will be

provided at designated places.

In the proposed project, wide road shall be provided

for smooth movement of the goods vehicles.

PPEs will be provided to the workers. Hence there will

be no significant impacts on their health.

Risk assessment and DMP is already prepared for

existing plan and same will be modified for proposed

expansion.

Persons working in the site will be provided with

appropriate training, equipment and the information

necessary to ensure their safety for handling of

hazardous waste.

Gaseous

emission

4.4.10 Ecological and Biodiversity




161

Table 4.29: Impact and Mitigation Measures on Ecology and Biodiversity


Transportation

(Materials

Supply)

Effluent/Sewage

generation

Solid/Hazardous

Waste

generation

Greenbelt

development

Settling of fugitive dust on

leaves reduces the

gaseous exchange

process. This affects the

growth of plants.

Chance of vehicle

collisions with domestic

animal attempting to cross

the road.

The attributes that are

identified to describe

ecology are animals,

birds, fish, field crops,

threatened species,

natural vegetation etc.

Plants and crop will not

survive due to discharge of

untreated effluent/sewage.

The study area does not

have any identified Forest,

National Park, Sanctuaries

and hence there is no any

adverse impact on the

same.

Positive impact of green

belt on Ecology and

biodiversity, air quality as a

dust barrier, soil fertility

and noise barrier.

Proposed expansion will be carried out

within the premises on the open land area

and also not forms a part of any unique

habitat, so there is no threat of habitat

fragmentation.

All the faunal species reported from the core

zone are very common and well adapted to

the urban environment so no faunal species

will be disturbed or affected significantly.

As per the survey close to the proposed site

and in the vicinity, no endangered species or

wildlife is reported at project site. As

mentioned earlier, the proposed project

would not dispose sewage, effluent or solid

waste in the existing environment. In

addition to the wastes, noise generation from

project operation would also be minor.

Hence there will not be any major adverse

impact on ecology.

The emission from the proposed project

would not be significant to cause any

damage to the habitual area as all necessary

and efficient modern air pollution control

technologies are already planned to prevent

impacts on air environment and on the

ecology of the nearby area.

The proposed site is already covered with

vegetation and additional, greenbelt area will

be developed which will result in beneficial

impacts on ecological layout of the project

area.

Gaseous

emission

4.4.11 Socio-Economic

Table 4.30: Impact and Mitigation Measures on Socio-Economic


Recruitment Transportation for raw

material and product may

create additional traffic

and cause inconvenience

to the local people.

Emission of gaseous

pollutant may affect the

Traffic study has been carried out for the

existing and proposed project scenario. The

LOS value from the expansion project will be

the almost same as before i.e. “C” “Good” for

the National highway and State Highway falling

in the study area. So, the additional load on the

carrying capacity of the concern road is not

Greenbelt

development




162

health of the people living

surrounding of the project

site and employees.

During operation phase,

additional manpower will

be required and this

requirement will meet from

surrounding area. Hence,

positive impact will be on

Socio economic

environment.

The project will also help in

generation of significant

indirect employment.

Positive impact of green

belt as a it will be act as

dust barrier, soil fertility

and noise barrier

It will enhance the

aesthetic value and

beautify the landscapes.

likely to have any significant adverse effect.

The emission from the proposed project would

not be significant to cause any damage to the

people as all necessary and efficient modern air

pollution control technologies are already

planned to prevent impacts on people of the

nearby area. The final gaseous emissions will

be well within the permissible limits prescribed

by GSPCB/CPCB/MoEF&CC.

The requirements of skilled/unskilled

manpower during operation will be met from

nearby villages as far as possible as per their

skills and qualification.

Presently there are 110 numbers of

employees. There will be additional 50

numbers of employees, thus total 160 numbers

of employees after proposed expansion.

The budget for CER approx. Rs. 15.3 lakhs i.e

1 % of project cost should be allotted for

development of locals and surrounding

villages. This will be a positive socio-economic

development for the region and general

upliftment of standard of living in the region.

The company has already developed

Greenbelt of 6325 m2 and additional 3800 m2

Green belt will be developed. Green belt will be

developed along the periphery of the proposed

site and in common premises available outside

the company premises.

Table 4.31: Environmental Impact Assessment Matrix with Mitigation Measures (Operation Phase)

Activities


Total

Air

Wa

ter

So

il

No

ise

LU

/LC

Hyd

ro

ge

olo

gy

Ge

olo

gy

SH

W

Ris

k

Haza

rdo

us

Ec

olo

gy

an

d

Bio

div

ers

ity

So

cio

Ec

on

om

ic


product)

-6 - -2 -4 - - - - -6 -4 - -22


Storage

-2 - -2 -4 - - - -4 -6 - - -18

Product Manufacturing

-6 -6 - -4 - - - -6 -6 - - -28




163

Gaseous emission -4 - - - - - - - -6 -6 - -16

Effluent Discharge -4 -4 -4 - - -4 - - -4 -4 - -24


-2 - -2 - - - - -6 -2 -2 - -14

Recruitment - -4 - - - - - -2 - - +16 +10


+8 -2 +6 +8 - +4 - - - +9 +8 +41

Total -16 -16 -4 -4 0 0 0 -18 -30 -7 24 -71

Highest total score (+41) received for Green belt development as it supports directly and indirectly for

mitigating various pollution. Total Cumulative Score for various Environmental Parameters with

mitigation measure is -71; which is not appreciable adverse impacts during operation phase.

4.5 SUMMARY

The proposed project has no major adverse impact on surrounding environment. During the

movement of trucks, fugitive emissions will be minimized by water sprinkling on roads and regular

vehicular maintenance. Trucks used for transportation is/will be closed/ covered with tarpaulin sheet

to avoid dust dispersion at site. Only PUC vehicle will be used for the transportation. The emission

from the proposed project would not be significant to cause any damage to the people as all

necessary and efficient modern air pollution control technologies are already planned to prevent

impacts on people of the nearby area. The final gaseous emissions will be well within the permissible

limits prescribed by GSPCB/CPCB/MoEF&CC. Unit will be provided with separate entry and exit for

the smooth traffic movement. The electricity will be supplied by DGVCL and hence D. G. set will be

used only in case of power failure. Effluent is/will be treated in existing ETP and additional effluent will

be evaporated in RO & MEE. Proper sanitation facilities shall be provided within the premises to

prevent contamination of water due to runoff. Solid/hazardous waste generated from the process and

ETP is/will be properly handled with adequate solid/hazardous waste management facilities. All the

solid/hazardous waste generated shall be packed in HDPE bags and stored in Hazardous Waste

Storage Facility having impervious layer. The collection, storage and disposal of solid/hazardous

waste shall be carried out as per Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary

Movement) Rules, 2016. The adequate greenbelt developed with additional greenbelt development in

and around the plant shall greatly serve as an efficient barrier for prevention of air outside the plant

premises.

----------------------------------




164

CHAPTER 5 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY AND SITE)

5.0 GENERAL

This chapter gives us information on alternative site and technology to be used for proposed

expansion.

5.1 ALTERNATIVE FOR TECHNOLOGY AND OTHER PARAMETER

No alternative site selection study has been conducted by project proponent as this is an expansion

project and expansion will be done in existing industrial premises at S. No. 302/P, 303/2, 273/2,

275/1, Near Water Works, Abrama, Valsad-396001, Ta: Dist: Valsad, Gujarat. During EIA study

some alternatives for technology and other parameters were considered and are discussed below:

Table 5.1 Alternative for Technology and other Parameters

S. No.

Particular Alternative Option 1

Alternative Option 2

Remarks

1. Project Site New Site Existing Site Preferred Existing site Benefits:

The project is an expansion project thus it is already having a well-developed necessary infrastructure facilities.

Existing plot is suitable to manufacture organic chemicals and most of the infrastructure in terms of vessels and other manufacturing facilities are already available with unit.

Site Selection criteria are mentioned below.

2. Technology Manual/ Semi - automatic

Automated machineries

Preferred automated machineries. Benefits:

Noise generated will be minimal

Air pollution generated will be minimal.

3. Employment Outsource employment

Local employment

Local employment is preferred. Benefits:

Provides employment to local people along with financial benefit.

No residential building/housing is required

4. Raw material and product transportation

Public transport

Private transport

Private transport is preferred Material will be transported through trucks on the contract basis. Benefits:

It will give indirect employment to the local people.




165

5.2 SITE SECTION CRITERIA

Site selection was guided by many factors like availability of infrastructures, land, water sources, fuel,

transportation, power etc.

Specific site selection criteria consider for the project is given below:

The land for the expansion is already in the possession of project proponent as expansion to

be executed in the existing premises.

The existing project site is well connected by road to National Highway No. 48 (1.13 km).

Availability of power evacuation facilities and water for industrial use.

Majority of the raw materials are available from the nearby.

Easy availability of manpower for the expansion project.

5.3 BEST AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY

Ethyl Chloride:

Many processes are known for the manufacture of Ethyl Chloride. Currently in India Ethyl Chloride is

produced as by-product received during the manufacturing of Chloral. Chloral is widely consumed in

the manufacture of insecticides. Recently the manufacture of such insecticides is prohibited by

Government of India. This lead to non-availability of Ethyl Chloride and we are forced to manufacture

Ethyl Chloride though other route.

We have selected two processes to manufacture Ethyl chloride as continuous process.

A. In the first process conventionally Ethyl Alcohol is reacted with anhydrous hydrogen chloride

gas in presence of catalyst solution prepared from Zinc Chloride or Calcium chloride.

B. In the second process Ethyl Chloride is produced by reacting existing bi-product (mixed

solvent of Alcohol & Diethyl ether mixture) from the Ethyl Cellulose manufacturing processes

with anhydrous hydrogen chloride. This is part of backward integration.

But we have developed a process to produce Ethyl Chloride where in 30% Hydrochloric acid which

available abundantly as by-product from various industries in India is used instead of anhydrous

Hydrogen Chloride gas which is every expensive. Same way with some changes in process

conditions Ethyl Chloride manufacturing process mixed solvent as feed stock is also developed to

consume captive mixed solvent.

Advantage of new process developed:

1. Consumption of captive mixed solvent

2. Consumption of 30% Hydrochloric Acid (by - product from various industries in India)

3. No formation of any by product.

Manufacturing of Ethyl Chloride through Ethyl Alcohol:

The catalyst solution is prepared in a glass lined reactor and the temperature of catalyst solution is

raised from ambient to 130OC with help of steam or hot oil system. Ethyl Alcohol and 30%

Hydrochloric acid as per the recipe continuously fed at constant rate to the glass lined reactor while

temperature of reactor mass is maintained between 130OC and 135OC. Vapour mixture of Ethyl

Chloride, Ethanol, Water and Hydrochloric Acid is passed through a packed column. The un- reacted

Ethanol and Hydrochloric Acid are returned to the reactor with the help of reflux. The catalyst solution

will remain in the reactor only. The vapours are cooled in an overhead cooler before feeding to

Caustic scrubber. Small amount of residual Hydrochloric acid is neutralized in caustic scrubber and




166

continuously withdrawn from the bottom of the Caustic scrubber. Neutralized solution is discharged to

ETP for further treatment. The scrubbed Ethyl Chloride vapours are passed through a water scrubber

to ensure Ethyl Chloride is free from Hydrogen Chloride. Finally the pure Ethyl Chloride vapours

condensed in Chilled Brine condenser and collected in product receiver.

Manufacturing of Ethyl Chloride through Mixed Solvent (Ethyl Alcohol & Diethyl Ether):

Catalyst solution is prepared in a glass lined reactor and temperature is raised from ambient to

150OC. The mixture of Ethanol and Diethyl Ether and 30% Hydrochloric acid is continuously fed to

glass lined reactor at constant rate as per the recipe. The temperature of the reactor is maintained

between 150OC and 155OC. Vapour mixture of Ethyl Chloride, Mixed Solvent, Water and Hydrochloric

Acid is passed through a packed column. The un- reacted mixed solvent mixture and Hydrochloric

Acid are returned to the reactor with the help of internal and external reflux. The catalyst solution will

remain in the reactor only. The vapours are cooled in an overhead cooler before feeding to Caustic

scrubber. Small amount of residual Hydrochloric Acid is neutralized in caustic scrubber and

continuously withdrawn from the bottom of the Caustic scrubber and neutralized solution is

discharged to ETP for further treatment. The scrubbed Ethyl Chloride vapours are passed through a

water scrubber to ensure Ethyl Chloride free from Hydrogen Chloride. Finally the pure Ethyl Chloride

vapours condensed in Chilled Brine condenser and collected in product receiver.

Methyl Chloride

Many processes are proposed for the manufacture of Methyl Chloride. We have selected a process

to produce Methyl chloride in continuous manner. In this process Methanol is subjected to catalytic

hydro chlorination. Methyl Alcohol is reacted with 30% aqueous hydrogen chloride in presence of

catalyst solution prepared from Zinc Chloride. The process is similar to Ethyl chloride process.

Catalyst solution is prepared in a glass lined reactor and the temperature of catalyst solution is raised

from ambient to 150OC / 155OC with help of steam or hot oil system. Methanol and 30% aqueous

Hydrogen Chloride continuously mixed as per recipe and fed at constant rate to the glass lined

reactor while temperature of reactor mass is maintained between 155OC and 160OC at elevated

pressure of 5 to 6 bar. Vapour mixture of Methyl Chloride, Methanol, Water and Hydrogen Chloride

are passed through a packed column attached to the reactor. The un- reacted Methanol and

hydrochloric acid are returned to the reactor with the help of internal reflux. The catalyst solution will

remain in the reactor only. The vapours are cooled in an overhead cooler prior to feeding to Caustic

scrubber. Small amount of entrained Hydrochloric acid is neutralized in caustic scrubber and

continuously withdrawn from the Caustic scrubber and lined to ETP for further treatment. The

scrubbed Methyl Chloride vapours are fed to a water scrubber to ensure Methyl Chloride free from

impurities. Finally the pure Methyl Chloride vapours condensed in Chilled Brine condenser or

compressed to receive in liquid phase before filling in cylinders.

Hydroxy Propyl Methyl Cellulose (HPMC)

Hydroxy Propyl Methyl Cellulose also known as HPMC or Hypromellose is one of cellulose

derivatives widely used in various applications. HPMC is inert visco-elastic polymer used in

pharmaceutical and food additive applications. The manufacturing process is a batch type one and

consists of the following stages.

Preparation of alkali cellulose.

Etherification reaction

Recovery solvents




167

Purification

Drying

Blending and Packing.

Wood Pulp / Cotton linters pulp sheets are fed to a shredder machine and conveyed to reactor. 50%

Caustic solution is prepared and charged into the reactor to prepare alkali cellulose and allowed for

aging for different durations depending on final viscosity of the product.

The reactants Methyl Chloride and Propylene oxide are charged as per the formulation and the

reactor mass are heated with the help of low pressure steam. The reactor temperature is maintained

at different temperatures as for the formulation to achieve desired degree of substitution. The

operating temperature range is from 50OC to 80OC. The reaction is exothermic in nature and

temperature is controlled precisely with help of cooling water.

After completion of reaction the solvents and by-products formed during reaction are recovered from

the reactor. The reaction product is discharged into a neutch filter unit to separate salt water. The

reaction product is subjected to hot water washes to receive salt free product.

The wet cake from neutch filter is discharged into the feed hopper of spin flash dryer. Dry product

from different batches will be blended to achieve designated viscosity product in blender and packed.

5.4 SUMMARY

No alternative site was considered for the proposed expansion since the existing premises is the best

option for proposed expansion. The Project site is in a well-developed area having necessary

infrastructure facilities. A part from this, no ecologically sensitive, no National Park, Wild life

Sanctuary, Biosphere Reserve, no reserved and protected Forests are present within the study area.

Also some alternatives for technology were considered for the proposed expansion.

----------------------------------




168

CHAPTER 6 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

6.0 GENERAL

Environmental monitoring is the measurement of environmental parameters at regular intervals over

an extended period of time. Monitoring allows the assessment of environmental and biological

changes in an ecosystem. All the project activities shall be monitored to ensure that appropriate

environmental mitigation activities are being implemented and to identify areas where Environmental

Management Plan compliance is not satisfactory. Hence, Environmental quality monitoring of critical

parameter is very essential in the routine activity schedule of project operation. An Environmental

Monitoring Program shall be scheduled for the following major objectives:

To verify the result of the impact assessment study in particular with regards to new

developments.

To follow the trend of parameters which have been identified as critical.

To check or assess the efficiency of controlling measures.

To ensure that new parameters, other than those identified in the impact assessment study, do

not become critical through the commissioning of new project.

To monitor effectiveness of control measures.

Regular monitoring of environmental parameters to find out any deterioration in environmental

quality.

6.1 POST PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

Environmental Monitoring Parameters and Frequency

After the commissioning of the project, monitoring parameters and frequency for operation phase

shall be as follows:

Table 6.1: Environmental Monitoring Parameters and Frequency

S. No. Particular Parameter for Monitoring Frequency of

Monitoring

1. Air Quality

i. Ambient Air

Quality

Monitoring within

Plant premises

Near Main

Gate

PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOX, CO Monthly

Near ETP

ii. Flue gas Stack Monitoring

(Steam Boiler, D.G.set, Hot air

generator, Thermopak) and

Process gas Stack (Vent

attached to spin flash dryer)

PM, SOX , NOX Monthly

2. Water Quality

(Ground and Surface)

As per IS 10500:2012 Six monthly

3. Wastewater Quality

(ETP)

As per CPCB conditions Monthly




169

S. No. Particular Parameter for Monitoring Frequency of

Monitoring

4. Noise Quality

a. Ambient Noise

1. Near ETP

2. Near ADM building

3. Near Main Gate

4. Near Garden Area

Leq Levels for Day and Night Time Monthly

5. Soil Quality Routine Physical and chemical

parameters, Organic matter,

Moisture content, Chloride ions,

Phosphorous, Nitrates, Sulfates

and Cations (Al, Fe, Mg, Na, Ca,

K) – Min. 4 Nos.

Six monthly

6. Work Zone monitoring VOC Monthly

7. Solid/Hazardous waste

generation

Records of quantity of generation, handling, storage

and transportation (disposal) of solid and hazardous

waste will be maintained.

8. Occupational Health Checkup Pre-employment and periodical health checkup for eye

test, lung test, hearing capacity, skin test, step test etc.

of every employee at least once in six months.

9. Greenbelt Development Number of plantation (Units),

Number of Survived Plants/ Trees,

Number of Poor plant/ Trees

Once in a year

10. Environmental Audit As per Directions of Honorary High

Court, Gujarat

Once in a year

11.

Consents and Authorization Consent to operate under

applicable acts

Renewing 90

days before

expiry of validity

12. Compliance of EC conditions

Submission of 6 monthly

compliance reports

June and

December

Monitoring of the above parameters will carried out to assess the performance of pollution control

equipment installed to achieve the statutory norms. In case emissions/pollutant will found to exceed

the norms, the „on duty‟ personnel will check the relevant parameters and take appropriate corrective

actions. A record of corrective and preventive action will be maintained as per requirement.

6.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING METHODOLOGIES

Monitoring of environmental components shall be done as per the guidelines provided by MoEF&CC /

CPCB / SPCB. The following methods are recommended / standard method approved /

recommended by MoEF&CC / CPCB.

Table 6.2: Method of Environmental Sampling and Analysis

S. No.

Attributes Method

Sampling / Preservation Analysis

1. Ambient Air Quality As per IS: 5182, ASTM and As per IS: 5182 and ASTM




170

S. No.

Attributes Method

Sampling / Preservation Analysis

Instruments Manual

2.

Water and Waste Water I. Ground Water III. Treated effluent

Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater Analysis, 22nd edition APHA, 2012

IS: 3025 and Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater Analysis, 22nd edition APHA, 2012

3. Noise Instrument: Noise level meter EPA

4. Soil Quality IS: 2720 and Laboratory

Standard Methods IS: 2720 and Laboratory Standard Methods

6.3 DOCUMENTATION AND RECORDS

The environmental department in respect of operation of pollution control facility will maintain

following records:

Monthly and annual progress reports: Immediately upon the completion of monitoring as per

the planned schedule, report shall be prepared and necessary documents shall be forwarded

to the concerned person.

Instruction manual for operation and maintenance of pollution control equipment

Instruction manual for monitoring of water and gaseous parameter and hazardous waste

management

Records of medical check-up of employees

Regularly all documents and records shall be reviewed for necessary improvement of the

monitoring plan/mitigation measures/environmental technologies as well as for necessary

actions of Environmental Management Cell.

6.4 INFRASTRUCTURAL REQUIREMENT

Laboratory is already set up with manpower and basic facilities for self-monitoring of pollutants

generated in plant. The laboratory is equipped with instruments and chemicals required for monitoring

of general parameters of wastewater to fulfill the reuse criteria within plant premises. The laboratory

is fully fledged for the analysis of pH, COD, BOD, SS, TDS parameters in waste water.

6.4.1 Reporting System

The in-charge of environment, health and safety department will co-ordinate with monitoring agency

and analysis report with interpretation will be submitted regularly to the statutory authority after

obtaining approval from higher management. Any non-conformity identify will should be brought in

notice of higher management. Environmental and safety policy will be also communicated to each

employee work within plant premises.

6.5 BUDGETARY PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENT MONITORING

PROGRAM

On regular basis, environment management cell shall inspect the necessity and availability of the

materials, technologies, services, maintenance works and make appropriate budget for the purpose.

Regular record review for change in financial requirement of environment management shall be done




171

and appropriate budgetary provisions shall be made. With other budget, budget for environment

management shall be prepared and revised regularly up on requirement. The budget shall include

provisions of:

Environmental Monitoring Program

Operation and Maintenance of Environmental Technologies/Equipment

Laboratory works for Environmental management activities

Emergency Purchase of necessary material, equipment, tools, services, etc.

Table 6.3: Budgetary Provision for Environment Monitoring Program

S. No.

Description Amount in

Lakhs/ Annum

1. Air Environment 18.0

2. Water Environment 2.44

3. Noise Environment 0.36

4. Environmental Audit 1.25

Total 22.05 ~ 22

6.6 SUMMARY

The environmental monitoring plan enables environmental management system with early sign of

need for additional action and modification of ongoing actions for environment management,

improvement and conservation. The environmental monitoring locations will be decided considering

the environmental impacts likely to occur due to the operation of proposed project as the main aim of

the monitoring program is to track, timely and regularly, the change in environmental conditions and

to take timely action for protection of surrounding environment. Environmental sampling and

monitoring will be done as per the guidelines provided by MoEF&CC /CPCB /GPCB. Laboratory will

be set up with manpower and facilities for self-monitoring of pollutants generated in the industry.

Along with other budgets, budget for environmental management will be prepared and revised

regularly as per requirement.. Cost of the Environment Monitoring will be approx. Rs. 22.00

Lakhs/Annum.

----------------------------------




172

CHAPTER 7 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.0 GENERAL

An additional study including Public Consultation, Risk Assessment (RA), Disaster Management

Plan, Occupational, Health and Safety has been carried out for the proposed project. The study has

been incorporated in the EIA report to support the Environmental Management Plan.

7.1 PUBLIC HEARING

Public hearing shall be carried out as per the MoEF&CC‟s OM dated 04/04/2016. Minutes of the

same will be incorporated in the Final EIA/EMP report.

7.2 RISK ASSESSMENT

Asha Cellulose, for its expansion project expansion in manufacturing of ethyl chloride (from ethyl

alcohol), ethyl chloride (from mixed solvent of existing process), methyl chloride (from methyl

alcohol) & hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose (hpmc) within the existing plant located in Abrama,

Valsad shall handle chemicals, some of which are hazardous in nature by virtue of their intrinsic

chemical properties or their operating temperatures or pressures or a combination of them. Fire,

toxic release or combinations of them are the hazards associated with industrial plants using

hazardous chemicals. More comprehensive, systematic and sophisticated methods of Safety

Engineering, such as, Hazard Analysis and Qualitative and Quantitative Risk Assessment have

been developed to improve upon the integrity, reliability and safety of industrial plants, the same

has been discussed in detail under their respective headings.

7.2.1 Objective of the study

The principle objective of this study is to identify major risks in the manufacturing process and to

evaluate On-site & Off-site consequences of identified hazard scenarios. To give effective mitigation

of hazards in terms of suggestions for effective disaster management, suggesting minimum

preventive and protective measures & change of practices to ensure Occupational Health and

Safety.

Scope of Study

A. Hazard Identification

B. Risk Management

C. Disaster management Plan

D. Occupational Health Safety




173

7.2.2 Methodology

The steps involved in risk assessment methodology are as follows:

1. Hazard identification by studying the information on plant location, layout of the equipment &

process condition;

2. Hazard assessment by qualitative risk assessment and quantitative risk assessment.

Quantification of Hazard involves selection of most credible scenario or worst case scenario;

Estimate consequences scenarios in the plant such as fire, explosion and toxic effect;

Estimate frequency of occurrence of any incident is to be found out by reliability analysis;

3. Prioritize and Reduce Risk by providing control / mitigation measures;

4. Preparing disaster management plan to face any accident and disaster caused by the

project operations.

7.3 Risk & Hazard Study

Identification of causes and types of hazards is the primary task for planning for risk assessment.

Hazard can happen because of the nature of the chemicals handled and also the nature of process

involved.

The methods employed for hazard identification in this study are:

Identification of major hazards based on Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous

Chemicals;

Identification of hazardous units and segments of plants and units based on relative ranking

technique. Example: Fire- Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI)

Identification of major hazards based on Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals.

A systematic identification of the chemicals and their quantities of storages has been studied, to

determine threshold quantities as notified by MSIHC Rules 1989 and amended till date. There is no

any storage for flammable, Toxic and irritative nature in the Asha Cellulose Plant.

Identification of hazardous units and segments of plants and units based on relative ranking

technique. Example: Fire- Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI)

a) Toxic Chemicals:

There is no any Chemicals having the following values of acute toxicity and owing to their physical and chemical properties are capable of producing major accidents:

Table 7.1: Toxicity Index

Sr. No Toxicity Oral toxicity LD50 (mg/kg) Dermal toxicity LD50(mg/kg)

1. Extremely toxic 1-50 1-200

2. Highly toxic 51 – 500 201-2000

Hence, Plant has no any extremely/highly toxic chemicals.




174

b) Flammable Chemicals:

Flammable gases: Gases which at 20°C and at standard pressure of 101.3 kPa are:-

Ignitable when in a mixture of 13 percent or less by volume with air, or

Have a flammable range with air of at least 12 percentage points regardless of the lower

flammable limits.

Note: - The flammability shall be determined by tests or by calculation in accordance with methods

adopted by International Standards Organization ISO Number10156 of 1990 or by Bureau of Indian

Standards ISI Number 1446 of 1985.

Table 7.2: Flammable Criteria

S No Flammable Criteria Range

1. Extremely flammable liquids

flash point lower than or equal to 23°C and boiling point less than 35°C

2. Very highly flammable liquids

flash point lower than or equal to 23°C and initial boiling point higher than 35°C

3. Highly flammable liquids flash point lower than or equal to 60°C but higher than 23°C

4. Flammable liquids flash point higher than 60°C but lower than 90° C

c) Explosives:

Explosives means a solid or liquid or pyrotechnic substance (or a mixture of substances) or an

article.

Which is in itself capable by chemical reaction of producing gas at such a temperature and

pressure and at such a speed as to cause damage to the surroundings;

Which is designed to produce an effect by heat, light, sound, gas or smoke or a combination

of these as a result of non-detonative self-sustaining exothermic chemical reaction?

At Asha Cellulose, No explosive chemicals are stored.

Details of Raw Materials and Products

Details of hazardous characteristics, toxicity of raw materials and products to be handled are given

in Table 7-3.




175

Table 7.3: Physico- Chemical properties of Raw Materials


Materials

Quantity stored, MT/Month BP. 0C MP0C

Place of its Storage

State operating pressure temperature

Max Actual

1 Wood pulp 150 100 NA NA Isolated Store Atmosphere & Room

Temp.

2 Caustic flakes 125 100 NA NA Isolated Store Atmosphere & Room

Temp.

3 Ethyl Chloride 12.5 10 12 -138 Isolated Store in

tonners Atmosphere & Room

Temp.

4 Acetic acid 4 3.5 106 16 Storage Tank Atmosphere & Room

Temp.

5 Toluene 15 10 110 -95 Isolated

Storage Tank Atmosphere & Room

Temp.

6 Ethyl cellulose 40 35 NA 180 FG Store Atmosphere & Room

Temp.

7 Ethylene Dichloride 1.5 1.0 80 -35 Drums Atmosphere & Room

Temp.

8 Acetone 0.3 0.15 56 -95 Drums Atmosphere & Room

Temp.

9 Methylene Dichloride 1.0 0.75 40 -97 Drums Atmosphere & Room

Temp.

10 Sodium Lauryl Sulfate –

Powder 0.05 0.025 NA NA PP Bag


11 Cetyl Alcohol Powder 0.03 0.015 NA NA PP Bag Atmosphere & Room

Temp.

12 Plasticizer – Dibutyl

Sebacate 0.025 0.025 340 -35 Carboy


13 Oleic Acid 0.025 0.025 286 16 Carboy Atmosphere & Room

Temp.




176


Materials Quantity stored,

MT/Month BP. 0C MP0C

Place of its Storage

State operating pressure temperature

14 Ammonium Hydroxide 0.025 0.025 NA -69 Carboy Atmosphere & Room

Temp.

15 Calcium chloride/Zinc

Chloride 100 100 NA NA HDPE Drum


16 Hydro Chloric acid (30%) 30 15 100 NA PP FRP Tank Atmosphere & Room

Temp.

17 Ethanol (94%) 15 10 79 -114 Isolated

Storage tank Atmosphere & Room

Temp.

18 Caustic lye 30 15 NA NA Isolated

Storage tanks Atmosphere & Room

Temp.




177

Chemical considered for Quantitative risk assessment is given in Table 7.4: Physico- Chemical Properties of Raw Materials

Table 7.4: Physico- Chemical Properties of Raw Materials

Product(P) & Raw

materials

No of Storage Tanks

Cap. BP °C FP °C LD50

mg/Kg

Chemical Hazard according to NFPA

LEL UEL TLV-TWA,

mg/m3 Health, Nh

Fire, Nf Reactivity, Nr

HCl 2 2.5 KL 100 NA 900 3 0 1 NA NA 7

Ethanol 1 15 KL 79 16.6 3450 2 3 0 3.3 19.0 1900

Toluene 7 45 KL 110 4 636 2 3 0 1.1 7.1 375

Acetic Acid 30 Carboys 35 Lt Carboys 106 NA 3,310 3 2 0 NA NA 25

7.3.1Layout map

The storage facilities for the raw material and finished goods have been shown in the layout map as shown in Figure: 7.1.




178

Figure 0.1: Layout Plan Showing Storage Facilities




179

7.4 Qualitative Risk Assessment Many a times Risk involved in various processes / process equipment‟s cannot be addressed

completely by Consequence Analysis. As a conservative approach, these risks have been

considered separately under this topic. The approach is to identify hazards associated in operation

of equipment as well as in processes, assessing its impacts, ranking the risk posed by it and finally

to propose remedial actions/mitigation measures such that the risk is minimized to tolerable level.

Qualitative Risk Assessment has been carried out for the following areas:

Hazard involving during Construction Phase;

Storage and Handling of Acids;

Storage and Handling of Flammable Chemicals;

Storage and Handling of Toxic Chemicals;

Storage and Handling of other Solid Chemicals;

In Qualitative Risk Assessment, risk has been analyzed using methodology called HIRA-Hazards

Identification & Risk Assessment. In HIRA, major manual activities carried out by plant personnel as

well as contract labors have been considered. The Risk Matrix presented in Table 7.5: Risk Matrix

is referred in evaluating the assessment. Risk acceptability criteria given in Table 7.6: Risk

Acceptability Criteria.

Table 7.5: Risk Matrix

Table 7.6: Risk Acceptability Criteria

LIKE HOOD/ PROBABILITY

SEVERITY

Catastrophic (Death/ System Loss)

Major/ Critical

(Serious injury/ Illness)

Moderate (Less

Serious Injury/ Illness)

Minor/ Marginal

(Minor Injury/ Illness)

Insignificant/Negligible (No injury /illness)

5 4 3 2 1

Almost Certain

E H H H M M

Likely D H H M M L

Possible C H M M M L

Unlikely B M M M L L

Impossible A M M L L L

Risk Range

Risk Acceptability

Criteria Remarks

H Unacceptable/

High Management‟s Decision/Action Plan Required. Potential off-site Impact.

M Medium Generally Minor Impact. Acceptable with Management‟s Review.

Specific monitoring or SOP to be followed.

L Low Acceptable without Review. Manage through Routine Procedure.




180

7.4.1 Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment

Table 7.7: HIRA Worksheet

S. No. Process Or

Activity Associated

Hazards Health & Safety Impact (Risk)

Initial Risk

Control / Mitigation Measures

Residual Risk

Sev

eri

ty

Lik

elih

oo

d

Ris

k

Sev

eri

ty

Lik

elih

oo

d

Ris

k

A Construction Phase

1

Site Clearance,

excavation and paving of site

Dust generation & increase in

SPM/RSPM in air Fall into pit due to

caving the side

Health effect on workers and surrounding

People Risk of injury to

workers

2 C M

Water spray on the ground before excavation.

Work permit procedure to be followed.

Shoring of the sides while manual digging the ground. Use of dust mask.

1 B L

2

Vehicular movement for transportation of construction

material

Emission of PM10, HC, NOx, & CO Noise generation

Health effect Risk of injury to workers due to

accidents

2 E M P.U.C Certified Vehicles

Regular Maintenance of Vehicles Speed control of the vehicles.

1 C L

B Storage and Handling of Acids

1

Loading & Unloading of

acids like HCL, Acetic Acid,

Oleic Acid etc.

Exposure to acid fumes due to

leakage /spillage in pipe/container/

valves etc.

Skin/Eye irritation. Toxic Vapor

inhalation etc. 2 C M

Use of right MOC. Periodic Inspection of flanges/ferrule

joints is carried out. Loading & Unloading activity will be carried out in well-ventilated area.

Neutralization media is made available in areas where acid are

stored/handled/used. Acid proof flooring will be done at

storage and handling area. Use of acid resistant glove, apron,

2 B L




181

S. No. Process Or

Activity Associated


Initial Risk


Residual Risk

Sev

eri

ty

Lik

elih

oo

d

Ris

k

Sev

eri

ty

Lik

elih

oo

d

Ris

k

face shield, eye goggle, nose mask, gumboot & helmet.

C Storage and Handling of Flammable/Toxic Chemicals

1

Unloading and use of

Flammable Chemicals like

Ethanol, Toluene,

Acetone, etc.

Spillage/ Leakage. Fire Explosion

Fire Burn injury Damage to

equipments and facilities

2 C M

Spill containment is done. No hot work is carried out nearby.

Ignition sources are avoided in such areas.

Fire extinguishers are kept available. Appropriate PPEs like Safety

Goggles, Butyl or Nitrile rubber gloves, gumboot, plastic apron etc.

will be used.

2 B L

1 Handling of

toxic Chemical Spillage / Leakage

Skin/Eye irritation Toxic Vapor inhalation

2 C M

Operators/Workers to be trained for Safe Work Practices.

Spillage will be cleaned or neutralized with suitable media. Chemical handling bags to be

labeled properly. Chemicals will be stored in an isolated storage rooms having provision for natural & forced

ventilation. Certified Dust respirator shall be

used. Use of Suitable protective clothing,

gloves, boots shall be used.

2 B L

E Storage and Handling of other Solid Chemicals




182

S. No. Process Or

Activity Associated


Initial Risk


Residual Risk

Sev

eri

ty

Lik

elih

oo

d

Ris

k

Sev

eri

ty

Lik

elih

oo

d

Ris

k

1

Handling, Cleaning of

Solid Chemicals like

Caustic Flakes,

Sodium Lauryl Sulfate –

Powder etc.

Chemical Exposure Skin/Eye irritation

2 C M

Loading & Unloading activity shall be carried out in well-ventilated area

under proper supervision. Immediate collection of spilled

chemicals. Rubber or neoprene gloves and additional protection including

impervious boot, apron shall be used.

PPEs like chemical safety goggles, apron and full face shield.

2 B L

Conclusion

It can be seen from the above table that, after providing mitigation measure in activity of construction phase. Storage & Handling of Acids,

Storage and Handling of Flammable/Toxic Chemicals and for Solid chemicals have the risk probability will change from almost certain to

possible as well as its residual risk will change from medium to low.




183

7.5 Quantitative Risk Assessment Quantitative Risk Assessment (QRA) is a structured approach to identifying and understanding the

hazards and risks associated with Storage and Handling of flammable/ toxic chemicals. The

assessment starts by taking into account an inventory of hazardous chemicals stored, likelihood of

leakage/ spillage associated with it and selecting the worst case scenario for consequence estimation.

Finally, suggesting the measures to minimize or mitigate risks to meet appropriate acceptability

criteria. The planning for emergency evacuation shall be borne in mind whilst interpreting the results.

7.5.1 Consequence analysis

In a plant handling hazardous chemicals, the main hazard arises due to storage and handling of

hazardous chemicals as mentioned above. If these chemicals are released into the atmosphere, it may

cause damage due to resulting fires or vapor clouds. Blast overpressures depend upon the reactivity

class of material between two explosive limits.

The consequences of the release of Hazardous substances by failures or catastrophes and the

damage to the surrounding area can be determined by means of models. Models help to calculate the

physical effects resulting from the release of hazardous substances and to translate the physical

effects in terms of injuries and damage to exposed population and environment. To assess the

damage level caused by the various accidental events, it is essential to firm up the damage criteria

with respect to different types of accidents e.g. thermal radiation, toxicity, explosion overpressure etc.

Consequence analysis involves the application of mathematical, analytical and computer models for

calculation of effects and damages subsequent to a hydrocarbon release accident. Consequence

models are used to predict the physical behavior of the hazardous incidents. The techniques used to

model the consequences of hydrocarbon and other hazardous material releases cover the following:

Modeling of discharge rates when holes develop in process equipment/pipe work/pipeline.

Modeling of the size and shape of flammable and toxic gas clouds from releases in the

atmosphere;

Modeling of the flame and radiation field of the releases that are ignited and burn as jet fire,

pool fire, flash fire and BLEVE/ Fire ball;

Modeling of the explosion fields of releases, which are ignited away from the point of release.

The information normally required for consequence analysis includes meteorological conditions, failure

data of equipment and components, ignition sources, population characteristics within and outside the

plant, acceptable levels of risk etc.

7.5.2 Damage criteria

In consequence analysis studies, in principal three types of exposure to hazardous effects are distinguished:

1. Heat radiation from jet fire, pool fire, a flash fire or a BLEVE; 2. Explosion; 3. Toxic effects, from toxic materials or toxic combustion products.

The chosen damage criteria are given and explained as per the Guidelines for QRA – PHAST

Software, version 6.7 (DNV) & Yellow Book (Consequence Modeling), Purple Book (Risk Assessment)

for QRA released by Centre for Chemical Process Safety (CCPS).

The details of planning including classification of events, consequence of Fire, Consequence of

Overpressure, Consequence of Toxic release, and Pasquill stability classes area given in table below:




184

Weather Conditions

Table 7.8: Weather Condition selected for Consequence analysis

Time Remarks Weather Condition

Temperature in °C Wind speed m/s Stability Class

Day Time

Prevalent during the

day, most times of the

year

32 1.5 D

Night Time


night, most times of the

year

23.7 1.5 E

Monsoon

Period


monsoon months 23.6 1.5 E

7.5.3 About the software – PHAST, Version 6.7

The consequence analysis for the modeled scenarios has been done using DNV‟s software PHAST

(Process Hazard Analysis Software Tool) 6.7.

PHAST is integrated into safety and meets regulatory requirements. It uses unified dispersion

modeling to calculate the results of the release of material into atmosphere. Various salient features

along with assumption are given

Input data for software (modeling)

For consequence analysis, input data considered given in Table 7.9: Input data

Table 7.9: Input data

Input data Consideration

Volume inventory Quantity of material

Scenario Leak, Catastrophic Rupture

Leak size 10 mm hole for storage tank

Storage conditions Atmospheric Temperature and pressure

Tank details Height, Diameter

Bund details Bund height, Bund area

Weather condition Wind speed, Pasquil stability, Atmospheric temperature, Relative humidity

Weather Condition MCAS Devlopment Techniques

As a first step towards risk assessment is to identify the possible release scenarios based on available

information about scenario development for Maximum Credible Accident Scenarios (MCAS).

Selection of Maximum Credible Loss Scenarios (MCLS‟)

Following points are considered while selecting the release scenarios:

Flash point for flammable chemicals;

IDLH of Toxic chemicals & Total inventory of the material.

Operating/ Storage Temperature and Pressure of the material.

Failure Rates

A leak or rupture of the tank / pipe, releasing some or all of its contents, can be caused by brittle failure

of the tank walls, welds or connected pipework due to use of inadequate materials, combined with




185

loading such as wind, earthquake or impact. The failure rates are the deciding factor for selecting the

MCAS‟. The failure rates for selected MCAS‟ are given in Table 7.10: Failure Frequencies for Storage

Tanks.

Table 7.10: Failure Frequencies for Storage Tanks

Categories

Catastrophic Rupture

Frequency

(per tank per year)

Leak Frequency (per year)

Atmospheric Storage Tank 3.0 × 10-6 2.8× 10-3

Reference: International Association of Oil & Gas Producers (OGP); Report No. 434-3, March 2010.

Simulation of Release and Development of Contours

As the MCLS‟ were developed for the selected set of chemicals, the next step is to carry out the

consequence analysis. The consequence analysis results along with their contours are presented in

the

Table 7.111.

Table 7.11: Results of Consequence Analysis

S No.

Scenario Release

Size Event Impact Criteria

Consequence Impact Distances (m)

1.5F 1.5D 5D

1 HCl

Storage Tank

10 Indoor Toxic 50 PPM (600Sec) 1401 434 247

CR Indoor Toxic 50 PPM (600Sec) 2640 1040 800

2 Ethanol

10

Flash Fire LFL 9 7 4

0.5 LFL 19 19 5

Jet Fire

4 Kw/ m2 4 4 8

12.5 Kw/ m2 9 9 6

37.5 Kw/ m2 3 4 2

Late Pool Fire

4 Kw/ m2 38 38 38

12.5 Kw/ m2 25 24 27

37.5 Kw/ m2 13 13 13

Overpressure

0.020 bar 16 NH 17

0.10 bar 12 NH 12

0.35 bar 11 NH 11

CR


0.5 LFL 38 52 43

Fireball

4 Kw/ m2 NH NH NH

12.5 Kw/ m2 NH NH NH


Late Pool Fire

4 Kw/ m2 NH NH NH



Overpressure

0.020 68 bar 85 85 55

0.1379 bar 44 49 29

0.2068 bar 41 47 27




186

S No.

Scenario Release

Size Event Impact Criteria

Consequence Impact Distances (m)

1.5F 1.5D 5D

3 Toluene

10


0.5 LFL 25 28 14

Jet Fire

4 Kw/ m2 5 5 4

12.5 Kw/ m2 3 3 3

37.5 Kw/ m2 NR NR NR

Late Pool Fire

4 Kw/ m2 37 37 42

12.5 Kw/ m2 15 16 21

37.5 Kw/ m2 NR NR 10

Overpressure

0.020 68 bar 47 37 18

0.1379 bar 27 24 12

0.2068 bar 25 23 12

CR


0.5 LFL 30 37 31

Fireball

4 Kw/ m2 NH NH NH



Late Pool Fire

4 Kw/ m2 37 37 43

12.5 Kw/ m2 15 15 20

37.5 Kw/ m2 NR NR NR

Overpressure

0.020 bar 75 73 69

0.10 bar 34 40 30

0.35 bar 31 38 28

Table 7.112: Contours

Indoor toxic Radii of HCL tank in case of 10 mm leak.




187

Flash fire in case of 10 mm leak of Ethanol (LFL) Tank of LFL in 5D weather.

Flash fire radii in LFL Concentration of Toluene Tank in case of 10 mm leak.

Table 7.123: Summary of Maximum Effect Distances

Chemical/ Scenario Effect Distance in Meters at specific Weather condition

Distance(M) Weather Release size Event

HCl 1401 1.5 F 10 MM Leak Indoor Toxic

Ethanol 52 1.5 D Catastrophic Flash Fire

Toluene 37 1.5D Catastrophic Flash Fire




188

7.5.4 Safety Mitigation Measures

A. Recommendation against Risk

Based on the risk assessment analysis following precautionary mitigation measures are recommended

for the project.

The installation of all the equipment is/will be as per guidelines of provision of Gujarat

Factories Rule 1963.

For any case of fire emergency, standard type of Fire fighting equipments and fire

extinguishers will be provided in the storage area as well as required places in the plant.

Smoking will be strictly prohibited inside the plant premises.

Personnel protective equipments will be provide to workers.

First Aid facility and First-aid trained person will be available at the time of chemical

handling operation.

B. Safety Measures for Transportation, Storage and Handling of Chemicals

i. General safety measures for transportation, storage & handling are listed below.

Layout and location of hazardous chemical storage area shall be based on natural and

Mechanical ventilation.

Spare barrels of sufficient quantity are/will be kept ready for any emergency spillage or

leakage.

Regular inspection of all the drums of hazardous chemicals shall be carried out and

damaged drums shall be separated and disposed to avoid the possibility of catastrophic

rupture.

Display Boards shall be provided on all storage drum which include the name of the

chemicals, material of construction, Calibration of tanks and date of Painting.

The level indicators shall be placed on all storage drums to know the exact liquid level

inside the drum and to avoid the accidental spillage or overflow.

All equipments related to hazardous chemical storage shall be maintained and calibrated

regularly.

Drum trolley is/will be used for the movement of drums of hazardous chemicals to avoid

accident due to manual error.

SOP for handling hazardous chemicals is/will be displayed in local language for safe

operating procedure.

Proper inventory of hazardous chemicals is/will be maintained and buffer stock will be

kept as minimum as possible.

Standard procedure for unloading will be in place and will be implemented for safe

unloading of road tanker.

Static earthing provision is/will be made for tanker unloading.

Water showering system (Automated sprinkling system) is/will be provided to the

flammable liquid storage area, wherever required to avoid the vaporization due to

increase in atmosphere temperature.

On site detectors for fire based on heat or smoke detection with alarm system is/will be

provided as required.

Fire fighting system is/will be provided as required along with the fire water tank.

First aids boxes is/will be provided at prominent places in the plant.

Area is/will be declared as ―NO SMOKE ZONE‖.




189

ii. Process Safety Measures

Safety measures are the most important aspect of selection of process technology to ensure safety in

Production unit for the safety in production area some important critical safety measures

must be provided within the process technology/equipment itself.

The details of the general safety measures for process unit are as below;

Process parameters control should be provided vide Standard Operating Procedures.

All reaction vents should be connected to either vapor condensers system or gaseous

scrubber system.

Trained person should be engaged for handling of hazardous materials.

Proper safety precautions should be taken during handling of hazardous materials.

Further all the vessels should be examined periodically by a recognized competent

person.

All the vessels and equipments should be well earthed and well protected against Static

Electricity. Also for draining in drums, proper earthing facilities should be provided.

Reaction column pressure and temperature data should be regularly monitored and

assessment of properties of flammable chemicals should be evaluated periodically to

avoid fire/explosion scenarios.

Temperature indicators should be provided near all reactors.

Caution note, safety posters, stickers, periodic training & updation in safety and

emergency preparedness plan must be displayed and conducted.

Total reaction should be carried out in closed jacketed vessel having cooling water

supply to control temperature in case of run-away reaction.

Emergency reactor shutdown system should be implemented.

iii. Safety Measures for Drum Storage and Handling

Drums should be stored at designated location or secured in a safety storage cabinet.

Approved methods of equipping a drum and dispensing liquids from it should be

followed.

Drums, carboys and related accessories should be inspected on regular basis for

maintenance purpose.

All the vessels and equipments should be earthed properly and protected against static

electricity. Also, proper earthing facilities shall be provided for drums.

Materials should be transferred by pumping through pipeline or by vacuum from drums.

Drums for flammable liquids should have proper closures that can withstand the

expected handling conditions without leaking.

iv. Safety Measures for Preventive Maintenance

The safety measures in form of the general Do's & Don'ts for safety in process & other plant area are

as below:

Make sure equipment is empty and fluxed with nitrogen and air.

Use of proper PPE will be ensured by safety officer.

Check VOC content for flammable vapors and make sure that no flammable vapour

contents.

Keep proper and adequate fire extinguisher near work area.

Check all motors are disconnected and fuse pulled out before maintenance.

Work in any equipment must be conducted in presence of supervisor.




190

Make sure all process lines are disconnected.

Do not work on equipments without permission from plant head and maintenance head.

Do not allow any employment without pre medical checkup or without checking fitness.

Additional safety measures in form of the checklist covering Do's & Don'ts of preventive

maintenance, strengthening of HSE, manufacturing utility staff for safety related

measures is/will be updated timely and will be made available to all concern department

& personnel.

C. Fire Fighting System / Fire Control Plan

By looking to the hazardous nature of process and the chemicals that are handled and processed, the

chances of outbreak of fire cannot be totally ignored. Hence to tackle such a situation, company has

developed proposed, well-resourced and adequate fire protection system. The management has

proposed to keep the following extinguishers at site:

Flame detectors, smoke / temperature actuated heat detectors with alarms, automatic sprinkler

system, shall be installed at conspicuous locations as per the requirements.

Company is/will have Fire Water Tank of adequate capacity to combat the emergency, if arise,

water from neighbour companies shall also be made available, if required.

Working staff is/will be trained to operate Foam, DCP and CO2 extinguishers.

DG set is/will be available as a separate power backup for fire network.

Electric driven alarms & sirens are/will be placed at the conspicuous locations. Hand Bell shall

be used in case of power failure.

Proponent had provided separate entry and exists with adequate margin all around the

periphery for unobstructed easy movement of the emergency vehicle / fire tenders without

reversing back.

D. DO‟s & DON‟Ts

Management has listed some of the Do's & Don'ts activities to strengthen the SAFETY AT WORK,

which will be followed strictly:

For Preventive Maintenance

Do's:

Ensuring that operators/workers etc. follows the SOPs, Safety procedures & standards, work

permit system etc.

Inspection of Storage Area, Earthing & Bonding system.

Inspection of all Fire Fighting Facilities /Check Alarms operation.

Checking the availability of Spill Containment Kit.

Make sure existing fire extinguishers are fully charged and ready for action.

Inspections of plant, machinery, tools, equipment, premises, work practices, processes,

procedures and general environment must be carried out for the health and safety of plant, people

and surrounding.

On-site and Offsite Emergency Plans shall be reviewed and updated, as per the requirement.




191

Don‟ts:

Don't allow anyone who hasn't received specific safety and operational training to get indulge in

any site activity.

Don't perform any activity without proper permit.

Don't perform your own maintenance.

Don‟t compromise on Design and Engineering part.

Don't panic if you are in a risky situation.

Don't allow spilled chemicals to drain to sewers/gutters etc.

7.6 Disaster Management PLAN (DMP)

The Disaster Management Plan (DMP) is a guide, giving detailed organizational responsibilities,

actions, reporting requirements and support resources available to ensure effective and timely

management of emergencies likely to arise from planned operations. The DMP has been prepared for

the dye production plant on the basis of the Risk Assessment and related findings covered in the

foregoing topics in this report.

Structure

The DMP is supposed to be a dynamic, changing, document focusing on continual improvement of

emergency response planning and arrangements. A structure working on a Plan, Do, Check and

Review (PDCR) cycle has been therefore suggested. Another advantage of doing this is to have a

system that is in synchronicity with commonly used EHS systems such as ISO: 14001 and OHSAS:

18000. The DMP is covered in further detail in the remaining sections of this Chapter.

Policy

The Environment, Health and Safety (EHS) policies are to be made accessible to all personnel at site

and to other stakeholders. The policies must be framed considering statutory compliance, stakeholder

involvement, continual improvement, and management by objectives. If required, the explanation for

the EHS policies will be provided in simple language which could be easily understood by the

personnel.

Planning

1. Identification and Prevention of Possible Emergency Situations.

2. Possible emergency situations in the fertilizer plant can broadly be classified into unintended

explosions, fire, electrical short-circuits and resultant fire, vehicle collision, and inundation.

Additional emergency situations can be developed on the basis of audit or other procedures

prior to commencement of operations.

3. Emergency Prevention

Some of the ways of preventing emergencies are as follows:

Preparation of a Preventive Maintenance Program covering periodic maintenance schedules

for all the equipments, instruments and system as a whole as per recommendations provided

in the Operation and Maintenance manual supplied by the respective manufacturers. The

maintenance schedule may also incorporate additional recommendations based on the hands-

on experience of engineers gained from working in similar plants.




192

Importantly, it is of great importance to collect and analyze information pertaining to minor

incidents and accidents at similar sites, as well as for recording near misses or emergencies

that were averted. This information gives an indication of how likely or unlikely it is for the site

to face actual emergencies and what should be further done to prevent them from occurring.

Establishment of an ongoing training and evaluation program, incorporating the development of

capabilities amongst employees about potential emergencies and ways and means of

identifying and averting the same. Most emergencies do not occur without some incident or an

abnormal situation. Hence, there is always sometime of few seconds to few minutes to arrest

an incident of abnormal situation from turning into an emergency. This is the role of the shift in-

charge who is generally the incident controller (IC) along with his shift team.

Classification of Emergency

The Level of Emergency can be classified in three Categories, which is given in Table 7.14.

Table 7.134: Emergency Types

Classification Description Causes Applicability

Level – 1

The leakage or emergency, which is confinable within the plant/area.

Small pipe/valve rupture or similar leakages that do not affect outside premises. Release of toxic chemicals for short duration. Small fire in the plant.

Ethanol Toluene Acetic Acid HCl

Level – 2

The emergency, which is confinable within the factory premises.

Leakage of toxic chemicals for long duration. Medium scale explosion confined to the factory premises. Medium scale fire inside the factory premises.

NA

Level – 3

The emergency, which is not confinable within the factory premises and general public in the vicinity are likely to be affected.

Heavy / Profuse leakage of toxic / flammable gases for a long duration. Explosion of high magnitude affecting the adjacent area. Major fire inside the factory premises

NA

Emergency Plan Objectives

Specific objectives of the Emergency Response Plan are listed with regards to the responses desired

for successful management of the possible emergency situations. Suggested Objectives would

include:

To define and assess emergencies

To control and contain incidents.

To safeguard the employees.

To minimize damage to the property and/or the environment.

To inform the employees, the general public residing around the plant and the authority on the

hazards/risks assessed.




193

To safeguard provided residual risk, if any, and the role to be played by the employees in the

event of emergency.

To inform the state authorities like Police and Fire Departments, Mutual Aid Centres, Medical

Centres to come up for help.

To effectively rescue and to provide treatment of casualties and to count the injured.

To identify and list fatal accidents, if any.

To secure the safe rehabilitation of affected areas and to restore normally.

To provide authoritative information to the news media for the incident.

To preserve records, equipments, etc. and to organize investigation into the cause of the

emergency and to suggest preventive measures to stop its recurrence.

To ensure safety of staff and patients and resume work.

To work out a plan with all provisions to handle emergencies and to provide for emergency.

7.6.1 On-Site Emergency

The On-site emergency plan: deals with, measures to prevent and control emergencies within the

factory and not affecting outside public or Environment.

Table 7.145: On-Site Emergency Planning

Sr.No. Code of Practice

Objective Line of Action

1. In Case of Fire

at hazardous

chemicals

Storage area.

To deal with Fire

efficiently and quickly at

different locations in the

storage area and

electrical Panel

Any person notices any sign of fire shall

start shouting FIRE, FIRE (Aag, Aag) to

seek assistance and also immediately take

steps to give warning by blowing the siren

continuously and take steps to extinguish

the fire by using fire extinguishers available

near the site of fire.

After giving information reach the spot

remove Man & Machinery and take steps to

tackle the fire in accordance with the

firefighting instructions. Inform at security

office to get Ambulance if required.

2. In case of Heavy

Spillage,

Leakage of

chemicals.

To deal with the

incidence of chemical

spillage or leakage

efficiently and

Quickly.

Any person who notices any leakage or

spillage of chemicals from storage tank, pipe

line or from any equipment should try to

warn the nearby persons and report to the

shift supervisor without any delay.

The Person should not go near the spill

unless he is wearing a proper PPE and has

been fully trained to handle the chemicals

leaks.

7.6.2 Off-Site Emergency

The Off-site emergency plan: deals with, measures to prevent and control emergencies affecting

public and the environment outside the premises.




194

Arrangement made for offsite emergency:

Considering distance from district Head Quarters, other nearby external emergency control

organization. Following arrangements will be arranged in consultation with DY. DISH, district

collectorate, SDM, mamlatdar.

Disclosure of information to neighboring organization and population:

Asha Cellulose will prepare booklet and circulate among neighboring organization and population

containing hazardous operation and chemicals. First aid, emergency treatment, probable types of

emergencies that can arise. Preventive steps will be taken to control emergency. Emergency warning

siren code system, to make them aware in advance. Asha Cellulose will carry out group get together,

acquaintance round, meeting with neighboring public, population to train and make them aware about

our operation and preparedness.

The same groups along with external emergency control organization were invited during mock drill,

rehearsals for training and acquaintance.

Local crisis group

As per central government notification and DISH office for preparation of offsite emergency plan and

Asha Cellulose will become member of local level crises group, will set up disaster management

center of industrial area using existing available facility of industries in the area with facility and

emergency contact phone numbers.

During emergency with in local group reach in and around industrial area any one can contact DMC –

control room situated in both the factories and manned round the clock will initiate actions and arrange

to organize resource mobilization and communication.

Communication and warning by Disaster Management Centre

When a disaster occurs, the industry affected by the disaster will immediately inform the disaster

management center with all available information, the DPMC will act as per the contingency plan and

DPMC will also communicate immediately to district Collectorate. The integration of on – site plan with

district contingency plan and various functions to be carried out are mentioned in chart OFF – SITE

emergency plan as follow:




195

Emergency Organization Chart

Emergency management cell as shown in Figure 7.2.

Figure 0.2: Emergency Organizational Chart

7.6.2.1 Implementation

Allocation of Resources

Key Personnel are identified for carrying out specific and assigned duties in case of any kind of

emergency. All such key personnel shall be available on call even on holidays and off duty as well.

Commander (Office Manager)

Site Main Controller (General Manager)

Incident Controller (Shift Incharge)

Maintenance Incharge Safety Officer HR Personnel




196

Deputy Commander (Personnel Officer)

Site Incident Controller (Shift-in-charge)

Deputy Incident Controller (Deputy to Shift-in-charge)

Other key personnel

Essential Workers

Responsibilities of Commander / Deputy Commander

To reach the identified Emergency Control Centre as soon as information for incident is

provided and take charge of situation and send his deputy at the place of incident.

To activate the Emergency Preparedness Plan according to severity of situation.

To call Safety Officer and Fire Officer with all necessary resources at site of incident.

To call for outside help from State Fire Department, nearby industries, if required, looking at

magnitude of incident.

Call all key personnel and inform Doctor/Medical Centre to be ready for treatment.

Commander shall deploy staff to carry out following functions.

To liaise with other departments and guide their personnel.

To supervise Assembly and Evacuation at all points.

To look after patients who are bed ridden and any casualties and give psychological support.

To activate Assembly and Evacuation Plan, if required, as per situation by ordering Site

Incident Controller.

To inform and liaison with Chief Operating Officer, Police Department and District Emergency

Authority.

To inform all the employees and relatives of the affected employees.

To arrange for chronological records of emergency for future reference and supplement the

investigation of incident.

Issue authorized statements to News Media.

To ensure prompt action for preservation of evidence and arrange for video shooting/

photographs.

Deputy Commander to carry out the responsibilities of Commander in his absence and assist

him in his duties when present.

Assign Medicare and Emergency Management tasks to all persons of management cadre

Responsibilities of Site Incident Controller / Deputy Incident Controller

To rush to the site of incident and take immediate charge.

To ensure that immediate steps as per Emergency Preparedness Plan are taken and direct the

worker staff accordingly.

To inform Commander, Deputy Commander and other key personnel for the situation from time

to time.

To blow the Siren as per situation to declare Emergency.

To supervise assembly and evacuation as per plan, if required, from the site of incident.

To take decisions for controlling the emergency and incorporate advice given by Commander

after taking charge in Emergency Control Centre.

To ensure that casualties receive adequate attention and medical care.

To ensure accounting for the personnel present at site of incident and personnel rescued and

personnel missing.

To control traffic movement in the premises.




197

To arrange for relief of rescue workers and catering facilities, when emergency is prolonged.

Deputy Incident Controller shall take charge at site of emergency in the absence of Site

Incident Controller.

When Site Incident Controller shall be present at the site of incident, Deputy Incident Controller

shall assist Site Incident Controller or take charge at another location, if emergency exists at

more than one place.

Responsibilities of Essential Workers

A task force of essential trained staff will be made available to get work done by Incident Controllers.

Such work would include:

Fire fighting using portable extinguishers / hydrants (as feasible) and controlling the spill, if any,

till fire department people takes the charge.

To help the fire brigade, if required.

Emergency engineering work e.g. isolating equipment, shifting materials, urgent repairing or

replacement, electrical work etc.

Provision of emergency power, water, lighting, material etc.

Direct movement of people, equipment, special vehicle and transport to or from the scene of

the incident and provide barricade to area of incident to prevent unauthorized trespassing.

Search, evacuation, rescue and welfare, first-aid and medical help.

Manning of assembly points to record the arrival of evacuated personnel.

Manning of outside shelters and welfare of evacuated persons there.

Assistance at casualty‟s reception areas to record details of casualties.

Assistance at communication centre to handle outgoing and incoming calls and to act as

messengers, if necessary.

Control of traffic at the premises.

7.6.3 Setting up of Emergency Infrastructure

To enable the key persons to implement the DMP, the following infrastructure will be set up:

Assembly Points

In case of emergency, the site needs to be evacuated immediately. On evacuation, the personnel

working in the plant will go to pre-assigned assembly points. The charge will be taken by Shift-in-

charge, and in his absence, a person deployed by Commander will be in charge of respective

assembly points and will supervise Assembly and Head Count. The sign boards indicating the

Assembly Point with number having relevant information will be placed at all such point for guidance.

Each assembly point will be earmarked for the personnel from specific plant areas for assembly in the

event of emergency.

Task Force of Essential Staff

A task force of essential trained staff will be made available to get the work done by Commander. Task

Force personnel will be trained to perform various tasks as mentioned above.

Emergency Control Centre

A small separate room (generally located near Security Office at Main Entry Gate) will be provided to

facilitate Emergency Control Centre. This room will be equipped with dedicated and direct

communication facilities. The Control Centre will be situated in this area, which is of minimum risk with

immediate availability of security personnel nearby. Moreover, the area will be on the arterial road to




198

allow easy access by a vehicle, if other systems fail or extra communication facilities needed to be set

up. The Emergency control center will consist of following items:

Internal and external telephone including STD facility;

Telephone directory/ Telephone nos. of mutual aid centres.

First Aid;

Muster roll of Workers;

Identity card register;

Layout plan of the factory showing the location of hazardous materials, assembly point, and

first aid centres etc.;

Map of surrounding area with Fire Extinguishers location;

M.S.D.S.

Copy of ON SITE OFF SITE PLAN;

Stationeries like- note book, pen, pencils etc.

S.B. Apparatus;

List of Government Agencies /Local press agencies with phone No;

Sand Buckets & Hydrant Network;

Adequate numbers of PPE's.

Fire Fighting

The personnel working in the plant, in case of noticing fire, will immediately raise an alarm and ask the

nearest personnel to inform Manager. He may make an attempt to extinguish the fire depending on

intensity using a portable fire extinguisher along with other personnel working with him. The severity of

fire will be assessed and if it is likely to be severe, will take following steps:

Call his departmental head/Shift-in-charge to inform about the incident.

Call fire tenders and mobile trailer pump from nearby fire department.

Call nearby personnel to move away from the site of incident and go to assembly points.

Arrange for switching off electricity supply to that specific area of incident.

Manager shall review the steps taken by Shift-in-charge in his capacity as COMMANDER and

will reach "Emergency Control Room".

Steps in Case of Spreading of fire

Commander, after taking charge of the situation, will continuously assess the situation and if it is not

being controlled then ensure:

Ensure evacuation, in orderly fashion and assembly of all persons at the assembly points.

Arrival of fire tenders and/or Mobile Trailer Pump from outside resources.

Ensure that any vehicle parked near the fire site is taken away to safe area.

Communication System

Communication System is a Crucial Factor while handling emergency. Company has quick &

effective Communication System through which, any situation, which can lead to emergency,

can be informed or known to.

1. All persons working inside the plant.

2. Key Personnel outside during normal working hours & during off-duty hours.

3. Outside emergency services, Statutory and Local Authorities &

4. Neighbouring facilities and public leaving in vicinity.




199

Each and every section, Plant & Department of the Factory will be connected by internal

telephones with SMC, Supervisor or IC‟s. External Phone at Office and Residence and Mobile

shall also be made available with Key Personnel and top executive of the factory. The

Communication System shall begin with raising the alarm declaring the emergency, Telephone

messages and Procedure to communicate the emergency to other persons & General Public.

Treatment of affected persons

Injured / Affected persons will be provided suitable first-aid treatment and sent to the Company's

Doctor and/or designated local medical center nearby in town for further treatment depending on

injury.

Patients requiring further treatment shall be sent in Ambulances to Hospitals in nearest area.

Patients suffering from minor problems will be discharged and sent home after preliminary treatment

by the Company‟s Doctor.

Post Emergency Activities

Medical check up

Medical checkup of affected persons in the incident, if any, will be carried out, and suitable medical aid

shall be provided to set right the problem.

Collection of Records

All possible evidences will be collected along with shift logs and personnel nearby or connected with

the incident will be called for narrating the details so as to facilitate finding of the most probable and

convincing cause of incident and emergency situation. The proposed procedure will help in suggesting

the remedial measures for preventing recurrence.

Inquiry

Detailed inquiry for the incident will be carried out to find out the cause, which will be in the form of fact

finding mission and recommendations made to the suitable authority.

Training

Regular training program for all the concerned personnel will be conducted to enable them to face any

type of emergency situation, be it natural disaster, fire in equipment, building or any explosion in

equipment.

Review of Emergency Performance

The site/head office management will review the findings of the audit and the non-compliances. It will

consider whether the DMP is providing adequate safety assurance to the management, delivering

performance as desired, and whether it continues to be in the spirit of Environment, Health and Safety

Policies and changing requirements. On the basis of these, the management will record its decisions

and consider modifying the DMP, as deemed appropriate.

7.7 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PROGRAM

Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd. has prepared the Occupational Health Surveillance Program which shall be

followed right from the project construction & erection phase and the same shall be updated for the

upcoming new facility, if required.

The details of the same are described in the following sections.




200

1. First Aid

The First Aid kit as per Gujarat Factory Rules.

2. Plan for Periodic Medical Check-up As Per Gujarat Factory Rules.

3. Safety Trainings & Mock Drills

Safety trainings (on Safe Material Handling, First Aid, & all Safety Aspects) shall be provided by the

Safety Officers.

4. Mock Drills

To evaluate the effectiveness of emergency preparedness and to spread the awareness

among employees mock drill will be carried out at the interval of every six months.

After completion of the mock drill, summary report shall be made and corrections will be done if

any weakness has been observed.

7.8 SUMMARY

Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd. handles some hazardous chemicals. Details about their storage, quantity to

be stored, possible hazards and control measures are given in detail. Quantitative Risk Assessment

(QRA) has been carried out for both the chemicals. Three major scenarios were identified for

consequence analysis i.e. Release of toxic HCl fumes, flash fire scenario of Toluene and Ethanol at

storage tanks Chemical properties of these chemicals, their operating temperatures or pressures or a

combination of them. Fire, explosion, toxic release or combinations of them are the hazards

associated with industrial plants using hazardous chemicals. Hazard Identification and

Qualitative/Quantitative Risk Assessment have been developed to improve upon the integrity,

reliability and safety of industrial plants, the same has been discussed in detail. Further Asha Cellulose

has prepared the Disaster Management Plan (onsite/offsite emergency plan) to effectively utilize all

the resources at its disposal for the protection of life, environment and property.

----------------------------------




201

CHAPTER 8

PROJECT BENEFITS

8.0 GENERAL

This chapter gives information on direct and indirect benefits to the environment, nation and

proponent. The proposed project is economically and technically workable because it will fulfill the

peak demand time of the local season. The proposed expansion of unit will generate new

employment opportunity, which will have beneficial impact and will improve the local economies to

the area in terms of physical, ecological and biological and other tangible benefits.

8.1 PHYSICAL BENEFITS

Major benefits of the project are as follows:

Infrastructure: Creation of community assets (infrastructure) like installation/ repair of hand pumps/

bore wells, as a part of corporate social responsibility in nearby villages. Rain water harvesting will be

implemented at the project site to conserve the environment.

Enhancement of Green Cover: Plantation of trees on road side and development of nursery will be

done as a part of corporate social responsibility.

Green Belt Development: Greenbelt of 6325 m2 is already developed and additional 3800 m2 Green

belt will be developed. Approx. 630 nos. of trees and 750 Nos. of shrubs will be planted in company

premises. The company will develop greenbelt along the periphery of the proposed site and in

common premises available outside the company premises.

Local Employment: This project will enhance the opportunities of employment for the local peoples

during construction phase. There will be increase in some small scale businesses like tea stall,

catering services, heavy motor garage, cycle/motorcycle shop etc. around the project area.

8.2 SOCIAL BENEFIT

Employment Potential: The employment of local people in primary and secondary sectors of project

shall upgrade the prosperity of the region. This in-turn will improve the socio-economic conditions of

the area. This project will provide temporary employment to many unskilled and semi-skilled laborers

in nearby villages. This project will also help in generation of indirect employment to those people

who render their services for the personnel directly working in the project and during operational

phase, considerable number of people will be benefited by provision of various services, such as

transportation, technical services, skilled and semi-skilled services and indirectly it will flourish

various business activities. Thus, the direct and indirect employment generation by this project will be

highly significant. Manpower will be employed due to the project directly and indirectly through

contracts, services, etc. During the construction phase approximate 25-30 Nos. of workers will be

required. Presently there are 110 Nos. of employees. There will be additional 50 Nos. of employees,

thus total 160 Nos. of employees after expansion during operational phase.

Corporate Environmental responsibility: The unit has regularly contributed their part for improving

the Socio-economic conditions of the surrounding area. The unit has taken part for the eco-

development measures including community welfare measures in the project area for the overall

improvement of the environment. The unit has already donated in money in various community

welfare groups and events as their part of social activity and as a responsibility for social upliftment

and development. The donation details are attached as Annexure XIV.




202

Apart from this, as part of Corporate Social Responsibility, World Environment Day has been

celebrated every year by planting 50 saplings in different nearby villages.

Sustainable Livelihood Options and Women Empowerment such as …

Education Initiatives such as Scholarship for education excellence; Promotion of girl child

education; Incorporation of extracurricular activities etc.

Health Initiatives such as Support to the nutritional program of mother, child and school

goers, Support the district health administration in the community health activities; Knowledge

enhancement on preventive health care etc.

Community Infrastructure and Facilities such as Enhancement of green coverage,

Promotion of renewal energy etc.

The budget allocated for the next five year CER Plan in given in Chapter 10.

8.3 OTHER TANGIBLE BENEFITS

Project will encourage industrial growth of this sector specifically in formulation units in the

region;

The company will have market growth of its own brands name in various overseas countries;

The company will cater needs of the domestic market also.

8.4 SUMMARY

The project activity and the management are being/will support the local villagers and provide other

forms of assistance for the development of public amenities in this region. The management will

recruit skilled and unskilled workers from the nearby villages. Presently there are 110 Nos. of people

and approximate 50 Nos. of additional people will be employed during the expansion as per their

skills and qualification. Approximately Rs. 15.3 Lakhs (1% of the proposed cost) has been allotted for

Corporate Environmental Responsibility (CER) for next 5 years. Housing facilities, transportation,

medical, educational and other civic amenities will get a boost in future. This is envisaged as a major

positive benefit to this area.

----------------------------------




203

CHAPTER 9

ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

9.0 GENERAL

Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis (CBA) is an analytical way to make an educated decision

regarding the commencement of an industrial activity or similar trade/commercial/infrastructure

activity. This involves a comparison of the costs of an action with considerations of the benefits

associated with that action. CBA assists the regulators to evaluate the benefits and challenges

imposed by the upcoming activity in commercial terms with respective to the impact on the

environmental scenario such as human wellbeing, quality of life and environmental wellbeing.

An important component of a CBA is a base situation which is a situation when no changes take

place. All decisions are then compared to the base situation. Once the base and a relevant time

period are established, benefits and costs can be calculated in terms of human and environmental

well-being. In this case, a benefit is defined as anything that increases human well-being, and a cost

is anything that decreases it. CBA aims to maximize economic efficiency at a point where marginal

benefits and marginal costs are equal.

9.1 APPLICABILITY OF CBA AND SUMMARY

During the scoping/ToR stage, no recommendation of environmental cost benefit analysis was

suggested by the appraisal committee.

Moreover, Expansion of Synthetic Organic Chemicals project to be developed at S. No. 302/P, 303/2,

273/2, 275/1, Near Water Works, Abrama, Valsad-396001, Ta: Dist: Valsad, Gujarat. Hence,

conducting a detailed CBA is deemed not necessary for this particular project.

----------------------------------




204

CHAPTER 10 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

10.0 GENERAL

Any industrial development is associated with certain positive impacts as well as some negative

impacts on the environment. At the same time adverse impacts cannot be neglected. An

Environmental Management Plan shall be formulated for mitigation of the adverse impacts and is

based on the present environmental conditions and the environmental impact appraisal. This plan

helps in formulation, implementation and monitoring of the environmental parameters during and after

commissioning of the project. The Environmental Management Plan describes in brief, the

management's plan for proper and adequate implementation of treatment and control system for air

and liquid pollutants and for maintaining the environment. It also includes the development of green

belts in and around the plant, proper safety of the workers, noise control, fire protection systems and

measures.

10.1 INTRODUCTION

The environment management plan is prepared with a view to facilitate effective environmental

management of the project, in general and implementation of the mitigation measures in particular.

The EMP provides a delivery mechanism to address potential adverse impacts and to introduce

standards of good practice to be adopted for all project works. For each stage of the program, the

EMP lists all the requirements to ensure effective mitigation of every potential biophysical and socio-

economic impact identified in the EIA. For each impact or operation, which could otherwise give rise

to impact, the following information is presented:

To treat and dispose off all the pollutants viz. liquid, gaseous and solid waste so as to meet

statutory requirements (Relevant Pollution Control Acts) with appropriate technology.

To support and implement work to achieve environmental standards and to improve the

methods of environmental management.

To promote green-belt development.

To encourage good working conditions for employees.

To reduce fire and accident hazards.

Budgeting and allocation of funds for environment management system.

To adopt cleaner production technology and waste minimization program.

10.2 WATER ENVIRONMENT

10.2.1 Construction Phase

The wastewater generation during the construction period will be from the sanitary units provided for

the constructional workers. This wastewater will be treated in existing septic tanks and discharged

into soak pits. Wastewater from vehicle maintenance and labour working areas may have certain

impacts.

Following management plan is proposed to reduce such impacts:

The proponent has obtained permission from CGWA for withdrawal of ground water and same

shall be utilized during the construction phase.




205

Further the proponent shall ensure to implement good operation practices to minimize the use

of water, so as to reduce the depletion of water resource to maximum possible extent.

Proper drinking water facility of existing plant and existing sanitation facility of unit will be

made available to the construction workers.

The management will ensure proper management to avoid spillage of effluent which may

cause seepage and contaminate ground water.

Proper storm water drainage system is already provided.

10.2.2 Operational Phase

After proposed expansion, total water requirement will be 244.9 KLD (Fresh: 37.48 KLD +

Recycled from RO/MEE is 207.5 KLD) sourced from own bore well. For the withdrawal of

water from ground, we have already obtained the permission from CGWA for ground water

withdrawal.

Total Industrial waste water generation will be 218.015 KLD. 10.55 KLD high TDS water will

be directly sent to MEE. Balance 207.465 KLD water will be treated in primary, secondary and

tertiary treatment plant. Treated water will be taken to Reverse Osmosis. 173 KLD RO

permeate will be recycled in the process. Balance 30 KLD of RO rejected is taken to MEE.

34.5 m3/day of MEE condensate is recycled in the process. Thus there is no discharge of

industrial effluent on land.

Domestic waste water (2.0 KLD) will be disposed off through septic tank and overflow of the

septic tank will be discharged to ETP.

Table 10.1: Wastewater Generation


KLD Proposed

KLD Total KLD

A Domestic 1.5 0.5 2.0

B Industrial


Boiler 25.0 12.0 37.0

DM Plant 5.0 7.5 12.5

Cooling 2.5 0 2.5

Container/floor washing, QC, R&D 1.0 0.5 1.5

Total Industrial 121.5 94.515 216.015

C Total effluent (A+B) 123.0 95.015 218.015

10.2.2.1 Technical Details of ETP

Design Criteria:

Product : Synthetic Organic Chemicals

Source of Effluent : Process, washing & Utilities.

Design Flow of Effluent : 220 KL/day Max.

Design Parameters : As under




206

Effluent Characteristics:

Sr. No.

Parameters Untreated combined effluent from existing plant

Untreated combined effluent from proposed plant

Untreated combined effluent after proposed expansion

1 pH 9.39 8.02 9.02

2 Colour, pt.Co 180 150 140

3 Temperature 32 32 32

4 Suspended solids, mg/l

304 286 276

5 Oil & grease, mg/l 7.20 2.8 4.2

6 Phenolic

compound, mg/l 0.2 0.21 0.19

7 Cyanides, mg/l ND ND ND

8 Ammonical

nitrogen, mg/l 24.2 16.0 18.5

9 TDS, mg/l 4600 3200 3420

10 Chloride, mg/l 800 1020 985

11 Sulphate, mg/l 650 740 725

12 Phosphates, mg/l 1.2 0.8 0.62

13 COD, mg/l 3150 3780 3670

14 BOD, mg/l 1117 1486 1615

Table 10.2: Characteristics of Treated Effluent

Sr. No.

Parameters Treated combined effluent after

proposed expansion plant GPCB disposal

norms

1 pH 8.02 6.5 to 8.5

2 Colour, Pt.Co 80 <100

3 Temperature 30 <40

4 Suspended solids, mg/l 46 <100

5 Oil & grease, mg/l 0.86 <10

6 Phenolic compound, mg/l 0.08 <1

7 Cyanides, mg/l ND <0.1

8 Ammonical nitrogen, mg/l 16.0 <50

9 TDS, mg/l 2050 <2100

10 Chloride, mg/l 550 <600

11 Sulphate, mg/l 580 <1000

12 Phosphates, mg/l 0.18 <2

13 COD, mg/l 79.9 <250

14 BOD, mg/l 26 <30

Remarks:

After proposed expansion, entire effluent will be treated into our modified full-fledge effluent

treatment plant consisting of primary, secondary & tertiary treatment units followed by

Reverse osmosis & MEE.

RO permeate & MEE condensate shall be recycled in the process, hence after RO/MEE

treatment, there will be no discharge of any industrial effluent on land.




207

Table 10.3: Characteristics of RO treated & MEE condensate

Sr. No. Parameters RO Permeate MEE

Condensate

1 pH 7.0 7.0

2 TDS, mg/l 150 -

3 COD, mg/l < 20.0 < 50.0

Based on the above criteria Effluent Treatment Plant having under mentioned specification is

required to install:

Table 10.4: Details of Effluent Treatment Plant, RO plant and MEE with proposed modification

Sr. No.

Equipment Dimensions

meters

Capacity in m3 MOC


1. Grease Trap tank 4X1X1.75 7 0 7 RCC & FRP

2. Collection &

Neutralization Tanks 3X3X3.75 68 0 68 RCCFRP

3. Equalisation tanks 4 X3 X4.5 162 120 282 RCCFRP

4. Lime preparation

dosing tanks 1.3X1.3X2.1 7 0 7 RCC

5. Primary clarifier 3X3X4.5 80 100 180 RCC

6. Intermediate Storage

tank 2.5X3.25X5 80 30 110 RCC

7. Bio Reactor ( Aeration

Tank) 9X5.25X5.4 510 210 720 RCC

8. Secondary clarifier 5.25X2.5X4.4 115 50 165 RCC

9. Holding tank 2.5X2.8X2.8 20 130 150 RCC

10. Activated carbon Filter 3 dia x 2 ht. 15 30 45 MSRL

11. Pressure Sand filter 3 dia x 2 ht 15 30 45 MSRL

12. Sludge Drying Bed 4.3X4.3X1.5 55 55 110 Brick

13. Filter Press 900*900*48

plates 2.5 0 2.5 PP/CI

14. Final treated effluent

holding tank 2.5X3X5 35 0 35 RCC

15 MEE feed tanks 4X2X4.5 72 72 144 RCCTL




208

Figure 10.1 Flow Diagram of ETP followed by RO Plant and MEE




209

10.2.2.2 Details of RO Plant




210




211

Figure 10.2 Flow Diagram of MEE

10.2.2.3 Project Viability

After proposed expansion, total 218.015 KLD of waste water will be generated. To maintain 18 (1) b

direction issued by CPCB, Total Industrial waste water generation will be 218.015 KLD. 10.55 KLD

high TDS water will be directly sent to MEE. Balance 207.465 KLD water will be treated in primary,

secondary and tertiary treatment plant. Treated water will be taken to Reverse Osmosis. 173 KLD RO

permeate will be recycled in the process. Balance 30 KLD of RO rejected is taken to MEE. 34.5 KLD

of MEE condensate is recycled in the process. Thus there is no discharge of industrial effluent on

land.

Project Viability

Sr. No.

Particulars Amount in Rs. Lakhs

Product Ethyl

cellulose HPMC

Ethyl Chloride

Methyl Chloride

1 Proposed Sale 4000 3500 950 484

2 Raw Material Cost* 2038 1754 670 306

3 Power & Fuel 484 425 36 28

4 Labor Cost 480 432 28 28

5 Environmental Management

System 102 90 14 8

6 Maintenance Cost 124 108 18 18

7 Selling, packing & Office

Expenses 55

48 6 6

8 Proposed Gross Profit 717 643 178 90

TRIPPLE EFFECT EVAPORATOR PLANT

Steam 6 Kgs/cm2

Barometric Leg

Conenser Vent

M

Vacuum Pump

Seal Water Circulation

Cooling Tower

Cooling Tower

Feed Pump CW Pump

Transfer Product Condensate

Transfer Transfer Pump Pump Product Pump

FF

Evaporator

FCE

vaporator

PreH

eater

FCE

vaporator

Pre

Heater

Pre

Heater

VLS VLS

VLS

TVR

CondensateReceiver

FeedVessel

Barometric receiver

PHE




212

* Presently Ethyl chloride (one of the raw materials) is being purchased from various local

manufacturers and we are finding stiff competition in domestic as well as export market to match

Ethyl cellulose price against Chinese make product. By producing Ethyl Chloride in house as

backward integration we can contribute good foreign exchange revenue to the country. Also we can

sell Ethyl chloride in local market to sustain current profitability in view of prevailing rise in the prices

of all commodities & service sectors. HPMC is also an import substitute like Ethyl cellulose. HPMC is

also widely used in pharmaceutical industry along with Ethyl cellulose. HPMC can be more

competitive against imported product particularly if we produce on our own one its major raw material

Methyl Chloride.

The company will provide budgetary provision for the recurring expenses for environmental issues

while planning the allocation of funds during the annual budget.

10.3 AIR ENVIRONMENT


The construction of proposed expansion unit will be carried within the existing premises. Hence, no

major leveling and cutting operations are required. During construction phase, particulate matter will

be the main pollutant, which would be generated from the site development activities and vehicular

movement on the road. Further, concentration of NOx and CO may also slightly increase due to

increased vehicular traffic movement. However, the increase in ambient concentrations of air quality

will be negligible. As most of the construction equipment will be mobile, the emissions are likely to be

fugitive. The dust generated will also be fugitive in nature, which can be controlled by suitable

mitigation measures like sprinkling of water and development of green cover.

The impacts will be localized in nature and the areas outside the proposed project site premises are

not likely to have any major adverse impact with respect to ambient air quality.

Following mitigation measures are proposed to reduce the impacts:

Dust suppression by regularly spraying water on roads and work sites shall be practiced.

Wetting or covering stockpiles on construction materials, the proper location of material

stockpiles and covering loaded trucks during the transportation of material shall be ensured.

Separate civil construction material storage yard will be created within the site and it will be

enclosed.

Use of low-emission vehicles and, wherever feasible, construction equipment powered by

electricity shall be preferred.

Maintenance of engines and use of vehicles with PUC Certificates. Contractors will be

required to strictly implement these measures.

Engines of idle vehicle machineries/equipment not in use shall be turned off.

All construction workers will be provided appropriate Personal Protective Equipment (PPEs)

like dust mask, ear plug, helmet, safety belt etc. and made to wear them during working

hours.

Regular inspection for proper implementation of mitigation measures shall be done.

Enforce no use of firewood for cooking and also no open air burning of any kind of wastes.




213


The major sources and management for air pollution are:

Flue gas emission



LDO/Natural gas fired hot air generator having capacity of 6 lakhs k cal/h each. Two numbers

of D G sets having 110 kVA and 35 kVA capacity. 30 meters height of chimney with SMF

provided to 3 TPH boiler, 15 meters common chimney provided for all three boiler and two

HAG. 11 meters chimney provided for D G Sets.


continued. Existing three numbers of 800 kg/h capacity of boiler will be discontinued. Existing

two numbers of hot air generator will be continued. Additional one number of coal fired 3.5

TPH boiler and one number of FO/natural gas fired 6 lakhs k cal/h capacity of thermopak and

one number of natural gas/LDO fired hot air generator of 6 lakhs k cal/h capacity will be

installed. Existing two numbers of D G sets having 110 kVA and 35 kVA will be continued.


provided for three HAG. 30 meters chimney with ESP will be provided to 3.5 TPH coal fired

boiler. 11 meters height of chimney will be provided to 6 lakhs k cal/h capacity of thermopak.


Table 10.5: Details of Stack with Air Pollution Control System

Sr. No.

Particulars Details


1.0 Capacity of Steam boiler 3 TPH 0 3 TPH

Fuel used NG/FO 0 NG/FO


200 kg/h 0

230 SCM/h/ 200 kg/h



2.0 Capacity of Steam boiler 0 3.5 TPH 3.5 TPH

Fuel used 0 Coal Coal

Consumption 0 510 kg/h 510 kg/h

APC provided 0 ESP ESP


3.0 Capacity of Thermopak 0 6 lakhs k cal/h 6 lakhs k cal/h

Fuel used 0 NG/FO NG/FO


115 kg/h 135 SCM/h/

115 kg/h



4.0 Capacity of Steam boiler 0.8 TPH



Fuel used LDO/FO

Consumption 25 kg/h






214




Fuel used LDO/FO

Consumption 25 kg/h






Fuel used LDO/FO

Consumption 25 kg/h



7.0 Capacity of Hot air




40 kg/h 0

50 SCM/h/ 40 kg/h




generator 6 lakhs k cal/h 0 6 lakhs k cal/hr



40 kg/h 0

50 SCM/h/ 40 kg/h




generator 0 6 lakhs k cal/h 6 lakhs k cal/h

Fuel used 0 NG/LDO NG/LDO


40 kg/h 50 SCM/h/

40 kg/h



10.0 Capacity of D G set 110 kVA 0 110 kVA

Fuel used HSD 0 HSD




11.0 Capacity of D G set 35 kVA 0 35 kVA

Fuel used HSD 0 HSD




Expected Pollutants PM: < 150 mg/Nm3 SOX: < 100 ppm NOx: < 50 ppm




215

Process gas Emission




Adequate capacity of separate cyclone separator and bag filter along with 11 meters chimney

for each dryer is provided.





Table 10.6: Details of Stack with Air Pollution Control System



12 Capacity of Spin flash dryer 50 kg/h 0 50 kg/h



followed by bag filter 0

Cyclone separator



13 Capacity of Spin flash dryer 100 kg/h 0 100 kg/h



followed by bag filter 0

Cyclone separator



14 Capacity of Spin flash dryer 0 100 kg/h 100 kg/h

Hot air supplied by 0 HAG HAG

APC provided 0

Cyclone separator


Cyclone separator



Expected Pollutants PM: < 150 mg/Nm3

Fugitive Emission

For control of fugitive emission following practices is already implemented in existing unit and same

shall be continued after proposed expansion.

The raw materials is/will be stored in closed containers and will be handled through closed

system to avoid the handling losses.

System of leak detection and repair of pump/pipeline based on preventive maintenance.

The reactor shall be connected to an efficient condenser system with cooling/chilling

water/brine circulation.




216

Reactor and solvent handling pumps shall have mechanical seals to prevent leakages. Also

provide with breather valve to prevent losses.

Solvent is/will be taken from storage tank to reactors through closed pipe line.

Storage tank is/will be vented through trap receiver & condenser operated on cooling water.

The condensers is/will be provided with sufficient HTA and residence time so as to prevent

any loss of solvent.

Proper earthing shall be provided were ever solvent handling is done.

Entire plant is flameproof.

Solvent is/will be stored as per statutory requirement. Solvent will be kept at a separate

specified area with all the safety measures.

The sprinkling of water is/will be done along the internal roads in the plant in order to control

the dust arising due to the movement of vehicular traffic.

Thick greenbelt is/will be developed around the plant to arrest the fugitive emissions.

10.3.2.1 Details of APCM

Table 10.7: Details of MDC and Bag filter attached to Spin Flash Dryer

MAKE ACMEFIL

Type Reverse pulse air jet

Air volume 17500m3/h

Air temperature 70 °C

Dust load 12 kg/h

Actual filtration area 34.55 m2

Air to cloth ratio 1:5

Bag size 150mm * 3000 mm long

Total no. of bags 121

Total no. of rolls 11

Cage size 150mm * 2990 mm long

Overall size of bag filter 2200 * 2200 * 5250mm

MOC of casing SS 304

MOC of bag Polyester needle felt,

Cage SS 304

PULSING PIPES SS 304

10.4 SOLVENT MANAGEMENT PLAN

Mixed solvent received from granulator is/will be scrubbed / washed with water and scrubbed

mixed solvent will be reused in the next batch.

Pure solvent, crude solvent and recovered solvent shall be stored only in closed insulated

storage tanks and we shall not be using drums at any stage in the Solvent Management

System.

Wherever required, the solvents shall be directly pumped into day tanks from the storage tanks

and shall be charged into the reactors without involving manual handling.

All the pumps are/will be mechanical seal type to avoid any leakage of solvent.

All necessary fire fighting systems shall be provided with alarm system. Flame proof wiring and

flame proof electrical accessories shall be provided to avoid any mishap.

All the storage tank and day tank shall be connected to a vent system through chilled

water/chilled brine condensers to prevent loss of solvents in the atmosphere.




217

All the vents of solvent handling systems & process vessels are connected to chill water/chilled

brine condensers and scrubbing system to avoid loss of solvent.

All the solvent storage tanks shall be provided with breather valves.

In process vessels nitrogen blanketing shall be provided

10.4.2.2 Plan to curb release of VOCs in the air

Leak Detection and Repair (LDAR) Program

Leak Detection and Repair (LDAR) is a program implemented to comply with environmental

regulations for reducing the fugitive emissions of targeted chemicals into the environment. In addition

to control fugitive emissions, LDAR Program also helps the industries to reduce unwanted losses of

chemicals and thereby conserving energy & increasing their profitability.

Following steps shall be followed for effective implementation of LDAR Program:

Identification of volatile chemicals which may contribute in VOCs:

In proposed plant, there will be mix solvents, chemicals which may contribute in VOCs.

Identification of all the probable sources of leakage; such as valves, pumps, and

connectors.

List of the sources of probable leakage is as follows:

• Valves/Flanges

• Pump glands handling above chemicals

• Open vents from the tank top

• Pump seals

• Compressor seals

• Pressure relief devices

• Process drains

• LPDs (Low Point Drains)

• HPVs (High Point Vents)

A list of all such items shall be made and same shall be incorporated in the checklist for LDAR.

Selection of appropriate method for leak detection:

Considering the nature of the chemical; appropriate method shall be selected for leak detection of

individual chemicals from the list given below:

• Visual Checks

• LEL meter

• VOC meter

• Gas Detector

• Chlroine Torch

Scheduling and checklist for Leak Detection:

All points shall be checked as per the checklist given below. Sr.

No.

List of

Source

of

leakage

Name of

Chemical

Method

of leak

check

Frequency

Weekly/Monthly/Quarterly

Checked

on

Checked

by

Observations/Remarks Leak to be

attended

by (Repair

to be done

within 5

working

days)

Leak

attended

on

Closure

Note




218

Methods for rectification of identified leaks:

For all identified leaks, closure shall be ensured with the help of maintenance department and

records for the same shall be maintained.

Apart from these, regularly VOC level from vent of condenser and work zone area will be monitored

by third party monitoring.

10.5 SOLID/HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT


This is an expansion project and expansion will be done in existing premises. Hence No

excavation or vegetation clearance will be required.

The construction material and diesel /oil to be used for various construction activities will be

stored in designated storage yards to reduce the spills into unwarranted areas. Segregation,

collection, storage and disposal of waste material generated during construction phase to

minimize its impact on soil quality.


The details of hazardous and non-hazardous waste generation with waste quantities and composition

are given in Chapter-2. The main solid/hazardous waste generated from the proposed plant and its

management is listed below:

Sr. No.

Process waste

Category Source Quantity, TPA

Mode of disposal


1 Used oil Sch: I/5.1 Machineries

/ D.G.Set 0.092 0.018 0.11

Incineration at common incineration system of BEIL, Ankleshwar / sold to authorized recyclers

2 Discarded containers/

bags

Sch: I/33.1

Raw Material Storage area &

Utility Area

50 12 62

reused for packing of solid waste or sold to registered recyclers

3 ETP waste Sch: I/35.3

ETP 109 21 130

Disposed off into TSDF site of BEIL, Ankleshwar or VGEL, Vapi

4 MEE waste Sch:I/35.

3 MEE 234 714 948

Disposed off into TSDF site of BEIL, Ankleshwar or VGEL, Vapi

5 Dust from


Sch:I/26.2


0.22 0 0.22 Recycled in process

6 Salt from process

Sch:I/26.1


1703

0

1703

Disposed off into TSDF site of BEIL,




219

Ankleshwar or VGEL, Vapi.

7

Mixed Solvent from the process

Sch:I/26.4


1787.44

9.98 + 51.96 (vent condenser and HPMC

product)

1849.38

61.9

1787.44 MTPA of mix solvent from solvent process and aqua process will be utilized for manufacture of Ethyl chloride product within the premises and balance 61.9 MTPA of mixed solvent will be sold to actual distillator

8

Distillation Residue /

& Laboratory

organic waste

Sch:I/26.1


23.0 - 18.78 4.22


9

Spent carbon

from ETP & Chimney

Sch:I/36.2

ETP/Chimney

4.8 1.2 6.0


10

Date-

Expired, Discarded and off-

specification Material

& floor sweeping

Sch:I/28.

5

Product Storage

area

1.0

1.0

2.0


11

Spent Filter cloth &

filter material

Sch:I/36.

2

From process

plant

1.0

0

1.0


12

Spent Resins

from D M plant

Sch:I/35.2

D M plant 1.0 0.2 1.2

Collection, storage transportation, disposal at TSDF/BEIL Collection, storage transportation, disposal at TSDF/BEIL

13

Used hot & cold

insulation material

Schedule: X/02


0.5 0.1 0.6

Collection, storage transportation, disposal at TSDF/BEIL

14 Weak Sch: Manufacturi 4430.4 0 4430.4 Sell to




220

caustic soln (18-

20%

II/C2 ng process actual/authorized users

Solid Waste

15 Fly ash - Boiler 0 179 179 Sell to Brick manufacturer

10.6 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

The volume of transport vehicles to be handled is very low. Greenbelt of 6325 m2 is already

developed and additional 3800 m2 Green belt will be developed. Approx. 630 nos. of trees and 750

Nos. of shrubs will be planted, which shall act as a barrier to the propagation of noise from the factory

premises. This shall further reduce the noise levels appreciably.

It is recommended to measure and maintain records of noise level at various places within and

outside the factory premises.


Following measures shall be taken for abatement of noise during construction phase:

Noise generation due to movement/operation of vehicles and equipment/ machineries shall be

well managed by restricting the movement/operation during night hours.

Management will ensure effective set up of traffic management system in order to minimize the

usage of horns and other such equipment which may add to noise generation. Further the

management will restrict the movement of heavy vehicles during night.

All machineries to be used for construction purpose will be of highest standard of reputed make

and compliance of noise pollution control norms by this equipment will be emphasized by

company.

Further, it will also ensure to carry out periodic and regular maintenance of the equipment,

machines and spare parts which shall include lubrication, replacement of defective parts etc. in

order to bring down the decibel of noise to maximum possible extent.

Feasibility of putting up acoustic enclosure / temporary barrier around areas with high noise levels

will also be explored.

Management will ensure that no hazard is caused due to noise generation during the course of

work. For this purpose the management shall ensure that the workers are provided with individual

protective equipment like ear muffs or ear plugs in areas with high exposure to noise.


Noise will be generated due to various industrial activities, use of utility, plant machineries, vehicular

movement etc. As discussed in chapter – 4, there will be some impacts on noise environment due to

the proposed project. Noise level within the plant premises will be measured regularly.

Following measures shall be adopted for abatement of noise during the operation phase:

Acoustic laggings, enclosures and silencers are/ will be provided wherever necessary for high

noise generating equipment.

Noise generating equipment like pump, motors, compressors, blower, engines etc. are/shall

be mounted on sturdy concrete foundations with proper and suitable rubber padding to reduce

vibrations and thereby noise generation.

Safety blow off valves, discharge pipes, relief valves, etc. will be equipped with silencers.




221

Additional greenbelt will be developed and maintained around high noise generating area as

well as plant premises to help in attenuation of noise.

Regular lubrication and preventive maintenance is being/shall be done to reduce vibration and

noise generation.

Use of PPEs like ear plugs and ear muffs is/shall be made compulsory near the high noise

generating machines.

Moreover, the personnel are provided breaks in their working hours, with the continuous

exposure not increasing three (3) hours.

All vehicles shall maintain speed limit inside the premises and unusual acceleration of engine

and loud horns shall be prohibited.

Periodic monitoring of noise levels as per post-project monitoring plan is/shall be done on

regular basis.

10.7 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY


Occupational health and safety of the construction workers shall be ensured with the following

measures.

The management shall ensure that all workers/employees are provided with basic Personal

Protective Equipment (PPEs) like ear plug/muff, safety helmet, face mask, safety gloves, safety

goggles, safety shoes etc.

The management will also ensure that the quality of these PPEs is properly checked before

providing to the workers. It shall also be ensured that all the safety equipment are placed properly

and are available instantaneously when required.

Management will also ensure to have safety and first aid facility for the workers/ employees

engaged in the working of the plant in order to provide them with necessary treatments in case of

accidental mishaps or their health breakdown.


The company is very much concerned in terms of health, safety and environment protection. The unit

has a qualified safety manager and has engaged, doctor for regular checking health of the employee

regular checking health of the employees and medical aid is arranged with the help of local hospital.

Plant has a well-stocked first aid. Annual health check for employees is/will be carried out and record

is/will be maintained. Regular training to plant personnel in safety firefighting and first aid is/will be

provided.

Until now, no major accident has taken place in the existing unit. Thus from the previous performance

of the company, same dedication is to be continued for the proposed expansion. To maintain high

standards in Health, Safety and Environment; various activities are undertaken at the site. Similar

practice will be followed after the proposed expansion.

The following key safety measures are implemented in the existing plant and the same will be a part

of proposed expansion project:

I. Safety training is/will be provided to the employees.

II. Safety Sirens with Alarm System in case of emergency are/will be provided.




222

III. The workers exposed to noisy sources will be provided with ear muffs/plugs.

IV. Assembly points are defined for safe gathering of the employees during the times of

emergency.

V. Fire Hydrant System is/will be installed.

VI. Fire Extinguishers are/will be provided.

VII. The fire and safety equipment will be properly utilized and maintained regularly.

VIII. Mock drills are/will be periodically conducted and factors like response time are/will be

evaluated.

IX. Fire squad team is/will be formed for handling any emergency situation and regular training of

squad team is conducted.

X. First Aid Facility and training are/will be provided.

XI. Personal protective gears and equipment are/will be provided to employees.

XII. Health check-ups are/will be organized at regular intervals.

XIII. Safety / Health records and MSDS are/will be maintained.

Budget of Rs. 5 Lakhs is allocated for occupational health and safety.

Housekeeping

Proper housekeeping is an essential part of sound environmental management. It is/will be rigorously

seen that there is no accumulation of wastes, especially combustible wastes inside the plant area.

In summer dry grasses and vegetation growing inside the plant area is/will be cut and removed. All

firefighting equipment and warning devices are/will be kept in perfect working conditions at all the

times. It will be seen that all personnel are aware of the implications of environmental pollution and

simple practices to avoid pollution.

For Preventive Maintenance

Do's:

Inspection of Storage Area, Earthing and Bonding system.

Inspection of all Fire Fighting Facilities /Check Alarms operation.

Ensuring that operators/workers etc. follows the SOPs, Safety procedures and standards, work

permit system etc.

Make sure existing fire extinguishers are fully charged and ready for action.

Inspections of plant, machinery, tools, equipment, premises, work practices, processes,

procedures and general environment must be carried out for the health and safety of plant,

people and surrounding.

On-site and Offsite Emergency Plans shall be reviewed and updated, as per the requirement.

Don‟ts:

Don't allow anyone who hasn't received specific safety and operational training to get indulge in

any site activity.

Don't perform your own maintenance.

Don‟t compromise on Design and Engineering part.

Don't perform any activity without proper permit.

Don't panic if you are in a risky situation.

Don't allow spilled chemicals to drain to sewers/gutters etc.

Strengthening of HSE (Applicable for Manufacturing Utility Staff)

Do's:




223

Follow instructions. Do not take chances. If you don‟t know, ask.

Correct or report unsafe conditions.

Include a timeline for completion of each recommendation.

Make recommendations that are measurable and trackable.

Ensure that each recommendation is assigned to an individual to oversee implementation.

Help keep things clean and orderly. Keep gangways clear.

Do not horseplay. Do not run. Avoid distracting others. Avoid throwing things.

Report all injuries. Get first aid promptly.

Use, adjust and repair equipment only, when authorized.

Use right tools and equipments for the job, use them safely.

Do not smoke in restricted areas. Do not flick cigarette / beedi in company.

Use prescribed protective equipment; keep them in good working conditions.

Respect signs / warnings. Abide by rules laid down for your safety.

Don‟ts:

No worker in a factory-

Shall willfully interfere with or misuse any appliance, convenience or other thing provided in the

factory for the purpose of securing the Health, Safety or Welfare of the workers therein:

Shall willfully and without reasonable cause do anything likely to endanger himself or others;

Shall willfully neglect to make use of any appliance or other thing provided in the factory for the

purposes of securing the Health or Safety of the workers therein.

Shall make vague statements, overrule supervisor, adopt shortcuts.

10.8 CORPORATE ENVIRONMENT RESPONSIBILITY

Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) is linked to sustainability and mainly based on the social

and environmental consequences. The Asha Cellulose has already initiated the social activities

mentioned in chapter 8 either by providing or by improving the facilities in the area, which will help in

uplifting the living standards of local communities. The activities are under implementation at existing

plant are given in Chapter-8 of the report. The existing social activities will be further strengthened

under proposed expansion. A budget of Rs. 15.3 Lakhs i.e 1% cost of the expansion project is

allocated for Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) under proposed expansion project and will

be implemented in next 5 years after implementation of project at nearby villages i.e. Gundlav,

Chanvai, Vashiyar, Magod, Muli, Kajan Ranchhod.

Table 10.8 CER Activities with year wise budget (Rs. in Lakhs)

S.

No. Description

Year Total

1 2 3 4 5

1.

Donation for Women Empowerment program and distribution of dustbins in nearby villages as per requirement i.e. Gundlav, Chanvai, Vashiyar, Magod, Muli, Kajan Ranchhod

0.7 0.7 0.7 0.5 0.4 3.0

2.

Education kit distribution & Scholarship in

schools of nearby villages as per

requirement i.e. Gundlav, Chanvai,

Vashiyar, Magod, Muli, Kajan Ranchhod

0.7 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.5 3.0

3. Free medical Health Check-up Camp in 1.1 1.0 0.7 0.6 0.6 4.0




224

nearby villages in nearby villages as per

requirement i.e. Gundlav, Chanvai,

Vashiyar, Magod, Muli, Kajan Ranchhod

4.

Renowation of School/roads in nearby

villages as per requirement i.e. Gundlav,

Chanvai, Vashiyar, Magod, Muli, Kajan

Ranchhod

1.3 1.3 1.3 0.7 0.7 5.3

Total (Rs. in Lakhs) 3.8 3.7 3.3 2.3 2.2 15.3

10.9 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT

The main objective of the greenbelt is to provide a barrier between the plant and the surrounding

areas. The greenbelt helps to capture the fugitive emissions and to attenuate the noise generated in

the plant apart from improving the aesthetics of the plant site. In order to control the industrial

pollutants, dense tree plantations are necessary.

As the sedimentation pattern of the pollutants, ambient and ground level concentration of pollutants

are usually determined by the direction and speed of prevailing wind and vertical and horizontal

thermal gradients prevailing in the area, the belt of plantations will be designed accordingly. The

width of the tree belt depends on the gaseous emissions, availability of land and site characteristics

etc.

Geometry of planting of tree is more important in order to have effective wind break by the plantation.

For an effective green belt, a mixture of tree species is necessary and some shrubs and grasses will

be inter-cropped. As far as possible, there will be no gaps in the green belt. Where opening is

imperative, alignments to roads will be such that open gaps are prevented to overcome funneling

action of wind.

Design of Green Belt

Greenbelt around the plant boundary shall be developed as greenbelt and green cover as per Central

Pollution CPCB/ Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC), New Delhi

guidelines. The expenditure on development and maintenance of green belt is of revenue nature and

sufficient fund shall be provided to meet the requirement. The plantation schedule will be completed

within five years from the construction period of the project.

The following shall be designed and implemented as per the latest CPCB guidelines. The broad

aspects to be covered are given below:

Shrubs and trees will be planted in encircling rows around the project site; and

The spacing between the trees will be maintained slightly less than the normal spaces, so that the

trees may grow vertically and slightly increase the effective height of the green belt.

Plant Species for Green Belt

While selecting the plant species for the proposed green belt, the following points will be taken into

consideration:

Should be a fast growing type

Should have a thick canopy cover

Should be perennially green

Should be preferably of native origin

Should have a large leaf area index

Recommended species in the Greenbelt Area




225

The recommended species for the greenbelt development are given in below Table.

Table 10.9 Recommended plant species for Green Belt Development

Plant Species Habit Tolerance

Limit Stomatal Index Mode of Regeneration

Acacia auriculiformis Tree T 10.9 Seeds

Azadirachta indica Tree T 29.2 Seeds

Bougainvillea spectabilis

Shrub T 32.53 Cutting

Delonix regia Tree S 14.38 Seeds / stem cutting

Nerium indicum Shrub T 15.7 Cutting

Polyathia longifolia Tree S 22.27 Seeds

Syzygium cumini Tree T 20.60 Seed, cutting, grafting, budding

Terminalia catapppa Tree T 20.9 Seeds

Thespesia populneoides

Tree T 29.81 Seeds/ cutting

All the above mentioned species are ideally suited for the ecological habitat of Abrama, Valsad

district, Gujarat. Their planting should be interspersed with each other to create mixed canopy of the

plants and the ideal distance for planting all trees is 2 m X 2 m. Greenbelt of 6325 m2 is already

developed and additional 3800 m2 Green belt will be developed. Considering 90% survival rate

approx. 630 Nos. of trees and 750 Nos. of shrubs will be planted within the next five years.

For the Calculation of Cost for Green belt Development, following parameters have been considered.

For Capital Cost

a) Cost of Sapling (Trees)

b) Shrub/Herbs

c) Transportation Charges

d) Planting cost (Including soil workings, pits etc.)

e) Fencing Cost

For Recurring Cost:

a) Cost of drip irrigation

b) Annual weeding and soil working

c) Req. of water for irrigation

d) Fertilization Cost

e) Security and Vigilance

A budget of Rs. 5.00 Lakhs as a capital cost and Rs. 4.00 Lakhs per Annum as a recurring cost has

been allocated for green belt development.

Table 10.10 Five Year Greenbelt Development Program

Year No. of Trees/Plants to be

planted No. of Shrubs to be

planted

1st Year 200 200

2nd Year 150 150

3rd Year 150 150

4th Year 100 150




226

5th Year 30 100

Figure 10.3 Photographs of Existing Green Belt

10.10 ODOR CONTROL PLAN

10.10.1 Odor control for solid handling

All solid raw materials will be charged directly to reactor through special air lock hopper against slight

negative pressure (in water column) so that no odour is emitted to the environment.

Solid charging nozzle in reactor will be projected inside so that it directly falls in to the solvent

media, thereby eliminating carrying over of solid to vapour nozzle.

Powder transfer system will also be used where ever applicable to have zero loss of powder into

the atmosphere.

10.10.2 Odor control for liquid handling

All liquid raw material handled in drum will be cooled down during summer before charging so as

to minimize its vapour pressure and control of odour.

Liquid from drums will be charged in day tank or to reactor with the help of FLP motorized barrel

pump. Alternatively vacuum lock could also be used in day tank for transfer of liquid from drum

(pumping under vacuum).

A portable duct connection shall the mounted on drum vent nozzle to exhaust fume while opening

lid of the drum.




227

In addition to above following common practices shall be followed to control any odor from

plant.

Regular monitoring of work area by supervisors.

Source control of odors emanating from plants.

Sufficient Ventilation shall be provided in all plants as per Gujarat factory Rules-18 A.

Provision of exhaust fan for air circulation and odour dilution with the ambient air.

10.11 CLEANER PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES

The following guidelines will be used to implement a cleaner production approach:

1. Identify the hazardous substance to be phased out, on the basis of the precautionary

principle;

2. Undertake a chemical/material flow analysis;

3. Establish a time schedule for the phase-out of the hazardous substance in the production

process, as well as its accompanying waste management technology;

4. Implement and further develop cleaner production processes and products;

5. Provide training and technical and financial support;

6. Actively disseminate information to the public and ensure their participation in decision-

making;

7. Facilitate substance phase-out with regulatory and economic incentives;

8. Facilitate the transition to cleaner production with social planning, involving workers and

communities affected.

9. The cost of complying with environmental legislation can be significantly reduced by

companies that adopt cleaner production techniques. The latter are often more cost-effective

than control technologies. The costs of dealing with wastes are reduced, and there is potential

for new markets to be discovered through innovations or the sale of by-products.

10. Cleaner production will reduce environmental risks and liabilities and lead to greater

competitiveness. By demonstrating a commitment to cleaner production, companies can also

improve their public image and gain the confidence of consumers.

10.11.1 RESOURCE CONSERVATION

10.11.1.1 Rain Water Harvesting (RWH)

Rain Water can be harvested either storing in containers, tanks for ready use or charged into soil for

withdrawal later i.e. ground water recharging. The unit has provided central drain line in plant area

and storage area leading to collection pit to avoid contamination with storm water and domestic water

drain. During rainy season, the rain water will be collected from roofs in collection tank having an

adequate capacity and the collected water will be used for ancillary purposes. Average 100 rainy

days and following basic details have been worked for designing the Rain Water Harvesting System:

S. No. Area Particulars

1. Total Area available for Water Harvesting : Roof Top Area:

3220+600+1200= 5020 m2

Paved Area: 3355 m2

Green Belt area/open area:

10,335+10,125 =20,460 m2




228

2. Average annual Rainfall : 2080 mm

3. Total Rain Water that can be harvested per

year

: (5020) * (2.080) * (0.8) =8353.28

(3355) * (2.080) * (0.5) =3489.2

(20,460) * (2.080) * (0.3)= 12,767.04

Total : 24,609.52 ~ 24,610 m3

The effectiveness of the drainage system depends on proper cleaning of drainage pipes/channels

etc. Regular checking before & during the monsoon will be done to see that none of the

drains/drainage facilities are clogged and are efficient to collect the rainwater under rain water

harvesting program. Tank of 15 KL will be provided for rain water storage. The clogged drains will be

cleaned up immediately on report of any clogging or blockage.

10.11.1.2 Energy Conservation

Energy conservation measures would be implemented to ensure that the use of non-renewable

resources is minimized. A key component of achieving energy conservation would be the

development of an energy management action Plan. This plan would be included as part of the

construction and operational EMPs. The energy management action plan would be consistent with

the energy conservation measures during both construction and operation phase.

Energy Conservation during Construction Phase

The following mitigation measures would be undertaken during construction works:

Efficient work scheduling and methods that minimise equipment idle time and double handling

of material;

Throttling down and switching off construction equipment when not in use;

Switching off truck engines while they are waiting to access the site and while they are waiting

to be loaded and unloaded;

Switching off site office equipment and lights and using optimum lighting intensity for security

and safety purposes;

Regular maintenance of equipment to ensure optimum operations and fuel efficiency.

Energy Conservation during Operation Phase

The following mitigation measures would be implemented during site operations:

Design of buildings and terminal layout would aim to achieve the following energy efficiencies;

Employing renewable energy sources such as day lighting and passive solar heating; and

Designing roads on the site to reduce transportation distances.

Energy Efficient Equipment

Large energy savings could be achieved in using energy efficient equipment. The following actions

are examples of how energy savings could be achieved by the terminal operator(s):

Using energy efficient electrical appliances;

Installing lighting control devices where appropriate and linking to photoelectric operations;

and

Providing sufficient energy metering and switching for energy management.

Energy would also be conserved through efficiency in work schedules and practices such as:

Use of modern storage systems for the efficient stacking and retrieval of finished products;

Switching off truck engines while they are waiting to access the site and while these are

waiting to be loaded and unloaded;

Throttling down and switching off idle equipment;




229

Regular maintenance of all powered equipment to ensure appropriate energy consumption;

Communication and education of energy conservation measures to employees.

10.12 BUDGET FOR EMS

The Expansion cost of the project will be Rs. 1538 Lakhs. Environment protection will be monitored

and implemented by an environment management cell. Asha Cellulose has allocated about Rs. 168

lakhs for an expansion towards environmental protection measures. The additional greenbelt, safety

measures and other components of the EMP shall be implemented along with the commissioning of

the proposed expansion project. The budgetary provision made for environmental management is

briefly illustrated in Table 10.12.

Table 10.11: Capital cost of Environmental Management system

Sr No. Particulars Existing Cost (Rs. in Lakhs)

Expansion Cost

(Rs. In Lakhs)

Total Cost (Rs. In Lakhs)

1. Effluent treatment plant 205.5 35 240.5

2. Air pollution control measures 16 8 24

3. Hazardous waste management

system (MEE Plant) 13.0 125 138

Total 234.5 168 402.5

The annual recurring cost of environmental control for the proposed project has been estimated to be

Rs. 214 Lakhs/Annum of the total EMS cost. Break-up of the same is as below:

Table 10.12 Recurring Cost per Annum

Sr. No. Component Proposed (Rs. In

Lakhs/annum

1. Environment & Safety Management System 200

2. Greenbelt Maintenance 4

3. Solid waste Disposal 10

Total 214

10.13 ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY

10.13.1 Corporate Environmental Policy (CEP)

Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd. has a well laid down Corporate Environmental Policy that includes the

standard operating procedures (SOP) for reporting on the performance of environmental

management system for improvement. Further, the administrative order of company to deal with the

environmental issues and the reporting mechanism of non-compliance /violation of environmental

norms. Environmental Policy is attached as Annexure VII.

Corporate Environmental policy comprises of the following:

1. Creating awareness among its personal on the impact of their actions on the environment and

encouraging sound environmental management practices in their day to day activity.

2. Adoption of State of Art Technology for Prevention and Control of Environmental impacts.




230

3. Commit ourselves to prevent pollution & protect the environment by preventing or minimizing

the environmental impacts of its activities & products through appropriate design,

manufacturing, distribution, use & disposal practices.

4. According the highest importance to continual improvement and prevention of pollution by

instituting the practices and procedures which would reduce wastage and reduce energy to

conserve natural resources. Review facilities and programs on regular basis and establish

monitorable targets, quantified as appropriate for continuous improvement of our

environmental performance.

5. Conversion of waste into wealth and optimum utilization of natural resources helps in reducing

carbon footprints.

6. Identification and Evaluation of Non-Conformance and/or Non-Compliances to determine

specific corrective and preventive actions. Management review of corrective actions to ensure

the status and effectiveness of the actions. Ensure that the policy is made available to

interested parties & is reviewed on periodic basis.

10.13.2 Environmental Management Cell (EMC)

The unit has already formulated the Environmental Management Cell for its existing unit and the

same shall be responsible for all activities after proposed expansion. The company has a well-

defined hierarchical system or administrative order to deal with the environmental issues and for

ensuring compliance with the EC conditions. EMC is involved personnel of plant level as well as

corporate level for interaction with technical and statutory bodies to deal with environmental

requirements/issues at all level. The system of reporting of non-compliances/violations of

environmental norms to the Board of Directors of the company and/or shareholders or stakeholders

involves the following hierarchy: Manager (EHS) is head of the Environmental Management Cell with

subordinates involving Environmental Manager, Lab Chemist, Operator EMS, etc.

Figure 10.4: EHS/SH&E Organization Chart

10.13.3 Role and Responsibility of EMC

The major duties and responsibilities of EMC are:




231

To implement the EMP.

To assure regulatory compliance with all relevant rules and regulations stipulated by

SPCB/CPCB/MoEF&CC.

To treat the sewage and effluent to be generated from the proposed project in a full-fledged

ETP for adequate treatment.

To ensure regular operation and maintenance of air pollution control devices

To minimize environmental impacts of operations as by strict adherence to the EMP

To initiate environmental monitoring as per approved schedule;

Review and interpretation of monitoring as per approved schedule;

Review and interpretation of monitoring results and corrective measures in case monitored

results are above the specified limit

To plan and schedule environmental conservation and protection activities for the purpose of

achieving environmental standards and to improve methods of environmental management

practices.

To improve working environment for employees by implementing mitigation/control measures

for Occupational Health and Safety and by improving condition of workplace environment.

To make budgetary provision and allocate funds for environment management system and to

ensure timely revision of budgetary provisions.

To implement and ensure effective implementation of planned mitigations including R&D

program for innovative technologies for better environment, resource conservation / recovery /

recycling / reuse especially to promote waste utilization.

To encourage and inspire employees and contractor for highest performance and attentive

response for environmental conservation, protection and improvement.

Maintain documentation of good environmental practices and applicable environmental laws

as ready reference

Maintain environment related records

Coordination with regulatory agencies, external consultant, monitoring laboratories

Maintain log of public complain and the action taken.

10.14 SUMMARY

The main purpose of EMP is to minimize the identified potential environmental impacts to be

generated from the proposed project and to mitigate the consequences.

Construction activities will be carried out during day time only. Regular water sprinkling will be done

to reduce PM concentration in the atmosphere. PPEs will be provided to workers and first aid facilities

shall be kept at designated locations during construction phase.During operation phase the industry

shall maintain comprehensive environment management plan in place for the proposed unit which

shall covers all the environment protection measures to mitigate improvised environmental impact.

Solid/Hazardous Waste Management will be done as per HW (Management, Handling and Trans

boundary Movement)–2016. Noise level within the plant premises will be measured regularly and will

try to maintain range within permissible limit. Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) is been

introduced in the chapter for construction phase as well as operation phase. Rs. 15.3 Lakhs has been

allocated for CER activities for next five years. Approx. 630 Nos. of trees and 750 Nos. shrubs will be

planted within next five years. Solvents to be used in manufacturing process is been introduced in the

chapter with its measures taken for maximum recovery. Rs. 168 lakhs is been allotted as capital cost

for EMS and Rs. 214 Lakhs/annum is allotted as a recurring cost for EMS. The unit has already




232

developed an Environmental and safety Management Cell (EMC) for existing unit as an integrated

managerial body from various disciplines to co-ordinate the project activities concerned with

implementation of environment control measures and management.

----------------------------------




233

CHAPTER 11 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION

11.0 INTRODUCTION

The project is an expansion project by Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd with a total production capacity of

1028.54 TPM. The project is expansion of current manufacturing capacity and addition of new

products of same group within the existing premises of Unit. located at S. No. 302/P, 303/2, 273/2,

275/1, Near Water Works, Abrama, Valsad-396001, Ta: Dist: Valsad, Gujarat. Considering the

project details, the expansion falls under schedule 5 (f) Category „A‟ – Synthetic Organic

chemicals industry (Dyes and dye intermediates, bulk drugs, synthetic rubber, basic organic

chemicals and chemical intermediates) as per EIA Notification 2006. The EIA report is prepared

as per TORs given by EAC, Delhi vide letter No. J-11011/316/2011-IA II (I) dated 18th March 2019.

The EIA document has been prepared as per the generic structure of the EIA report, as per the

guidelines provided EAC, Delhi.

11.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

The proposed expansion plan is for capacity enhancement of 96.54 TPM to 1028.54 TPM of the

manufacturing of Synthetic Organic Chemicals. Expansion will be done within the existing premises

by utilizing an open area at S. No. 302/P, 303/2, 273/2, 275/1, Near Water Works, Abrama, Valsad-

396001, Ta: Dist: Valsad, Gujarat. The unit has 16,635 m2 open area, from which 6300 m2 area will

be utilized for expansion. As per the amended EIA notification- 2006, the proposed products are

covered under category 5(f) – A, and hence require prior environmental clearance. There is easy

availability of infrastructure, man power and easy availability of raw materials. For Green Belt

Development as per the layout plan, the company proposes total 10,125 m2 (Existing 6325 m2 +

Proposed 3800 m2), 31.77% of green belt of the total land, i.e. 31874 sq. m. After expansion total

power requirement will be 1000 kVA. Power supply will be taken from DGVCL. The water

requirement of the unit will be sourced from own Bore well. After expansion daily requirement of

water for unit will be 244.9 KLD (37.48 KLD fresh + 207.5 KLD recycled) and additional manpower

will be about 50 persons, Preference will be given to local person for fulfill the manpower

requirement. Total Industrial waste water generation will be 218.015 KLD. 10.55 KLD high TDS water

will be directly sent to MEE. Balance 207.465 KLD water will be treated in primary, secondary and

tertiary treatment plant. Treated water will be taken to Reverse Osmosis. 173 KLD RO permeate will

be recycled in the process. Balance 30 KLD of RO rejected is taken to MEE. 34.5 m3/day of MEE

condensate is recycled in the process. Thus there is no discharge of industrial effluent on land.

Domestic waste water (2 KLD) is disposed off through septic tank to ETP. Management of generated

wastes will be done as per HW (Management, Handling and Trans boundary Movement) Rules,

2016.

11.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

The generation of primary data as well as collection of secondary data and information from the site

and surroundings was carried out during 1st December 2018 to 28th February 2019. The EIA study is

being done for the core zone and area within 10 Km distance (buffer zone), both of which together

comprise the study area.




234

S. No. Parameters Baseline Status

1. Ambient Air Quality

i. PM10 62.5 – 87.3 µg/m3

ii. PM2.5 32.1 – 48.4 µg/m3

iii. SO2 8.6 – 17.8 µg/m3

iv. NOx 13.6 – 23.6 µg/m3





2. Noise Level Monitoring

i. Day Time (06:00 AM to 10:00 PM) 54.6 – 77.0 dB(A)

ii. Night Time (10:00 PM to 06:00 AM) 47.8 – 75.7 dB(A)

Based on noise level data obtained during the survey for residential area and industrial area and

comparison study with standard norms prescribed by MoEF & CC., it is interpreted that average

noise levels for studied locations are within the limit. Looking towards the increase in noise

generating sources it is suggested that there is need to apply noise reducing devices at noise

generating sources and generate public awareness.

3. Soil Quality and Characteristics

i. pH 7.43 -7.63

ii. Electrical Conductivity 1.11 – 2.00 dS/m

iii. Sodium 3.2 – 6.0 meq/100gm

iv. Potassium 1.2 - 1.7 meq/100gm

v. Phosphorous 16.8 – 18.7 mg/100g

vi. Total Nitrogen 0.052 – 0.073 %

Based on different soil separates soils of the study region are characterized as clay soils. pH of

soils are slightly alkaline and the results of EC , SAR and ESP shows that soil is slightly

ingresses with sodic metals and Sodicity in the soil is up to certain level. Such type of soil can be

considered as sodic soil as conductivity is > 0.8 dS/m and SAR is also > 0.8. Organic carbon

and Nitrogen in the soil is in good status. The results relating to total Fe, Cu, Cr, B and Zn do not

show alarming concentrations in different soil samples. Sodicity in soil does not favor the growth

of pant. Clay soils also not good for some agricultural activities like ground nut and wheat etc.

Such type of soil should be used for plantation after applying some phosphatic fertilizers. These

types of soils are suitable for plantation of mango, chickoo, mangrove species and for the

cultivation of cotton, jowar, bajara and maize. These interpretations are relating to the soil

samples taken to the particular locations and their results.

4. Ground Water

i. pH 7.14 – 7.56

ii. TDS 664 – 843 mg/L

iii. TSS < 2 mg/L

iv. Total Hardness 363 – 467 mg/L

v. Chloride 186 – 286 mg/L

vi. Total Alkalinity 276 – 416 mg/L

vii. Fluoride 0.3 – 0.7 mg/L

viii. Iron 0.24 – 0.32 mg/L




235


Based on comparison study with drinking water standard as per IS:10500,2012 and results found

during the testing it is interpreted that portability of water can be considered good except

vashiyar village as all the results have been found during the permissible range of drinking water.

Iron content in the ground water of vashiyar village have been found slightly higher than the

permissible limit. Ground water of vashiyar village should not be directly used in drinking

purpose. It can be used for drinking after passing through RO. Other ground water sources can

be utilized for all domestic, drinking purpose and irrigation purpose. This interpretation relate to

the comparison study with IS: 10500 and results found for the sample collected from particular

location.

5. Surface Water

i. pH 7.25 – 7.78

ii. TDS 187 -330 mg/L

iii. DO 4.7 – 5.1 mg/L

iv. COD 12 – 18 mg/L

v. BOD <4 – 6 mg/L

Based on test result data comparison study, it is interpreted that River water quality does not

meet with drinking water norms as per IS 10500:2012. Results of COD, BOD and Iron indicate

towards the contamination of organic matter and metal. This organic contamination may be due

to throwing the flowers in rivers, animal bath in rivers or directly/indirectly discharge of

sewage/Effluent. These waters should not be directly used in drinking purpose but it can be used

in drinking after conventional treatment followed by disinfection. These waters can directly be

used in irrigation and other domestic purposes. Interpretation relate to sample collected from

particular points and results for tested sample only.

MARINE WATER

On the basis of test results, it is interpreted that water quality of marine is as per expectation and

suitable for sustaining the aquatic life. During Microbiological analysis it was found that water

contains some microbial organisms like Total Coliforms, Fecal Coliform. Indeed marine water

body receives the water from different sources like rivers lakes and domestic sources. These

microorganisms come from these external sources. Based on data, it can be concluded that

organic load is not more than the self-purification capacity of marine water body.

ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY

Different species of flora were observed among which Mango and Chickoo species were

dominant, as the soil of the study region also support for the cultivation of same. Herbal species

were observed rarely. Looking to the density of plant it may also be suggested to improve the

quality of environment by planting more trees. Due to destruction of natural habitat, less numbers

of wild mammals were observed. Number of species and density of wild mammals can be

increased by promoting/ facilitating the growth of bush. There was no endangered species

observed during primary survey.

SOCIO ECONOMIC

During the primary survey it was observed that almost pakka road facility is available in all

villages within 10 km radius. Literacy rate of the study region is from 72.09% to 88.80%. On the

basis of survey for literacy rate data it is interpreted that there is need to promote education

among more and more people. Almost all the villages have more than 50 % people as non-

workers. It indicates that the problem of unemployment can be solved by providing proper

training and education. There is also need to establish more industries so that maximum number




236


of employment can be generated. Basic amenities like Education facilities Health care facilities,

water supply, electric power supply, mode of transportation etc. are available in all villages.


MEASURES

The proposed project has no major adverse impact on surrounding environment. During the

movement of trucks, fugitive emissions will be minimized by water sprinkling on roads and regular

vehicular maintenance. Trucks used for transportation will be closed/ covered with tarpaulin sheet to

avoid dust dispersion at site. Only PUC vehicle will be used for the transportation. The emission from

the proposed project would not be significant to cause any damage to the people as all necessary

and efficient modern air pollution control technologies are already planned to prevent impacts on

people of the nearby area. The final gaseous emissions will be well within the permissible limits

prescribed by GSPCB/CPCB/MoEF&CC. Unit will be provided with separate entry and exit for the

smooth traffic movement. The electricity will be supplied by DGVCL and hence D. G. set will be used

only in case of power failure. Water shall be sourced from own bore well; the proponent has obtained

permission from CGWA for ground water withdrawal. Total industrial waste water generation will be

will be treated in primary, secondary and tertiary treatment plant. Treated waste water is taken to

reverse osmosis plant. RO permeate is recycle in the process. RO rejected is taken to MEE. MEE

condensate is recycled in the process. Solid/hazardous waste generated from the process and ETP

shall be properly handled with adequate solid/hazardous waste management facilities. All the

solid/hazardous waste generated shall be packed in HDPE bags and stored in Hazardous Waste

Storage Facility having impervious layer. The collection, storage and disposal of solid/hazardous

waste shall be carried out as per Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary

Movement) Rules, 2016. The adequate greenbelt developed with additional greenbelt development in

and around the plant shall greatly serve as an efficient barrier for prevention of air outside the plant

premises.

11.4 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

No alternative site was considered for the proposed expansion since the existing premises is the best

option for proposed expansion. Existing plot area of the industry is a well-developed area having

necessary infrastructure facilities. A part from this, no ecologically sensitive, no National Park, Wild

life Sanctuary, Biosphere Reserve, no reserved and protected Forests are present within the study

area. Also some alternatives for technology were considered for the proposed expansion.

11.5 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN

The environmental monitoring plan enables environmental management system with early sign of

need for additional action and modification of ongoing actions for environment management,

improvement and conservation. The environmental monitoring locations will be decided considering

the environmental impacts likely to occur due to the operation of proposed project as the main aim of

the monitoring program is to track, timely and regularly, the change in environmental conditions and

to take timely action for protection of surrounding environment. Environmental sampling and

monitoring will be done as per the guidelines provided by MoEF&CC/CPCB/GPCB. Laboratory will be

set up with manpower and facilities for self-mo‟nitoring of pollutants generated in the industry. Along




237

with other budgets, budget for environmental management will be prepared and revised regularly as

per requirement. Cost of the Environment Monitoring will be approx. Rs. 22.00 Lakhs/Annum.

11.6 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

Asha Cellulose Pvt. Ltd. handles some hazardous chemicals. Details about their storage, quantity to

be stored, possible hazards and control measures are given in detail. Quantitative Risk Assessment

(QRA) has been carried out for both the chemicals. Three major scenarios were identified for

consequence analysis i.e Release of toxic HCl fumes, flash fire scenario of Toluene and Ethanol at

storage tanks, Chemical properties, their operating temperatures or pressures or a combination of

them. Fire, explosion, toxic release or combinations of them are the hazards associated with

industrial plants using hazardous chemicals. Hazard Identification and Qualitative/Quantitative Risk

Assessment have been developed to improve upon the integrity, reliability and safety of industrial

plants, the same has been discussed in detail. Further Asha Cellulose has prepared the Disaster

Management Plan (onsite/offsite emergency plan) to effectively utilize all the resources at its disposal

for the protection of life, environment and property.

11.7 PROJECT BENEFIT

The project activity and the management are being/will support the local villagers and provide other

forms of assistance for the development of public amenities in this region. The management will

recruit skilled and unskilled workers from the nearby villages. Presently there are 110 Nos. of people

and approximate 50 Nos. of additional people will be employed during the expansion as per their

skills and qualification. Approximately Rs. 15.3 Lakh has been allotted for Corporate Environmental

Responsibility (CER) for next 5 years. Housing facilities, transportation, medical, educational and

other civic amenities will get a boost in future. This is envisaged as a major positive benefit to this

area.

11.8 ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

During the scoping/ToR stage, no recommendation of environmental cost benefit analysis was

suggested by the appraisal committee.

Moreover, Expansion of Synthetic Organic Chemical project to be developed at S. No. 302/P, 303/2,

273/2, 275/1, Near Water Works, Abrama, Valsad-396001, Ta: Dist: Valsad, Gujarat. Hence,

conducting a detailed CBA is deemed not necessary for this particular project.

11.9 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

The main purpose of EMP is to minimize the identified potential environmental impacts to be

generated from the proposed project and to mitigate the consequences.

Construction activities will be carried out during day time only. Regular water sprinkling will be done

to reduce PM concentration in the atmosphere. PPEs will be provided to workers and first aid facilities

shall be kept at designated locations during construction phase.During operation phase the industry

shall maintain comprehensive environment management plan in place for the proposed unit which

shall covers all the environment protection measures to mitigate improvised environmental impact.

Solid/Hazardous Waste Management will be done as per HW (Management, Handling and Trans

boundary Movement)–2016. Noise level within the plant premises will be measured regularly and will

try to maintain range within permissible limit. Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) is been




238

introduced in the chapter for construction phase as well as operation phase. Rs. 15.3 Lakhs has been

allocated for CER activities for next five years. Approx. 630 Nos. of trees and 750 Nos. shrubs will be

planted within next five years. Solvents to be used in manufacturing process is been introduced in the

chapter with its measures taken for maximum recovery. Rs. 168 lakhs is been allotted as capital cost

for EMS and Rs. 214 Lakhs/annum is allotted as a recurring cost for EMS. The unit has already

developed an Environmental and safety Management Cell (EMC) for existing unit as an integrated

managerial body from various disciplines to co-ordinate the project activities concerned with

implementation of environment control measures and management.

11.10 CONCLUSION

Proposed expansion project is located in village abrama, Valsad and would not have any

considerable impact on environment with efficient mitigation measures implemented. The waste

generation in form of gas (flue gas and process gas), effluent and solid waste may have impacts on

environmental parameters but the proponent has planned and installed most efficient technologies for

prevention of emission and treatment of effluent. Further, the solid/hazardous waste will be disposed

of through TSDF site. Hence there would not be any considerable impacts on environment. With the

implementation of the mitigation measures and EMP, the proposed project activities will have positive

beneficial effect on the local population, economic output and other related facilities viz. employment,

development of business, transportation etc. Rapid risk assessment including emergency response

plan and DMP has been prepared to handle any sort of emergencies.

Hence looking to the overall project justification, process, pollution potential and pollution prevention

measures /technologies installed by proponent, environmental management activities of proponent; it

has been concluded that the proposed project would not have any considerable impacts on

environment as well as socio-economic and ecological conditions of the project area. Hence

proposed project is considered environmentally safe.

----------------------------------




239

CHAPTER 12 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ENGAGED

12.0 GENERAL

Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd. has appointed Eco Chem Sales and Services (ECSS) for carrying out this

Environmental Impact Assessment Study as per the EIA notification, 2006 as amended till date.

ECSS has approved EIA coordinators and Field Area Experts for undertaking Environmental and

related studies in twenty one (21) approved sectors by NABET, Quality Council of India, New Delhi.

12.1 BRIEF RESUME AND NATURE OF CONSULTANCY

ECO CHEM SALES and SERVICES (ECSS) is one of the leading companies in the field of

Environmental Consultancy Service providers in India. We are NABET Accredited consultant for

conducting Environmental Impact Assessment Studies (EIA) and obtaining Environmental

Clearances. We also take up services which include and are not limited to Environment Monitoring

and Testing, Environment Audit, Risk Assessment Studies, Turnkey solutions, Operation and

Maintenance contracts and obtaining various statutory clearances from Ministry of Environment,

Forest and Climate Change (MoEFCC) and State Pollution Control Boards. ECSS also has branch

offices in Vapi, Dahej and Vadodara, Gujarat.

The accreditation certificate number NABET/EIA/1720/SA 085 is valid up to 20 Feb. 2020.

12.2 EIA TEAM MEMBER

Work presented in this report was carried out by Eco Chem Sales and Services with active co-

operation from Asha Cellulose (I) Pvt. Ltd. The name of the team members associated in the

preparation and studies of EIA/EMP is mentioned in Table 12.1.

Table 12.1: EIA Team Member

Name of Internal

Team Member

Activity /

Area

Involvement Under Approved

Expert Actual Work Performed

Mrs. Dipti Patel Quality Check

Understanding of project; Guidance in

writing & modification in Contents; Impact

Assessment; Review of EIA/EMP report.

EIA Coordinator

Ms. Unnati Desai

Assistance in

EIA report

Preparation

Compiling the primary & secondary data for

EIA report; assistance in EIA/EMP report

preparation.

EC, All FAEs

Ms. Pruthvi Patoliya

Meteorology,

Air Quality

Modeling &

prediction

(AQ)

Coordination for data collection, data

analysis, coordination with FAEs, team

members;

EC, All FAEs

Ms. Nazneen Mansuri

Solid and

Hazardous

waste (SHW)

Assisting in solid waste generation

calculation, preparing solid waste disposal

plan, assistance in FAE

Report writing, assisting in identifying

hazardous waste generation sources and

preparing environmental management plan.

FAE SHW

Mr. Anish Jani Land use (LU) Assisted FAE for preparation of land use FAE LU




240

Name of Internal

Team Member

Activity /

Area

Involvement Under Approved

Expert Actual Work Performed

map and report writing

Mr. Deep kumar Risk & Hazard

(RH)

Assisting in preparation of DMP, writing

about occupational health & safety. FAE RH

12.3 LABORATORY INVOLVED FOR BASELINE MONITORING AND

OTHER ANALYSIS

NABL accredited Laboratory, Certificate No. TC – 6603, issued on dated 26/10/2017 and valid till

25.10.2019.

----------------------------------




241

Annexure I ToR Letter




242




243

Annexure II Existing EC and its Compliance




244




245




246




247




248




249




250




251

Certified Compliance Report of Existing EC




252




253




254

Annexure III Existing CC&A




255




256




257




258




259




260




261




262




263




264




265

Annexure IV Plot allotment letter




266




267




268




269




270




271




272




273




274




275




276




277




278

Annexure V Water Permission letter




279




280

Annexure VI Membership for CETP & TSDF




281




282




283

Annexure VII Environmental Policy




284




285

Annexure VIII Health Checkup Report




286




287




288

Annexure IX Undertaking for ZLD & Electric meter




289




290

Annexure X Compliance of Show cause Notice




291




292

Annexure XI PESO Licence




293




294

Annexure XII MOU for Fly Ash




295




296




297

Annexure XIII NABET Certificate




298




299

Annexure XIV CER Activities




300




301




302




303

Annexure XV Agreement of Fuel (NG and Coal)




304




305




306




307




308




309

Indonesian Coal Supply




310




311

Annexure XVI MSDS

Aldrich - 295310 Page 1 of 7

SIGMA-ALDRICH sigma-aldrich.com SAFETY DATA SHEET

Version 4.4 Revision Date 08/05/2014

Print Date 09/26/2014

1. PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION

Product name : Chloroethane

Product Number : 295310 Brand : Aldrich Product Use : For laboratory research purposes. Supplier : Sigma-Aldrich Canada Co.

2149 Winston Park Drive OAKVILLE ON L6H 6J8 CANADA

Manufacturer

: Sigma-Aldrich Corporation 3050 Spruce St. St. Louis, Missouri 63103 USA

Telephone : +1 9058299500 Fax : +1 9058299292 Emergency Phone # (For both supplier and manufacturer)

: 1-800-424-9300

Preparation Information : Sigma-Aldrich Corporation Product Safety - Americas Region 1-800-521-8956

2. HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION

Emergency Overview

Target Organs

Heart, Liver, Kidney, Lungs

WHMIS Classification

A Compressed Gas Compressed Gas B1 Flammable gas Flammable gas D2A Very Toxic Material Causing Other Toxic Effects Carcinogen

GHS Classification Flammable gases (Category 1) Gases under pressure (Liquefied gas) Carcinogenicity (Category 2) Acute aquatic toxicity (Category 3) Chronic aquatic toxicity (Category 3)

GHS Label elements, including precautionary statements

Pictogram

Signal word Danger Hazard statement(s) H220 Extremely flammable gas. H280 Contains gas under pressure; may explode if heated. H351 Suspected of causing cancer. H412 Harmful to aquatic life with long lasting effects. Precautionary statement(s) P210 Keep away from heat/sparks/open flames/hot surfaces. - No smoking. P273 Avoid release to the environment. P281 Use personal protective equipment as required.


P410 + P403 Protect from sunlight. Store in a well-ventilated place.

HMIS Classification Health hazard: 0 Chronic Health Hazard: * Flammability: 4 Physical hazards: 3

Potential Health Effects

Inhalation May be harmful if inhaled. May cause respiratory tract irritation. Skin May be harmful if absorbed through skin. May cause skin irritation. Eyes May cause eye irritation. Ingestion May be harmful if swallowed.

3. COMPOSITION/INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS

Synonyms : Ethyl chloride

Formula : C2H5Cl

Molecular Weight : 64.51 g/mol

CAS-No. EC-No. Index-No. Concentration

Chloroethane

75-00-3 200-830-5 602-009-00-0 <=100%

4. FIRST AID MEASURES

General advice Consult a physician. Show this safety data sheet to the doctor in attendance.Move out of dangerous area.

If inhaled If breathed in, move person into fresh air. If not breathing, give artificial respiration. Consult a physician.

In case of skin contact Wash off with soap and plenty of water. Consult a physician.

In case of eye contact Flush eyes with water as a precaution.

If swallowed Do NOT induce vomiting. Never give anything by mouth to an unconscious person. Rinse mouth with water. Consult a physician.

5. FIREFIGHTING MEASURES

Conditions of flammability Flammable in the presence of an oxidizing gas (eg air), a source of ignition, and when the concentration of the gas is between the lower and upper explosive limits. Keep away from heat/sparks/open flame/hot surface/oxidizing gas. No smoking.

Suitable extinguishing media Use water spray, alcohol-resistant foam, dry chemical or carbon dioxide.

Special protective equipment for firefighters Wear self contained breathing apparatus for fire fighting if necessary.

Hazardous combustion products

Explosion data - sensitivity to mechanical impact no data available

Explosion data - sensitivity to static discharge no data available

Further information Use water spray to cool unopened containers.


6. ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES

Personal precautions Use personal protective equipment. Avoid breathing vapours, mist or gas. Ensure adequate ventilation. Remove all sources of ignition. Evacuate personnel to safe areas. Beware of vapours accumulating to form explosive concentrations. Vapours can accumulate in low areas.

Environmental precautions Prevent further leakage or spillage if safe to do so. Do not let product enter drains. Discharge into the environment must be avoided.

Methods and materials for containment and cleaning up Clean up promptly by sweeping or vacuum.

7. HANDLING AND STORAGE

Precautions for safe handling Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Avoid inhalation of vapour or mist. Use explosion-proof equipment. Keep away from sources of ignition - No smoking. Take measures to prevent the build up of electrostatic charge.

Conditions for safe storage Keep container tightly closed in a dry and well-ventilated place.

Contents under pressure.

8. EXPOSURE CONTROLS/PERSONAL PROTECTION

Components with workplace control parameters

Components CAS-No. Value Control parameters

Basis

Chloroethane 75-00-3 TWA

100 ppm 264 mg/m3

Canada. Alberta, Occupational Health and Safety Code (table 2: OEL)

Remarks Substance may be readily absorbed through intact skin

TWA

100 ppm

Canada. British Columbia OEL

Contributes significantly to the overall exposure by the skin route.

TWAEV

1,000 ppm 2,640 mg/m3

Québec. Regulation respecting occupational health and safety, Schedule 1, Part 1: Permissible exposure values for airborne contaminants

TWA

100 ppm

USA. ACGIH Threshold Limit Values (TLV)

Personal protective equipment

Respiratory protection Where risk assessment shows air-purifying respirators are appropriate use a full-face respirator with multi-purpose combination (US) or type AXBEK (EN 14387) respirator cartridges as a backup to engineering controls. If the respirator is the sole means of protection, use a full-face supplied air respirator. Use respirators and components tested and approved under appropriate government standards such as NIOSH (US) or CEN (EU).

Hand protection Handle with gloves. Gloves must be inspected prior to use. Use proper glove removal technique (without touching glove's outer surface) to avoid skin contact with this product. Dispose of contaminated gloves after use in accordance with applicable laws and good laboratory practices. Wash and dry hands. Full contact Material: Fluorinated rubber Minimum layer thickness: 0.7 mm Break through time: 480 min Material tested:Vitoject® (KCL 890 / Aldrich Z677698, Size M)


Splash contact Material: Fluorinated rubber Minimum layer thickness: 0.7 mm Break through time: 480 min Material tested:Vitoject® (KCL 890 / Aldrich Z677698, Size M) data source: KCL GmbH, D-36124 Eichenzell, phone +49 (0)6659 87300, e-mail [email protected], test method: EN374 If used in solution, or mixed with other substances, and under conditions which differ from EN 374, contact the supplier of the CE approved gloves. This recommendation is advisory only and must be evaluated by an industrial hygienist and safety officer familiar with the specific situation of anticipated use by our customers. It should not be construed as offering an approval for any specific use scenario.

Eye protection Face shield and safety glasses Use equipment for eye protection tested and approved under appropriate government standards such as NIOSH (US) or EN 166(EU).

Skin and body protection Complete suit protecting against chemicals, Flame retardant antistatic protective clothing, The type of protective equipment must be selected according to the concentration and amount of the dangerous substance at the specific workplace.

Hygiene measures Handle in accordance with good industrial hygiene and safety practice. Wash hands before breaks and at the end of workday.

Specific engineering controls Use mechanical exhaust or laboratory fumehood to avoid exposure.

9. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES

Appearance

Form Liquefied gas

Colour colourless

Safety data

pH no data available

Melting point/freezing point

-139.0 °C (-218.2 °F)

Boiling point 12.3 °C (54.1 °F) at 1,013 hPa (760 mmHg)

Flash point -50.0 °C (-58.0 °F) - closed cup

Ignition temperature no data available

Auto-ignition temperature

519 °C (966 °F)

Lower explosion limit 3.16 %(V)

Upper explosion limit 15 %(V)

Vapour pressure 3,975.8 hPa (2,982.1 mmHg) at 55.0 °C (131.0 °F) 1,323.4 hPa (992.6 mmHg) at 20.0 °C (68.0 °F)

Density 0.921 g/cm3 at 0 - 4 °C (32 - 39 °F)

Water solubility 5.74 g/l at 20 °C (68 °F) - soluble

Partition coefficient: n-octanol/water

log Pow: 1.43

Relative vapour density

no data available

Odour no data available

Odour Threshold no data available

Evapouration rate no data available


10. STABILITY AND REACTIVITY

Chemical stability Stable under recommended storage conditions.

Possibility of hazardous reactions no data available

Conditions to avoid Heat, flames and sparks. Extremes of temperature and direct sunlight.

Materials to avoid Strong oxidizing agents, Sodium/sodium oxides, Potassium, and its alloys

Hazardous decomposition products Hazardous decomposition products formed under fire conditions. - Carbon oxides, Hydrogen chloride gas Other decomposition products - no data available

11. TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION

Acute toxicity

Oral LD50 no data available

Inhalation LC50 LC50 Inhalation - rat - male and female - 4 h - > 19000 ppm

Dermal LD50 no data available

Other information on acute toxicity no data available

Skin corrosion/irritation no data available

Serious eye damage/eye irritation no data available

Respiratory or skin sensitisation no data available

Germ cell mutagenicity

Genotoxicity in vivo - mouse - male and female - inhalation (gas) - negative Micronucleus test

Genotoxicity in vivo - mouse - female - Inhalation - negative DNA damage DNA repair

Carcinogenicity

This product is or contains a component that has been reported to be possibly carcinogenic based on its IARC, ACGIH, NTP, or EPA classification.

Limited evidence of carcinogenicity in animal studies

IARC: 3 - Group 3: Not classifiable as to its carcinogenicity to humans (Chloroethane)

Reproductive toxicity

Overexposure may cause reproductive disorder(s) based on tests with laboratory animals.

Teratogenicity


no data available

Specific target organ toxicity - single exposure (Globally Harmonized System) no data available

Specific target organ toxicity - repeated exposure (Globally Harmonized System) no data available

Aspiration hazard no data available

Potential health effects

Inhalation May be harmful if inhaled. May cause respiratory tract irritation. Ingestion May be harmful if swallowed. Skin May be harmful if absorbed through skin. May cause skin irritation. Eyes May cause eye irritation.

Signs and Symptoms of Exposure abdominal cramps, Vomiting, Headache, Cough, intoxication, Incoordination., Dizziness, Damage of the:, Liver, Kidney, It is readily absorbed through lungs and skin, but is also rapidly given off through the lungs., Exposure can aggravate:, Dermatitis, Consumption of alcohol may increase toxic effects., At high concentrations:, cardiac arrest, Acts as a simple asphyxiant by displacing air., Notes to physician: the use of adrenaline as a stimulant should be avoided due to the sensitizing effect of chloroethane on the myocardium., To the best of our knowledge, the chemical, physical, and toxicological properties have not been thoroughly investigated.

Synergistic effects no data available

Additional Information RTECS: KH7525000

12. ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION

Toxicity

Toxicity to daphnia and other aquatic invertebrates

static test EC50 - Daphnia magna (Water flea) - 58 mg/l - 48 h Method: Directive 67/548/EEC, Annex V, C.2.

Toxicity to algae static test EC50 - Desmodesmus subspicatus (green algae) - 118 mg/l - 72 h

Method: Directive 67/548/EEC, Annex V, C.3.

Persistence and degradability no data available

Bioaccumulative potential no data available

Mobility in soil no data available

PBT and vPvB assessment no data available

Other adverse effects

An environmental hazard cannot be excluded in the event of unprofessional handling or disposal.

Harmful to aquatic life with long lasting effects.

13. DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS

Product Burn in a chemical incinerator equipped with an afterburner and scrubber but exert extra care in igniting as this material is highly flammable. Offer surplus and non-recyclable solutions to a licensed disposal company. Contact a licensed professional waste disposal service to dispose of this material.


Contaminated packaging Dispose of as unused product.

14. TRANSPORT INFORMATION

DOT (US) UN number: 1037 Class: 2.1 Proper shipping name: Ethyl chloride Reportable Quantity (RQ): 100 lbs Marine pollutant: No Poison Inhalation Hazard: No IMDG UN number: 1037 Class: 2.1 EMS-No: F-D, S-U Proper shipping name: ETHYL CHLORIDE Marine pollutant: No IATA UN number: 1037 Class: 2.1 Proper shipping name: Ethyl chloride IATA Passenger: Not permitted for transport

15. REGULATORY INFORMATION

WHMIS Classification

A Compressed Gas Compressed Gas B1 Flammable gas Flammable gas D2A Very Toxic Material Causing Other Toxic Effects Carcinogen

This product has been classified in accordance with the hazard criteria of the Controlled Products Regulations and the MSDS contains all the information required by the Controlled Products Regulations.

16. OTHER INFORMATION

Text of H-code(s) and R-phrase(s) mentioned in Section 3

Further information Copyright 2014 Sigma-Aldrich Co. LLC. License granted to make unlimited paper copies for internal use only. The above information is believed to be correct but does not purport to be all inclusive and shall be used only as a guide. The information in this document is based on the present state of our knowledge and is applicable to the product with regard to appropriate safety precautions. It does not represent any guarantee of the properties of the product. Sigma-Aldrich Corporation and its Affiliates shall not be held liable for any damage resulting from handling or from contact with the above product. See www.sigma-aldrich.com and/or the reverse side of invoice or packing slip for additional terms and conditions of sale.

SECTION 1: Identification of the substance/mixture and of the company/undertaking

1.1 Product identifiers

Product name : Ethyl Cellulose

CAS-No. : 9004-57-3

1.2 Relevant identified uses of the substance or mixture and uses advised against

Identified uses : Laboratory chemicals, Industrial & for professional use only.

1.3 Details of the supplier of the safety data sheet Company : Central Drug House (P) Ltd 7/28 Vardaan House New Delhi-10002 INDIA

Telephone : +91 11 49404040 Email : [email protected]

1.4 Emergency telephone number Emergency Phone # : +91 11 49404040 (9:00am - 6:00 pm) [Office hours]

SECTION 2: Hazards identification

2.1 Classification of the substance or mixture

Not a hazardous substance or mixture according to Regulation (EC) No. 1272/2008. This substance is not classified as dangerous according to Directive 67/548/EEC.

2.2 Label elements

The product does not need to be labelled in accordance with EC directives or respective national laws.

2.3 Other hazards - none

SECTION 3: Composition/information on ingredients

3.1 Substances CAS-No. : 9004-57-3

No components need to be disclosed according to the applicable regulations.

SECTION 4: First aid measures

4.1 Description of first aid measures

General advice Consult a physician. Show this safety data sheet to the doctor in attendance.

Page 1 of 6

Ethyl Cellulose CAS No 9004-57-3

MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET SDS/MSDS


If inhaled

If breathed in, move person into fresh air. If not breathing, give artificial respiration. Consult a physician.

In case of skin contact

Wash off with soap and plenty of water. Consult a physician.

In case of eye contact

Flush eyes with water as a precaution.

If swallowed

Never give anything by mouth to an unconscious person. Rinse mouth with water. Consult a physician.

4.2 Most important symptoms and effects, both acute and delayed

The most important known symptoms and effects are described in the labelling (see section 2.2) and/or in section 11

4.3 Indication of any immediate medical attention and special treatment needed

no data available

SECTION 5: Firefighting measures

5.1 Extinguishing media

Suitable extinguishing media

Use water spray, alcohol-resistant foam, dry chemical or carbon dioxide.

5.2 Special hazards arising from the substance or mixture

Nature of decomposition products not known.

5.3 Advice for firefighters Wear self contained breathing apparatus for fire fighting if necessary.

5.4 Further information no data available

SECTION 6: Accidental release measures

6.1 Personal precautions, protective equipment and emergency procedures

Use personal protective equipment. Avoid dust formation. Avoid breathing vapours, mist or gas. Ensure adequate ventilation. Avoid breathing dust. For personal protection see section 8.

6.2 Environmental precautions Do not let product enter drains.

6.3 Methods and materials for containment and cleaning up

Pick up and arrange disposal without creating dust. Sweep up and shovel. Keep in suitable, closed containers for disposal.

6.4 Reference to other sections For disposal see section 13.

SECTION 7: Handling and storage

7.1 Precautions for safe handling Provide appropriate exhaust ventilation at places where dust is formed.Normal measures for preventive fire protection.

For precautions see section 2.2.

7.2 Conditions for safe storage, including any incompatibilities Store in cool place. Keep container tightly closed in a dry and well-ventilated place.

7.3 Specific end use(s) Apart from the uses mentioned in section 1.2 no other specific uses are stipulated

Page 2 of 6

SECTION 8: Exposure controls/personal protection

8.1 Control parameters

Components with workplace control parameters

8.2 Exposure controls

Appropriate engineering controls

Handle in accordance with good industrial hygiene and safety practice. Wash hands before breaks and at

the end of workday.


Eye/face protection

Safety glasses with side-shields conforming to EN166 Use equipment for eye protection tested

and approved under appropriate government standards such as NIOSH (US) or EN 166(EU).

Skin protection

Handle with gloves. Gloves must be inspected prior to use. Use proper glove removal technique (without touching glove's outer surface) to avoid skin contact with this product. Dispose of contaminated gloves after use in accordance with applicable laws and good laboratory practices. Wash and dry hands.

Body Protection Choose body protection in relation to its type, to the concentration and amount of dangerous

substances, and to the specific work-place., The type of protective equipment must be selected

according to the concentration and amount of the dangerous substance at the specific workplace.

Respiratory protection

Respiratory protection is not required. Where protection from nuisance levels of dusts are desired, use type N95 (US) or type P1 (EN 143) dust masks. Use respirators and components tested and approved under appropriate government standards such as NIOSH (US) or CEN (EU).

Control of environmental exposure

Do not let product enter drains.

SECTION 9: Physical and chemical properties

9.1 Information on basic physical and chemical properties

a) Appearance Form: powder Colour: beige

b) Odour no data available

c) Odour Threshold no data available

d) pH no data available

e) Melting point/freezing no data available point

f) Initial boiling point and no data available boiling range

g) Flash point no data available

h) Evapouration rate no data available

i) Flammability (solid, gas) no data available

j) Upper/lower no data available flammability or explosive limits

k) Vapour pressure no data available

l) Vapour density no data available

m) Relative density 1,14 g/mL at 25 °C

n) Water solubility no data available

Page 3 of 6

o) Partition coefficient: n- no data available octanol/water

p) Auto-ignition 370 °C temperature

q) Decomposition no data available temperature

r) Viscosity no data available

s) Explosive properties no data available

t) Oxidizing properties no data available

9.2 Other safety information

Bulk density < 0,001 g/l

SECTION 10: Stability and reactivity

10.1 Reactivity

no data available

10.2 Chemical stability

Stable under recommended storage conditions.

10.3 Possibility of hazardous reactions

no data available

10.4 Conditions to avoid

no data available

10.5 Incompatible materials

Strong oxidizing agents

10.6 Hazardous decomposition products

Other decomposition products - no data available

In the event of fire: see section 5

SECTION 11: Toxicological information

11.1 Information on toxicological effects

Acute toxicity LD50 Oral - rat - > 5.000 mg/kg

LD50 Dermal - rabbit - > 5.000 mg/kg

Skin corrosion/irritation Skin - rabbit

Result: Mild skin irritation - 24 h

Serious eye damage/eye irritation no data available

Respiratory or skin sensitisation

no data available

Germ cell mutagenicity no data available

Carcinogenicity

IARC: No component of this product present at levels greater than or equal to 0.1% is identified as

probable, possible or confirmed human carcinogen by IARC.

Reproductive toxicity

no data available

Specific target organ toxicity - single exposure

no data available

Specific target organ toxicity - repeated exposure

no data available

Page 4 of 6

Aspiration hazard

no data available

Additional Information

RTECS: FJ5950500

To the best of our knowledge, the chemical, physical, and toxicological properties have not been

thoroughly investigated.

SECTION 12: Ecological information

12.1 Toxicity

no data available

12.2 Persistence and degradability

no data available

12.3 Bioaccumulative potential

no data available

12.4 Mobility in soil

no data available

12.5 Results of PBT and vPvB assessment

PBT/vPvB assessment not available as chemical safety assessment not required/not conducted

12.6 Other adverse effects

no data available

SECTION 13: Disposal considerations

13.1 Waste treatment methods

Product Offer surplus and non-recyclable solutions to a licensed disposal company. Contact a licensed

professional waste disposal service to dispose of this material. Dissolve or mix the material with a combustible solvent and burn in a chemical incinerator equipped with an afterburner and scrubber.

Contaminated packaging Dispose of as unused product.

SECTION 14: Transport information

14.1 UN number

ADR/RID: -

14.2 UN proper shipping name

ADR/RID: Not dangerous goods IMDG: Not dangerous goods IATA: Not dangerous goods

14.3 Transport hazard class(es)

ADR/RID: -

14.4 Packaging group

ADR/RID: -

14.5 Environmental hazards

ADR/RID: no

14.6 Special precautions for user

no data available

SECTION 15: Regulatory information

IMDG: - IATA: -

IMDG: - IATA: -

IMDG: - IATA: -

IMDG Marine pollutant: no IATA: no

This safety datasheet complies with the requirements of Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006.

15.1 Safety, health and environmental regulations/legislation specific for the substance or mixture

no data available

Page 5 of 6

15.2 Chemical Safety Assessment

For this product a chemical safety assessment was not carried out

SECTION 16: Other information

Further information The above information is believed to be correct but does not purport to be all inclusive and shall be used only as a guide. The information in this document is based on the present state of our knowledge and is applicable to the product with regard to appropriate safety precautions. It does not represent any guarantee of the properties of the product. Central Drug House (P) Ltd and its Affiliates shall not be held liable for any damage resulting from handling or from contact with the above product. See www.cdhfinechemical.com for additional terms and conditions of sale.

Page 6 of 6

SECTION 1: Identification of the substance/mixture and of the company/undertaking

1.1 Product identifiersProduct name : Toluene

CAS-No. : 108-88-3

1.2 Relevant identified uses of the substance or mixture and uses advised againstIdentified uses : Laboratory chemicals, Industrial & for professional use only.

1.3 Details of the supplier of the safety data sheetCompany : Central Drug House (P) Ltd

7/28 Vardaan HouseNew Delhi-10002INDIA

Telephone : +91 11 49404040Email : [email protected]

1.4 Emergency telephone numberEmergency Phone # : +91 11 49404040 (9:00am - 6:00 pm) [Office hours]

SECTION 2: Hazards identification

2.1 Classification of the substance or mixtureClassification according to Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008Flammable liquids (Category 2), H225Skin irritation (Category 2), H315

Reproductive toxicity (Category 2), H361dSpecific target organ toxicity - single exposure (Category 3), Central nervous system, H336Specific target organ toxicity - repeated exposure (Category 2), H373Aspiration hazard (Category 1), H304

For the full text of the H-Statements mentioned in this Section, see Section 16.

Classification according to EU Directives 67/548/EEC or 1999/45/ECF Highly flammable R11

R63Xn Harmful R48/20, R65Xi Irritant R38

R67

For the full text of the R-phrases mentioned in this Section, see Section 16.

2.2 Label elementsLabelling according Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008Pictogram

Page 1 of 8

TolueneCAS No 108-88-3

MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETSDS/MSDS

Signal word Danger

Hazard statement(s)H225 Highly flammable liquid and vapour.H304 May be fatal if swallowed and enters airways.H315 Causes skin irritation.H336 May cause drowsiness or dizziness.H361d Suspected of damaging the unborn child.H373 May cause damage to organs through prolonged or repeated exposure.

Precautionary statement(s)P210 Keep away from heat, hot surfaces, sparks, open flames and other

ignition sources. No smoking.P261 Avoid breathing vapours.P281 Use personal protective equipment as required.P301 + P310 IF SWALLOWED: Immediately call a POISON CENTER or doctor/

physician.P331 Do NOT induce vomiting.

Supplemental Hazard noneStatements

2.3 Other hazardsThis substance/mixture contains no components considered to be either persistent, bioaccumulative andtoxic (PBT), or very persistent and very bioaccumulative (vPvB) at levels of 0.1% or higher.

SECTION 3: Composition/information on ingredients3.1 Substances

Formula : C6H5.CH3

Molecular weight : 92,14 g/molCAS-No. : 108-88-3EC-No. : 203-625-9Index-No. : 601-021-00-3Registration number : 01-2119471310-51-XXXX

Hazardous ingredients according to Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008Component Classification Concentration

TolueneCAS-No. 108-88-3 Flam. Liq. 2; Skin Irrit. 2; Repr. <= 100 %EC-No. 203-625-9 2; STOT SE 3; STOT RE 2;Index-No. 601-021-00-3 Asp. Tox. 1; H225, H304,Registration number 01-2119471310-51-XXXX H315, H336, H361d, H373

Hazardous ingredients according to Directive 1999/45/ECComponent Classification Concentration

TolueneCAS-No. 108-88-3 F, Xn, Repr.Cat.3, R11 - R38 - <= 100 %EC-No. 203-625-9 R48/20 - R63 - R65 - R67Index-No. 601-021-00-3Registration number 01-2119471310-51-XXXX

For the full text of the H-Statements and R-Phrases mentioned in this Section, see Section 16

SECTION 4: First aid measures4.1 Description of first aid measures

General adviceConsult a physician. Show this safety data sheet to the doctor in attendance.

Page 2 of 8

If inhaledIf breathed in, move person into fresh air. If not breathing, give artificial respiration. Consult a physician.

In case of skin contactWash off with soap and plenty of water. Consult a physician.

In case of eye contactFlush eyes with water as a precaution.

If swallowedDo NOT induce vomiting. Never give anything by mouth to an unconscious person. Rinse mouth with

water. Consult a physician.

4.2 Most important symptoms and effects, both acute and delayedThe most important known symptoms and effects are described in the labelling (see section 2.2) and/or insection 11

4.3 Indication of any immediate medical attention and special treatment neededNo data available

SECTION 5: Firefighting measures5.1 Extinguishing media

Suitable extinguishing mediaUse water spray, alcohol-resistant foam, dry chemical or carbon dioxide.

5.2 Special hazards arising from the substance or mixtureCarbon oxides

5.3 Advice for firefightersWear self-contained breathing apparatus for firefighting if necessary.

5.4 Further informationUse water spray to cool unopened containers.

SECTION 6: Accidental release measures6.1 Personal precautions, protective equipment and emergency procedures

Use personal protective equipment. Avoid breathing vapours, mist or gas. Ensure adequate ventilation.Remove all sources of ignition. Evacuate personnel to safe areas. Beware of vapours accumulating toform explosive concentrations. Vapours can accumulate in low areas.For personal protection see section 8.

6.2 Environmental precautionsPrevent further leakage or spillage if safe to do so. Do not let product enter drains. Discharge into theenvironment must be avoided.

6.3 Methods and materials for containment and cleaning upContain spillage, and then collect with an electrically protected vacuum cleaner or by wet-brushing andplace in container for disposal according to local regulations (see section 13).

6.4 Reference to other sectionsFor disposal see section 13.

SECTION 7: Handling and storage

7.1 Precautions for safe handlingAvoid contact with skin and eyes. Avoid inhalation of vapour or mist.

Keep away from sources of ignition - No smoking.Take measures to prevent the build up of electrostaticcharge.

For precautions see section 2.2.

7.2 Conditions for safe storage, including any incompatibilitiesStore in cool place. Keep container tightly closed in a dry and well-ventilated place. Containers which areopened must be carefully resealed and kept upright to prevent leakage.

Handle and store under inert gas.Storage class (TRGS 510): Flammable liquids

Page 3 of 8

7.3 Specific end use(s)Apart from the uses mentioned in section 1.2 no other specific uses are stipulated

SECTION 8: Exposure controls/personal protection8.1 Control parameters

Components with workplace control parameters8.2 Exposure controls

Appropriate engineering controlsHandle in accordance with good industrial hygiene and safety practice. Wash hands before breaks and at

the end of workday.


Eye/face protectionFace shield and safety glasses Use equipment for eye protection tested and approved under

appropriate government standards such as NIOSH (US) or EN 166(EU).

Skin protectionHandle with gloves. Gloves must be inspected prior to use. Use proper glove removal technique(without touching glove's outer surface) to avoid skin contact with this product. Dispose ofcontaminated gloves after use in accordance with applicable laws and good laboratory practices.Wash and dry hands.

Body ProtectionComplete suit protecting against chemicals, Flame retardant antistatic protective clothing., Thetype of protective equipment must be selected according to the concentration and amount of thedangerous substance at the specific workplace.

Respiratory protectionWhere risk assessment shows air-purifying respirators are appropriate use a full-face respirator withmulti-purpose combination (US) or type ABEK (EN 14387) respirator cartridges as a backup toengineering controls. If the respirator is the sole means of protection, use a full-face supplied airrespirator. Use respirators and components tested and approved under appropriate governmentstandards such as NIOSH (US) or CEN (EU).

Control of environmental exposurePrevent further leakage or spillage if safe to do so. Do not let product enter drains. Discharge intothe environment must be avoided.

SECTION 9: Physical and chemical properties9.1 Information on basic physical and chemical properties

a) Appearance Form: liquidColour: colourless

b) Odour aromatic

c) Odour Threshold No data available

d) pH No data available

e) Melting point/freezing Melting point/range: -93 °Cpoint

f) Initial boiling point and 110 - 111 °Cboiling range

g) Flash point 4,0 °C - closed cup

h) Evaporation rate No data available

i) Flammability (solid, gas) No data available

j) Upper/lower Upper explosion limit: 7 %(V)flammability or Lower explosion limit: 1,2 %(V)explosive limits

k) Vapour pressure 29,1 hPa at 20,0 °C

Page 4 of 8

l) Vapour density No data available

m) Relative density 0,865 g/mL at 25 °C

n) Water solubility 0,5 g/l at 15 °C

o) Partition coefficient: n- No data availableoctanol/water

p) Auto-ignition 535,0 °Ctemperature

q) Decomposition No data availabletemperature

r) Viscosity No data available

s) Explosive properties No data available

t) Oxidizing properties No data available

9.2 Other safety informationNo data available

SECTION 10: Stability and reactivity10.1 Reactivity

No data available

10.2 Chemical stabilityStable under recommended storage conditions.

10.3 Possibility of hazardous reactionsNo data available

10.4 Conditions to avoidHeat, flames and sparks.

10.5 Incompatible materialsStrong oxidizing agents

10.6 Hazardous decomposition productsOther decomposition products - No data available

In the event of fire: see section 5

SECTION 11: Toxicological information

11.1 Information on toxicological effectsAcute toxicityLD50 Oral - Rat - > 5.580 mg/kg

LC50 Inhalation - Rat - 4 h - 12.500 - 28.800 mg/m3

LD50 Dermal - Rabbit - 12.196 mg/kg

Skin corrosion/irritationSkin - Rabbit

Result: Skin irritation - 24 h

Serious eye damage/eye irritationEyes - Rabbit

Result: No eye irritation(OECD Test Guideline 405)

Respiratory or skin sensitisationNo data available

Germ cell mutagenicityRat

Liver

Page 5 of 8

DNA damage

Carcinogenicity

IARC: 3 - Group 3: Not classifiable as to its carcinogenicity to humans (Toluene)

Reproductive toxicityDamage to fetus possibleSuspected human reproductive toxicant

Reproductive toxicity - Rat - InhalationPaternal Effects: Spermatogenesis (including genetic material, sperm morphology,motility, and count).

Experiments have shown reproductive toxicity effects in male and female laboratory animals.

Developmental Toxicity - Rat - Oral

Effects on Embryo or Fetus: Fetotoxicity (except death, e.g., stunted fetus).

Specific target organ toxicity - single exposureNo data available

Specific target organ toxicity - repeated exposureNo data available

Aspiration hazardNo data available

Additional InformationRTECS: XS5250000

Lung irritation, chest pain, pulmonary edema, Inhalation studies on toluene have demonstrated the

development of inflammatory and ulcerous lesions of the penis, prepuce, and scrotum in animals., Centralnervous system

SECTION 12: Ecological information

12.1 ToxicityToxicity to fish LC50 - Oncorhynchus mykiss (rainbow trout) - 7,63 mg/l - 96 h

NOEC - Pimephales promelas (fathead minnow) - 5,44 mg/l - 7 d

Toxicity to daphnia andother aquaticinvertebrates

Toxicity to algae

EC50 - Daphnia magna (Water flea) - 8,00 mg/l - 24 h

Immobilization EC50 - Daphnia magna (Water flea) - 6 mg/l - 48 h

EC50 - Chlorella vulgaris (Fresh water algae) - 245,00 mg/l - 24 h

EC50 - Pseudokirchneriella subcapitata (green algae) - 10,00 mg/l - 24 h

12.2 Persistence and degradabilityBiodegradability Result: - Readily biodegradable.

12.3 Bioaccumulative potentialBioaccumulation

12.4 Mobility in soilNo data available

Leuciscus idus (Golden orfe) - 3 d- 0,05 mg/l

Bioconcentration factor (BCF): 90

12.5 Results of PBT and vPvB assessmentThis substance/mixture contains no components considered to be either persistent, bioaccumulative andtoxic (PBT), or very persistent and very bioaccumulative (vPvB) at levels of 0.1% or higher.

12.6 Other adverse effectsToxic to aquatic life.

SECTION 13: Disposal considerations Page 6 of 8

13.1 Waste treatment methodsProductBurn in a chemical incinerator equipped with an afterburner and scrubber but exert extra care in ignitingas this material is highly flammable. Offer surplus and non-recyclable solutions to a licensed disposalcompany.

Contaminated packagingDispose of as unused product.

SECTION 14: Transport information

14.1 UN numberADR/RID: 1294 IMDG: 1294 IATA: 1294

14.2 UN proper shipping nameADR/RID: TOLUENEIMDG: TOLUENEIATA: Toluene

14.3 Transport hazard class(es)ADR/RID: 3 IMDG: 3 IATA: 3

14.4 Packaging groupADR/RID: II IMDG: II IATA: II

14.5 Environmental hazardsADR/RID: no IMDG Marine pollutant: no IATA: no

14.6 Special precautions for userNo data available

SECTION 15: Regulatory informationThis safety datasheet complies with the requirements of Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006.

15.1 Safety, health and environmental regulations/legislation specific for the substance or mixture

No data available

15.2 Chemical Safety AssessmentFor this product a chemical safety assessment was not carried out

SECTION 16: Other informationFull text of H-Statements referred to under sections 2 and 3.

Asp. Tox. Aspiration hazardFlam. Liq. Flammable liquidsH225 Highly flammable liquid and vapour.H304 May be fatal if swallowed and enters airways.H315 Causes skin irritation.H336 May cause drowsiness or dizziness.H361d Suspected of damaging the unborn child.H373 May cause damage to organs through prolonged or repeated exposure.Repr. Reproductive toxicitySkin Irrit. Skin irritationSTOT RE Specific target organ toxicity - repeated exposure

Page 7 of 8

Full text of R-phrases referred to under sections 2 and 3F Highly flammableXn HarmfulR11 Highly flammable.R38 Irritating to skin.R48/20 Harmful: danger of serious damage to health by prolonged exposure through

inhalation.R63 Possible risk of harm to the unborn child.R65 Harmful: may cause lung damage if swallowed.R67 Vapours may cause drowsiness and dizziness.Repr.Cat.3 Toxic to Reproduction Category 3

Further informationThe above information is believed to be correct but does not purport to be all inclusive and shall be usedonly as a guide. The information in this document is based on the present state of our knowledge and isapplicable to the product with regard to appropriate safety precautions. It does not represent anyguarantee of the properties of the product. Central Drug House (P) Ltd and its Affiliates shall not be heldliable for any damage resulting from handling or from contact with the above product. Seewww.cdhfinechemical.com for additional terms and conditions of sale.

Page 8 of 8

Draft Environmental Impact Assessment - Gujarat Pollution ...

Documents

Transcript of Draft Environmental Impact Assessment - Gujarat Pollution ...